# PaperFox Complete Documentation

> AI-first conference paper management system

This file contains the complete documentation and blog content for PaperFox, formatted for LLM consumption.

Website: https://paperfox.ai
Documentation: https://paperfox.ai/docs
Blog: https://paperfox.ai/blog

---

# Documentation

# FAQ

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/faq
Description: Answers to common questions about using PaperFox

Find quick answers to the most common questions about PaperFox conference management platform.

## Quick Answers

### How does the free tier work?
You can manage up to 20 submissions completely free, with 30 AI credits included. No credit card required. Perfect for small workshops and conferences. After your free 20 submissions, each additional submission costs just $1 (launch pricing, normally $2), and you get 30 bonus AI credits per paid submission.

### Can I use my own website or registration system?
Yes! Each part of PaperFox — website builder, peer review, program management, and registration — can be used separately. Use just the features you need to enhance your existing conference setup, or combine them all for a complete solution.

### Do you support multi-track, multi-phase conferences?
Yes! PaperFox supports multiple tracks with independent submission forms, review processes, and deadlines. Each track can have multiple phases (initial submission, revision, camera-ready, rebuttal) with customizable workflows.

### How does conference registration payment work?
We use Stripe Connect for secure payment processing. Registrants pay, and funds go directly to your connected Stripe account. We charge a flat $1 per registration, plus standard Stripe fees (2.9% + 30¢ per transaction, and 0.25% + 25¢ per payout).

### Is my data secure and private?
Absolutely. We use industry-standard encryption, secure AWS infrastructure, and all payments are processed securely through Stripe. Regarding privacy: some AI features (like smart reviewer assignment) send submission titles, abstracts, author info, and reviewer profiles to OpenAI for processing. Conference chairs can choose to use standard features instead — no information leaves our platform unless AI features are used. Visit our [Community Forum](/community/forum) if you want to opt out of all AI features.

### Can PaperFox handle large conferences with thousands of submissions?
Yes. We regularly load test our infrastructure with thousands of concurrent users. Our tests show 100% success rate with 5,000 simultaneous submission submissions, each uploading 2MB+ PDF files. Direct-to-cloud uploads via AWS S3 ensure fast, reliable file transfers even during deadline rushes. See our [Performance & Scalability](/docs/engineering/load-testing) report for detailed results.

### How is PaperFox different from EasyChair, Microsoft CMT, or PCS?
Unlike traditional systems, PaperFox is an all-in-one platform with built-in AI features, modern UI, integrated website builder, program management, registration, and mobile app — all with transparent pay-per-use pricing. No annual fees or per-reviewer charges. We also offer migration support and consultation if you're switching from another system.

---

# Welcome

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs
Description: Complete guide to using PaperFox conference management platform

PaperFox is an AI-first conference management platform that streamlines the entire lifecycle of an academic conference — from site setup, submissions, and peer review through decisions, registration, and the final program.

<Callout type="info" title="Fastest way to find an answer: Ask AI">
Click the **Ask AI** button in the bottom-right corner of any docs page and ask in plain language — for example, "How do I invite reviewers?" or "Can authors edit a submission after the deadline?". It answers from the latest documentation and links to the relevant pages. Sign in with your PaperFox account to start asking.
</Callout>

## Documentation by Role

### Organizers

- **[Chairs](/docs/chairs/chair-workflow)** — Conference setup, website, forms, program, registration, payments, and notifications
- **[Track Chairs](/docs/track-chairs/track-chair-workflow)** — Track configuration, reviewer pool, submissions, review assignments, and decisions
- **[Senior Editors](/docs/senior-editors/senior-editor-workflow)** — Managing submission assignments and distributing them to Associate Editors
- **[Associate Editors](/docs/associate-editors/associate-editor-workflow)** — Managing reviewer assignments for assigned submissions

### Participants

- **[Reviewers](/docs/reviewers/reviewer-workflow)** — Accepting assignments, writing reviews, and delegating to sub-reviewers
- **[Authors](/docs/authors/author-workflow)** — Submitting submissions, editing submissions, revisions, withdrawals, and conference registration

### Platform

- **[All Users](/docs/users/signing-in)** — Signing in, account settings, email addresses, research profile, invitations, and the mobile app
- **[MCP](/docs/mcp)** — Connect AI assistants (Claude, ChatGPT, Gemini) to your conference data
- **[API](/docs/api)** — Read conferences, submissions, reviews, assignments, and registrations from your own scripts

## AI-First by Design

PaperFox is built to work with AI at every step:

- **Ask AI** — the assistant in the bottom-right corner of these docs answers "how do I…" questions instantly
- **[MCP server](/docs/mcp)** — let your AI assistant query submissions, check review progress, and [build your conference program](/docs/chairs/build-program-with-mcp) conversationally
- **Smart workflows** — [automatic reviewer matching](/docs/track-chairs/auto-assign-reviewers), [duplicate detection](/docs/track-chairs/duplicate-detection), and [AI content detection](/docs/track-chairs/ai-content-detection)

## Need Help?

- **Ask AI** — the quickest route for most questions, right from this page
- **[FAQ](/docs/faq)** — answers to common questions
- **[Community Forum](/community/forum)** — free help from the PaperFox community
- **[Support Tickets](/docs/chairs/getting-help)** — dedicated support for conferences with a support package

---

# MCP

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/mcp
Description: Connect AI assistants to PaperFox using the Model Context Protocol

PaperFox provides a [Model Context Protocol (MCP)](https://modelcontextprotocol.io/) server that allows AI assistants like Claude and ChatGPT to interact with your conference data securely.

With PaperFox MCP, your AI assistant can:

- List conferences you have access to
- Get conference and track statistics
- Monitor review progress
- Query submission data
- Read reviewer scores and comments to help shortlist or triage submissions

All actions respect your existing permissions—the AI can only access data you're authorized to see.

<Callout type="warning" title="Privacy Notice">
When you use MCP, data returned by PaperFox (including submission titles, abstracts, and author information) is sent to your AI provider as part of the conversation. [Learn more →](#privacy)
</Callout>

## Available Tools

| Tool | Description | Required Role |
|------|-------------|---------------|
| `list_conferences` | List all conferences with your roles | Any authenticated user |
| `list_my_submissions` | List your own submission submissions for a conference | Any author or submitter |
| `get_program` | Get the published conference program (days, sessions, talks) | Any authenticated user |
| `get_conference_stats` | Conference-level statistics (submissions, reviews, participants) | Conference Chair |
| `get_track_stats` | Detailed track statistics | Chair or Track Chair |
| `get_review_progress` | Review completion rates and status | Chair or Track Chair |
| `search_submissions` | Search submissions by author name or email | Chair or Track Chair |
| `get_submission_info` | Get details about a specific submission | Author, Chair, or Assigned Reviewer |
| `list_submissions` | List submissions with optional decision/status/track filters, pagination, and optional per-submission review signals (`includeReviewSignals=true`) | Conference Chair |
| `get_submission_reviews` | Get all completed reviews for one submission — reviewer scores, free-text comments, and the review form schema | Conference Chair or Track Chair |
| `get_program_schema` | Get program schema, enums, conference dates/timezone/tracks | Conference Chair |
| `get_program_draft` | Get the current program with stable IDs for editing | Conference Chair |
| `import_program_draft` | Bulk-create (replace, with confirmation) or append to a program from an AI-generated plan | Conference Chair |
| `upsert_program_day` | Create or update a program day (child times move with a date change) | Conference Chair |
| `upsert_program_session` | Create, update, reorder, or move a session between days | Conference Chair |
| `upsert_program_item` | Create, update, reorder, or move an item (submissions, talks, breaks) | Conference Chair |
| `delete_program_entity` | Delete a day, session, or item (submissions are not touched) | Conference Chair |

<Callout type="info" title="Build your program by chatting">
Conference chairs can use the program-building tools above to draft and refine the entire conference schedule through conversation with Claude or ChatGPT. See [Build Program with MCP →](/docs/chairs/build-program-with-mcp) for the full workflow.
</Callout>

## Setup Instructions

**PaperFox MCP URL:**

```
https://www.paperfox.ai/mcp
```

### Claude Desktop

<Callout type="warning" title="Paid Plan Required">
Remote MCP servers require Claude Pro, Max, Team, or Enterprise plans.
</Callout>

Claude Desktop uses **Connectors** for remote MCP servers (the JSON config file is only for local servers).

1. Open Claude Desktop
2. Go to **Settings → Connectors**
3. Click **Add Connector** or the **+** button
4. Enter `PaperFox` as the name and `https://www.paperfox.ai/mcp` as the URL
5. Click **Add**

<img src="/docs/mcp/claude-add-connector.png" alt="Claude Desktop Add Connector dialog" width="500" />

6. When prompted, sign in to PaperFox and authorize access

<img src="/docs/mcp/oauth-consent.png" alt="PaperFox OAuth consent screen" width="400" />

For more details, see [Claude's Remote MCP documentation](https://support.claude.com/en/articles/11503834-building-custom-connectors-via-remote-mcp-servers).

### ChatGPT

<Callout type="warning" title="Paid Plan Required">
MCP support in ChatGPT requires Business, Enterprise, or Edu plans with Developer Mode enabled. This only works on [chatgpt.com](https://chatgpt.com), not the mobile or desktop apps.
</Callout>

ChatGPT supports MCP through **Developer Mode**:

1. Go to [chatgpt.com](https://chatgpt.com) and click your profile icon, then **Settings**

<img src="/docs/mcp/chatgpt-settings-menu.png" alt="ChatGPT settings menu" width="300" />

2. Navigate to **Apps** and enable **Developer mode**

<img src="/docs/mcp/chatgpt-developer-mode.png" alt="ChatGPT Developer mode toggle" width="500" />

3. Click **Create app** and fill in:
   - **Name**: `PaperFox`
   - **MCP Server URL**: `https://www.paperfox.ai/mcp`
   - **Authentication**: `OAuth`
   - Check the acknowledgment box and click **Create**

<img src="/docs/mcp/chatgpt-create-app.png" alt="ChatGPT create app form" width="400" />

4. When prompted, sign in to PaperFox and authorize access

<img src="/docs/mcp/chatgpt-oauth-consent.png" alt="PaperFox OAuth consent screen for ChatGPT" width="400" />

For more details, see [ChatGPT Developer Mode documentation](https://help.openai.com/en/articles/12584461-developer-mode-apps-and-full-mcp-connectors-in-chatgpt-beta).

### Cursor IDE

Add PaperFox to your Cursor MCP configuration (`~/.cursor/mcp.json`):

```json
{
  "mcpServers": {
    "paperfox": {
      "url": "https://www.paperfox.ai/mcp"
    }
  }
}
```

After adding the configuration:

1. Open Cursor Settings and navigate to **Tools & MCP**.

<img src="/docs/mcp/cursor-settings-mcp.png" alt="Cursor Settings - Tools & MCP" width="700" />

2. PaperFox will appear with "Needs authentication". Click **Connect**.

<img src="/docs/mcp/cursor-needs-auth.png" alt="PaperFox needs authentication" width="600" />

3. When prompted to open the external website, click **Open** to authorize.

<img src="/docs/mcp/cursor-oauth-prompt.png" alt="Cursor OAuth prompt" width="500" />

4. Sign in to PaperFox and authorize access. Once connected, you'll see the PaperFox tools enabled.

<img src="/docs/mcp/cursor-connected.png" alt="PaperFox connected in Cursor" width="600" />

5. Use **Agent mode** in the AI pane to access PaperFox tools.

For more details, see [Cursor MCP documentation](https://cursor.com/docs/context/mcp).

### Other MCP-Compatible Clients

Any MCP-compatible client can connect using:

- **MCP Endpoint**: `https://www.paperfox.ai/mcp`
- **Transport**: Streamable HTTP
- **Authentication**: OAuth 2.1 with PKCE

The client will automatically discover OAuth endpoints via:
- `https://www.paperfox.ai/.well-known/oauth-protected-resource`
- `https://www.paperfox.ai/.well-known/oauth-authorization-server`

## Usage Examples

### Example 1: Discover your conferences

**Prompt:** *"What conferences do I have access to?"*

**What happens:**
- PaperFox returns all conferences where you have a role (chair, reviewer, author, etc.)
- Shows conference name, dates, location, and your specific roles
- Use this to discover conference slugs needed for other tools

**Example response:**
```
You have access to 2 conferences:

1. DSW 2027 (Data Science Workshop 2027)
   - June 15–18, 2027 · Boston, MA
   - Your roles: Conference Chair

2. ICMR 2027 (International Conference on ML Research)
   - September 10–12, 2027 · London, UK
   - Your roles: Reviewer
```

### Example 2: Check submission and review statistics

**Prompt:** *"Show me the submission statistics for DSW 2027 and how reviews are going"*

**What happens:**
- PaperFox retrieves conference-level stats: total submissions, status breakdown (submitted, under review, accepted, rejected), and reviewer counts
- Then fetches review progress: assignments completed vs. pending, completion rate, and reviewers with outstanding work
- Requires Conference Chair or Track Chair role

**Example response:**
```
DSW 2027 Statistics:
- 142 total submissions (28% of 500 limit)
  - 45 submitted, 67 under review, 18 accepted, 12 rejected
- 24 active reviewers, 89 registrations

Review Progress:
- 216 total assignments, 148 completed (68%)
- 3 reviewers with 5+ pending reviews
```

### Example 3: Look up a specific submission

**Prompt:** *"What's the status of submission dsw2027-42?"*

**What happens:**
- PaperFox retrieves submission details: title, abstract, status, version history
- For chairs: shows authors, reviewer assignments, and review status
- For reviewers: shows submission content (authors hidden in double-blind review)
- For authors: shows their own submission with revision status

**Example response:**
```
Submission dsw2027-42: "Efficient Transformer Architectures for Edge Devices"
- Status: Under Review (version 1)
- Track: Main Track
- Submitted: March 1, 2027
- Authors: Jane Smith (MIT), John Doe (Stanford)
- Keywords: transformers, edge computing, model compression
- 2 of 3 reviews completed
```

### Example 4: Shortlist submissions based on reviews

**Prompt:** *"For CSWIM 2026, pick 5 accepted submissions that look strongest based on reviewer signal and content, and give me a short rationale for each."*

**What happens:**
- The AI calls `list_submissions` once with `decision=['ACCEPT','CONDITIONAL_ACCEPT']` and `includeReviewSignals=true` — this returns abstracts, keywords, and compact review aggregates (review count, avg/min/max scores, recommendation values) for every accepted submission in a single call.
- The AI reasons over content + aggregate scores to pick a shortlist.
- For each shortlisted submission, it calls `get_submission_reviews` to read the full reviewer comments so its rationale cites specific reviewer language rather than hallucinating one.
- Requires Conference Chair role (or Track Chair role for submissions in your track).

This pattern keeps the big scan cheap (one call, no long comment text) and reserves the expensive full-review reads for the N submissions you actually want to talk about.

## Usage Limits

Every authenticated user gets **50 free MCP tool calls per day**. After that, each additional call costs **0.5 credits** (at $1 = 300 credits, that's about $0.002 per call).

| Daily Usage | Cost |
|-------------|------|
| First 50 calls | Free |
| 51–2,000 calls | 0.5 credits each |
| Over 2,000 calls | Blocked (daily limit) |

A typical session uses 5–15 tool calls, so most users will stay well within the free tier.

If you run out of free calls and don't have enough credits, the AI will let you know and provide a link to [purchase credits](/settings/billing). Credit usage appears in your [credit history](/settings/billing) as "MCP Tool Call" entries.

The daily limit resets at midnight UTC.

## Authentication Flow

When you first connect an AI assistant to PaperFox:

1. The client discovers the OAuth server automatically
2. A browser window opens for you to sign in to PaperFox
3. You review and approve the permissions requested
4. The client receives secure tokens to access your data
5. Tokens refresh automatically—you won't need to re-authenticate frequently

Your credentials are never shared with the AI assistant. Only secure, scoped access tokens are used.

## Security

- **OAuth 2.1 with PKCE**: Industry-standard secure authentication
- **Scoped Access**: AI only accesses what you authorize
- **Role-Based**: Respects your existing PaperFox permissions
- **Minimal Write Access**: Most tools are read-only; write tools (track and program management) are limited to conference chairs
- **Token Rotation**: Refresh tokens are rotated for security
- **Audience Validation**: Tokens are bound to PaperFox (RFC 8707)

## Privacy

PaperFox MCP only provides access to data you already have permission to see in the PaperFox web interface. No additional data is collected or stored when using MCP. See our [Privacy Policy](/privacy) for details.

<Callout type="warning" title="Submission Data Is Sent to Your AI Provider">
When you use MCP tools, the data returned by PaperFox is sent to the AI provider (e.g., Anthropic for Claude, OpenAI for ChatGPT) as part of your conversation. The following tools return submission-related content that will be shared with the AI provider:

- **`get_submission_info`** — title, abstract, keywords, author names/emails/affiliations, review status
- **`list_my_submissions`** — titles, author names, submission status for all your submissions in a conference
- **`list_submissions`** — titles, abstracts, keywords, author names/affiliations, decision/status; when `includeReviewSignals=true`, also per-submission review scores (no comment text)
- **`get_submission_reviews`** — full reviewer comments, confidential comments, scores, and reviewer names for one submission
- **`search_submissions`** — titles, author names/emails/affiliations, submission status for matching submissions
- **`get_conference_stats`** / **`get_track_stats`** — aggregate submission and review statistics
- **`get_review_progress`** — reviewer names and review completion status

If your conference has strict confidentiality requirements or your submissions contain sensitive unpublished research, **do not use MCP** to access that data. Use the PaperFox web interface directly instead — it does not share data with any third-party AI provider.
</Callout>

## Troubleshooting

### "Access Denied" errors

Ensure you have the required role for the tool you're trying to use. For example, `get_conference_stats` requires Conference Chair access.

### Connection fails

1. Check that you're signed in to PaperFox
2. Verify the MCP URL is correct: `https://www.paperfox.ai/mcp`
3. Try removing and re-adding the server configuration
4. Check your network connection

### Token expired

Most clients handle token refresh automatically. If you encounter persistent auth errors, remove the server configuration and re-add it to trigger a fresh authentication.

### Claude Desktop: "Server not connecting"

Remote MCP servers must be added via **Settings → Connectors**, not the JSON config file. The `claude_desktop_config.json` file is only for local MCP servers.

### ChatGPT: "MCP not available"

Ensure you have a Business, Enterprise, or Edu subscription and are using [chatgpt.com](https://chatgpt.com) (not the mobile or desktop apps). Go to **Settings → Apps** and enable **Developer mode**.

---

# API Changelog

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/changelog
Description: Every change to the PaperFox API, newest first.

Changes that are additive under the [compatibility policy](/docs/api/compatibility)
— new endpoints, new optional parameters, new response fields, new enum members —
ship without a version bump and are recorded here. Breaking changes would require
`/api/v2`; there have been none.

Subscribe to this page's URL if your integration is load-bearing.

## Submission creation withdrawn

`POST /api/v1/submissions` was briefly available and has been **removed**. It
required the caller to be listed among the authors, which meant it only served an
author scripting their own submission — not a workflow anyone actually has. The
real need we expect is a chair **importing submissions from another system**, and that
wants a different shape (submitting on behalf of authors, in batches). We would
rather ship that than keep an endpoint aimed at the wrong user.

The API is read-only again. If you were relying on this endpoint, or you want
programmatic submission, tell us — that's exactly the signal we're waiting for.

## v1 — initial release

The first public version. Read-only.

**Endpoints**

- `GET /me` — the key's owner, its scopes and restriction, and the conferences
  and roles it can reach.
- `GET /conferences`, `GET /conferences/{conference-slug}` — conferences you hold
  a role in, plus tracks and phases.
- `GET /submissions`, `GET /submissions/{submission-slug}` — scoped to your role:
  chairs see the conference, track chairs see their tracks, authors see their own
  submissions.
- `GET /submissions/{submission-slug}/reviews` — full review content. Conference
  chairs and track chairs only.
- `GET /assignments` — your own review assignments.
- `GET /registrations` — conference chairs only.

**Conventions**

- Bearer API keys (`pfx_live_…`), created under **Settings → API Keys**. A key
  acts with your live roles — never more.
- Cursor pagination (`limit` + opaque `cursor` → `nextCursor`, `hasMore`).
- Errors follow [RFC 9457](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9457.html)
  (`application/problem+json`); branch on `code`.
- Rate limits are per user, with `X-RateLimit-*` and `RateLimit` headers on every
  response.
- Timestamps are RFC 3339 UTC.
- The OpenAPI 3.1 spec is published at
  [`/api/v1/openapi.json`](/api/v1/openapi.json).

---

# Compatibility Policy

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/compatibility
Description: What we can change without warning, what counts as breaking, and how much notice you get.

The API is versioned in the path (`/api/v1`). This page is the contract: it tells
you which changes we may ship at any time — so you can write a client that won't
break — and what we owe you when something genuinely has to change.

## Changes we can make at any time

These are **not** breaking, and they can ship without notice. Your client must
tolerate them:

- **New endpoints.**
- **New optional query parameters.**
- **New fields in a response object.** Ignore fields you don't recognize.
- **New members in an enum** (for example a new `status`, or a chair adding a
  custom decision type). Don't `switch` exhaustively over an enum and throw on
  the default branch.
- **New response headers.**
- **A change in the length or format of an opaque string** — ids, cursors, and
  `pfx_live_…` keys are opaque. Don't parse them; don't assume a maximum length
  beyond 255 characters.
- **Reordering of object keys**, and reordering of list items where no sort order
  is documented.

<Callout type="warn">
  The two that bite people are **new response fields** and **new enum members**.
  A client that rejects unknown fields, or that treats an unfamiliar enum value as
  a fatal error, will break on a routine additive release. Parse leniently.
</Callout>

## Changes that count as breaking

These require a new major version (`/api/v2`), which we would rather never ship:

- Removing or renaming an endpoint, a query parameter, or a response field.
- Adding a **required** request parameter, or making an existing optional one
  required.
- Changing the type of a field.
- **Removing** a member from an enum.
- Tightening validation on an existing parameter so previously-accepted requests
  start failing.
- Changing authentication or authorization requirements.
- Changing the observable meaning of an existing field.

## Deprecation

If we ever retire an endpoint, it will:

1. Return a **`Deprecation`** header ([RFC 9745](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9745.html))
   from the moment it is deprecated.
2. Return a **`Sunset`** header ([RFC 8594](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc8594.html))
   with the date it stops working.
3. Carry a `Link` header pointing at the migration guide.

You get **at least 12 months** between the `Deprecation` header appearing and the
`Sunset` date. Watch for those headers in your integration — logging them is the
cheapest early-warning system you can build.

## Writing a durable client

- **Ignore unknown fields and unknown enum values.** Treat an unrecognized enum
  as "some other value", not as an error.
- **Treat ids, slugs, and cursors as opaque.** Don't construct or decode a cursor;
  pass back the `nextCursor` you were given.
- **Branch on the error `code`, not the `detail` string.** `detail` is written for
  humans and may be reworded at any time; `code` is stable.
- **Honor `Retry-After` on a `429`**, and back off exponentially with jitter on a
  `5xx`.
- **Pin nothing to response order** unless the endpoint documents a sort.

## Status of v1

`v1` is stable. The current surface is **read-only** — write endpoints will be
*added* (which is a non-breaking change under the rules above), not swapped in.

---

# PaperFox API

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api
Description: Read your conferences, submissions, reviews, assignments, and registrations from your own scripts and integrations.

The PaperFox API lets chairs and authors read conference data programmatically —
sync submissions into a proceedings pipeline, pull review progress into a
dashboard, or check the status of your own submissions from a script.

The API is **read-only**. Every endpoint lives under `/api/v1`.

## Get an API key

1. Go to **Settings → API Keys**.
2. Click **Create API Key**, give it a name, and pick **Read only** or **Read and write**.
3. Copy the key. **It is shown exactly once** — store it in a secret manager. If
   you lose it, revoke the key and create a new one.

Keys look like `pfx_live_...`. Treat one like a password: it acts with *your*
roles in every conference you belong to.

<Callout type="warn">
  Never commit a key, put it in a browser, or paste it into a support ticket.
  If a key leaks, revoke it immediately from **Settings → API Keys** — revocation
  takes effect on the very next request.
</Callout>

## Make your first request

Authenticate with a bearer token. Start with `/me` — it tells you who the key
belongs to and which conferences and roles it can reach.

```bash
curl https://www.paperfox.ai/api/v1/me \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $PAPERFOX_API_KEY"
```

```json
{
  "user": { "id": "…", "email": "you@paperfox.ai", "name": "Your Name" },
  "key": { "prefix": "pfx_live_a1b2", "scopes": ["read"], "conference": null },
  "conferences": [
    { "slug": "icai2027", "name": "…", "roles": ["chair"] }
  ]
}
```

Then list submissions for a conference you chair:

```bash
curl "https://www.paperfox.ai/api/v1/submissions?conference=icai2027&status=ACCEPTED" \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $PAPERFOX_API_KEY"
```

## What a key can see

A key never grants more than you already have. On every request PaperFox
re-derives your roles for the conference in question, so:

- **Conference chairs** see every submission, review, and registration in the conference.
- **Track chairs** see submissions and reviews in the tracks they manage.
- **Authors** see their own submissions (matched across all your verified email addresses).
- **Reviewers** see their own assignments.

Blind-review rules apply exactly as they do in the web app: on a single- or
double-blind track, reviewer identities are hidden from authors, and reviews stay
invisible until the chair releases them.

If you revoke someone's chair role, their keys lose that access on the next call —
nothing is baked into the key.

Two extra guardrails when creating a key:

- **Scopes** — `read` or `read and write`. The v1 surface is read-only, so
  `read` is all you need today; the write scope is reserved for future write
  endpoints.
- **Conference restriction** — a key can be limited to a single conference, so a
  script for one event can't touch another.


## Pagination

List endpoints are cursor-paginated. Pass `limit` (1–100, default 25) and follow
`nextCursor` until `hasMore` is `false`. Cursors are opaque — don't construct them.

```json
{
  "data": [ /* … */ ],
  "hasMore": true,
  "nextCursor": "eyJ0IjoiMjAyNi0wNy0wNlQwMDowMDowMC4wMDBaIiwiaWQiOiJhYmMifQ"
}
```

```bash
curl "https://www.paperfox.ai/api/v1/submissions?conference=icai2027&limit=50&cursor=$NEXT_CURSOR" \
  -H "Authorization: Bearer $PAPERFOX_API_KEY"
```

## Rate limits

Limits are per user (creating more keys does not raise them).

| Tier | Per minute | Per day |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Default | 120 | 20,000 |
| Elevated | 600 | 100,000 |

Every response carries the current budget:

```
X-RateLimit-Limit: 120
X-RateLimit-Remaining: 87
X-RateLimit-Reset: 1783290000
RateLimit: "default";r=87;t=22
```

Exceeding a limit returns `429` with a `Retry-After` header (in seconds). Honor
it — or back off exponentially with jitter.

## Errors

Errors follow [RFC 9457](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9457.html) and are
served as `application/problem+json`. Branch on `code`, not on the human-readable
`detail`.

```json
{
  "type": "https://paperfox.ai/problems/validation-error",
  "title": "Validation Error",
  "status": 422,
  "detail": "1 field failed validation.",
  "code": "validation_error",
  "errors": [
    { "param": "conference", "code": "invalid_type", "message": "Required" }
  ]
}
```

| Status | `code` | Meaning |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 401 | `invalid_api_key` | Missing, malformed, revoked, or expired key |
| 403 | `forbidden` / `insufficient_scope` | Key lacks the role, scope, or conference |
| 404 | `not_found` | No such resource — or you have no access to it |
| 422 | `validation_error` | Bad query parameters (see `errors[]`) |
| 429 | `rate_limited` | Slow down; see `Retry-After` |

A 404 is also what you get for a resource you may not see, so the API never
confirms that something exists to someone who shouldn't know.

## Versioning

The API is versioned in the path (`/api/v1`). These changes can happen at any
time and are **not** breaking, so write tolerant clients:

- new endpoints and new optional query parameters
- **new fields in responses** — ignore unknown fields
- **new enum members** — tolerate values you don't recognize

Anything genuinely breaking would ship as `/api/v2`. If an endpoint is ever
retired, it will carry `Deprecation` and `Sunset` headers with at least 12 months'
notice.

Full details in the [compatibility policy](/docs/api/compatibility). Every change
is recorded in the [changelog](/docs/api/changelog).

## OpenAPI spec

The full machine-readable contract is published at
[`/api/v1/openapi.json`](/api/v1/openapi.json) (OpenAPI 3.1). Import it into
Postman or Insomnia, or generate a typed client from it.

Browse the endpoints in the [API Reference](/docs/api/reference/me/get).

---

# Associate Editor Workflow

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/associate-editors/associate-editor-workflow
Description: Guide for Associate Editors to manage reviewer assignments for assigned submissions

This guide outlines the workflow for Associate Editors who manage reviewer assignments for submissions assigned to them.


## Associate Editor Workflow

### 1. Receive Submission Assignments
Submissions are assigned to you by Track Chairs or Senior Editors (depending on your track's committee structure). Assigned submissions appear in your AE Console.

### 2. Access the AE Console
View your assigned submissions from the conference dashboard.

### 3. Assign Reviewers
Select reviewers for each submission in your console.
- View available reviewers and their workload
- The system checks for conflicts of interest automatically
- Assignments appear as pending invitations on each reviewer's **Reviews** page, where they accept or decline
- For a later review phase, click **"Copy Reviewers"** to re-assign each submission's previous-phase reviewers in one action — previous-phase reviewers are marked with a **"Reviewed in [phase]"** badge. See [Manually Assign Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/assign-reviewers) for details.

### 4. Monitor Review Progress
Track review completion using the Progress Matrix.
- view all submissions and their review status
- See which reviewers have completed, accepted, or declined

### 5. Write Meta Reviews
Provide summary evaluations for submissions after reviews are complete.
- Synthesize reviewer feedback into a consolidated assessment
- Make recommendations based on all reviews

---

# Author Workflow

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/authors/author-workflow
Description: The complete author journey in PaperFox — from preparing your submission to camera-ready and registration

This guide walks you through the author experience end to end, with links to detailed how-tos for each step.

## Workflow at a Glance

1. [Prepare your submission](#1-prepare-your-submission)
2. [Submit it to a track](#2-make-a-submission)
3. [Track its status](#3-track-your-submission)
4. [Read your decision and reviews](#4-receive-your-decision-and-reviews)
5. [Revise or upload the camera-ready version](#5-revise-or-submit-the-camera-ready-version)
6. [Register for the conference](#6-register-for-the-conference)

### 1. Prepare Your Submission

Read the track's call for papers on the conference's public page — each track sets its own scope, deadline, page limits, and template. The upload field on the submission form shows which file formats are accepted (PDF is the default).

<Callout type="info" title="Anonymization is your job">
If the track uses double-blind review, remove author names, affiliations, acknowledgments, and identifying self-citations from the PDF *before* uploading. PaperFox does not strip them for you. Also check the PDF's file properties for hidden author metadata.
</Callout>

Submit only original, unpublished work, and don't submit the same submission to multiple venues simultaneously.

### 2. Make a Submission

Open the conference page, click **"Submission"**, pick your track, and complete the form — submission details, authors and affiliations, the submission file, and any declarations the conference requires. See [Author Submission Guidelines](/docs/authors/submission-guidelines) for the step-by-step guide.

Until the deadline you can still fix mistakes — update author information, submission details, or files — see [Edit a Submission](/docs/authors/edit-submission). If you need to pull the submission out entirely, see [Request a Submission Withdrawal](/docs/authors/request-withdrawal).

### 3. Track Your Submission

Open [My Submissions](https://www.paperfox.ai/submissions) to see every submission you've submitted across conferences with its current status — from **Submitted** through **Under Review** to the final decision. The status table is explained in [Author Submission Guidelines](/docs/authors/submission-guidelines#tracking-your-submission).

For questions about your submission, contact the organizers using the contact information on the conference's public page, and include your submission ID.

### 4. Receive Your Decision and Reviews

<Callout type="info" title="When reviews and decisions become visible">
Your decision and reviews stay hidden until the chair **releases** the results for your phase — until then your submission simply shows as "Under Review", even if a decision has been recorded privately. Chairs work on decisions in private so they can deliberate, update, or correct them before anything reaches you; releasing is a separate, deliberate step. Most chairs release as part of sending the decision email, so your outcome and reviews arrive together. (Some conferences choose to show decisions or reviews earlier — that's up to the chairs' settings.) In multi-phase tracks, each phase is released independently.
</Callout>

The decision email tells you the outcome — accepted, rejected, or a revision request — and once released, the reviews appear on your submission page. Read all reviews before reacting, and treat the feedback as a roadmap: address every concern, and note where you disagree so you can respond substantively.

Some conferences also share an **AI Review** alongside the human reviews — an AI-generated technical report the chairs chose to pass on, always clearly labeled as AI-generated. Treat it as supplementary feedback: it can catch concrete slips (equation inconsistencies, undefined notation), but it is not a human review and may misread notation or miss context.

Reviews may carry a **"Was this review helpful?"** row — rate them honestly, with optional reasons on a thumbs-down. Your ratings go to the conference chairs only; reviewers never see them, and on AI reviews they directly help the chairs improve the AI reviewer.

### 5. Revise or Submit the Camera-Ready Version

If the decision requests a revision, prepare a revised submission that addresses the reviewers' comments and submit it before the revision deadline — see [Submit a Revision](/docs/authors/submit-revision).

If your submission is accepted and the track collects a final version, the chairs will move it to a camera-ready phase and notify you. Incorporate any final feedback, restore author names and acknowledgments if the review was double-blind, follow the conference's formatting instructions, and upload the final file the same way you submit a revision.

### 6. Register for the Conference

Accepted submissions typically require at least one author to register for the conference — chairs track this and send reminders. Register early via the conference's **Registration** page; see [Conference Registration](/docs/authors/conference-registration).

---

# Conference Registration

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/authors/conference-registration
Description: How to register for a conference as an attendee or author

## Registering for a Conference

Once registration is enabled by the conference chairs, you can register through the conference's public page.

1. Visit the conference website (e.g., `paperfox.ai/conference/conf-slug`)
2. Click **"Registration"** in the navigation bar
3. **Sign in to your PaperFox account** (or create one). If you're not signed in you'll be sent to the sign-in page and returned to registration right after — registration is tied to your account so your receipt and registration record are always yours to access.
4. Select your registration type and review the price
5. Fill in your details (name, email, affiliation, country/region)
6. Click **"Register"** to complete

<Callout type="info" title="Free vs Paid Registration">
- **Free registration** — Completes immediately after submitting the form
- **Paid registration** — Redirects to Stripe checkout for secure payment
</Callout>

### Registering Someone Else

Paying for a colleague or co-author? While signed in to your own account, enter **their** name and email on the registration form instead of yours.

- The attendee receives a confirmation email. If they don't have a PaperFox account yet, it includes a link to **claim** their registration — clicking it verifies their email and gives them access to their receipt and registration record.
- **You** also receive a copy of the confirmation (and the receipt, for paid registrations), so you have proof of payment right away.

<Callout type="warning" title="Double-check the attendee's email">
The registration and its receipt attach to the email you enter. If you mistype it, the attendee won't be able to sign in and claim it — but because you get a copy of the receipt, nothing is lost, and the organizers can help correct the address. Enter it carefully.
</Callout>

### Billing Details for Reimbursement

If you'll claim the registration fee back from your institution, the form has three **optional** fields below Affiliation — **Billing Organization**, **Tax / VAT Number**, and **Billing Address**. Anything you fill in here appears on your payment receipt, so your finance office sees the details it needs.

<img src="/docs/assets/author/conference-registration/registration-billing-fields.png" alt="Optional Billing Organization, Tax / VAT Number, and Billing Address fields on the registration form" width="800" />

Leave them blank if you don't need them — they don't affect your registration. You can also add or change them later (see [Add Billing Details to Your Receipt](#add-billing-details-to-your-receipt)).

### Registration Types

Conferences may offer different registration types with varying prices (e.g., Student, Regular, Professional). Some types may have:

- **Limited capacity** — Shows "Only X left" when spots are running low
- **Availability windows** — Some types are only available during specific dates (e.g., Early Bird pricing ends March 31)
- **Expired types** — Shown as "Registration closed" so you know the option existed
- **Sold-out types** — Shown as "Sold out" when all spots are taken

### After Registration

- You'll receive a confirmation email with your registration details
- View your registrations under **Registrations** in the sidebar
- If you need a refund, click **"Refund"** on your registration row. The dialog shows the conference's administrative fee and exactly what you'll receive before you submit.

While a refund is being reviewed, your registration stays on the **Current** tab with a "Refund pending" pill. Once the chair approves it, the registration moves to the **Refunded** tab.

### Download Your Receipt

Need a receipt for your records or an expense claim? Every paid registration has one.

1. Go to **Registrations** in the sidebar
2. On the paid registration's row, click **"Receipt"**
3. The receipt opens in a new tab — click **"Download PDF"** to save it, or use your browser's print option for a submission copy

<img src="/docs/assets/author/conference-registration/download-receipt.png" alt="My Registrations page with the Receipt button highlighted on a paid registration row" width="800" />

<Callout type="info" title="No Receipt Button?">
The **"Receipt"** button only appears for paid registrations you completed through PaperFox. You won't see it for **free** registrations, conferences you **registered externally** (imported by the chair), or registrations that have been **refunded**.
</Callout>

Want your finance office's details on the receipt first? Add them in the next section, then download — the receipt updates instantly.

### Add Billing Details to Your Receipt

Didn't add billing details when you registered, and now your finance office wants them? You can add or change them anytime — no need to contact the organizers.

1. Go to **Registrations** in the sidebar
2. On your registration row, click **"Add Billing Details"** (it reads **"Edit Billing Details"** if you've set them before)
3. Fill in any of **Billing Organization**, **Tax / VAT Number**, or **Billing Address** — or click **"Clear"** to remove them
4. Click **"Save"**

<img src="/docs/assets/author/conference-registration/billing-details-dialog.png" alt="Billing Details for Receipt dialog with Billing Organization, Tax / VAT Number, and Billing Address fields, plus Clear, Cancel, and Save buttons" width="800" />

Your receipt updates immediately — open **"Receipt"** on the same row to view or download the updated version.

<Callout type="warning" title="Registration Not Available?">
If the registration page is not visible, the conference chairs may not have enabled registration yet. Check back later or contact the organizers.
</Callout>

## Conferences That Use a Different Registration System

Some conferences run registration outside PaperFox (Eventbrite, Cvent, a custom site, etc.). In that case the conference chair imports the registrant list into PaperFox by email so the system still knows you're attending. You'll see those conferences in **Registrations** with a **"Registered externally"** label and no Receipt or Refund buttons.

<img src="/docs/assets/author/conference-registration/my-registrations-mixed.png" alt="My Registrations showing both an internal paid registration and an external import" width="800" />

### How matching works

PaperFox matches by **email address** — the email the chair imported must equal your **current PaperFox account email**. The match is case-insensitive.

- **Same email used for both?** It just works. The conference shows up automatically.
- **You changed your PaperFox email after the chair imported you?** The match breaks. Your conference may stop showing on this page until the chair re-imports your new email.
- **You used a different email for the external registration?** Either change your PaperFox email to match, or ask the chair to import the email you used here.

If a conference you registered for externally isn't showing up, contact the conference chairs and ask them to import the email you have on this account.

---

# Edit a Submission

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/authors/edit-submission
Description: How to update author information, submission details, or files after submitting

You can edit a submission in two situations:

- **During the submission phase** — fix author information, update your abstract, replace files, or revise the submission before the deadline.
- **During camera ready (or another revision phase)** — upload the camera-ready PDF and update any new fields the chairs added for that phase.

The same edit form is used in both cases. What you see depends on the phase your submission is in.

## Find Your Submission

1. Click **"Submissions"** in the sidebar
2. Find the submission you want to edit and click **"View Details"**

<img src="/docs/assets/author/edit-submission/my-submissions.png" alt="My Submissions page showing list of submitted submissions with View Details links" width="800" />

## Open the Edit Form

On the submission detail page, click the **"Edit Submission"** button in the right sidebar under **Submission Status**.

<img src="/docs/assets/author/edit-submission/submission-detail.png" alt="Submission detail page with Edit Submission button highlighted" width="800" />

## Update Your Submission

The page header shows the current phase — for example, **Phase: Submission** during the initial submission window, or **Phase: Camera Ready** later in the workflow. The form below is pre-filled with your current data and shows every field configured for that phase.

You can typically update:

- **Title** and **Abstract**
- **Author information** — names, emails, affiliations, country, and corresponding author designation
- **Keywords**
- **Uploaded files** — replace your submission PDF
- **Phase-specific fields** — anything chairs added for the current phase (for example, a "Camera Ready PDF" upload field that only appears once the camera-ready phase begins)

<img src="/docs/assets/author/edit-submission/edit-form-top.png" alt="Edit submission form showing title, author fields, and abstract" width="800" />

To update a co-author's affiliation, find their author card in the form and edit the **Affiliation** field directly.

## Replace the Submission File

When a file is already attached, the file card shows three controls: **View**, **Replace**, and the trash icon.

<img src="/docs/assets/author/edit-submission/replace-button.png" alt="Submission file card with Replace button highlighted between View and the trash icon" width="800" />

- Click **"Replace"** to pick a new PDF. The new file takes over the slot — you don't need to click the trash icon first.
- Click the trash icon only if you want to clear the slot entirely (for example, to re-upload a moment later via the empty-state dropzone).
- **"View"** opens the currently attached file in a new tab so you can confirm which version is on file before overwriting it.

Your previously uploaded file isn't deleted — it stays preserved in the **Version History** and remains downloadable from the submission detail page.

## Add a Revision Comment and Save

At the bottom of the form:

1. Optionally describe what you changed in the **revision comment** field
2. Optionally check **"Notify all authors about this revision"** to email all co-authors
3. Click **"Save Revision"**

<img src="/docs/assets/author/edit-submission/revision-comment.png" alt="Revision comment field and Save Revision button" width="800" />

Each edit creates a new version. Previous versions are preserved in the **Version History** on the submission detail page.

## Camera Ready (and Other Revision Phases)

Once the chairs move your submission into a revision phase such as **Camera Ready** or **Final Version**, the edit form behaves the same way — but two things change:

1. **The chairs may add new fields for that phase.** The most common one is a new file upload field for the camera-ready PDF. If you don't see a separate "Camera Ready PDF" field, your chairs are reusing the original submission file slot — use the **Replace** button on the existing file card to upload your new version.
2. **PaperFox checks that you actually uploaded a new file.** If your submission file is still the one from the previous version when you click **"Save Revision"**, you'll see this confirmation dialog:

<img src="/docs/assets/author/edit-submission/unchanged-file-warning.png" alt="Confirmation dialog: Submission file hasn't changed since version N — are you sure you want to save without uploading a new file?" width="800" />

- Click **"Go Back"** to return to the form and use the **Replace** button to upload your new PDF.
- Click **"Save Without New File"** if you intended to revise only metadata (authors, abstract, keywords) and keep the existing PDF.

This check only runs in revision phases — initial submissions save straight through without the prompt.

## When Editing Is Not Available

The **"Edit Submission"** button may be disabled in certain situations:

- **The revision deadline has passed** — a phase's revision deadline normally locks editing once it passes. Some venues keep the date as guidance only and leave editing open past it, so check the message shown above the button
- **Submission is withdrawn** — withdrawn submissions cannot be edited
- **Submission was rejected** — rejected or desk-rejected submissions cannot be edited
- **Reviews are in progress** — if reviewers have already accepted their assignments for the current phase

If you need to make changes but the edit button is disabled, contact your track chairs and provide the submission ID and the corrections needed. They can edit any submission at any time — including after the revision deadline has passed — so a missed deadline doesn't have to mean a missed correction. The chair's edit is recorded under their name, and you'll receive an email describing what changed.

<Callout type="info" title="Who can edit?">
  Only the original submitting author and conference/track chairs can edit a submission. Co-authors listed on the submission cannot edit it directly — they should ask the submitting author to make changes on their behalf.
</Callout>

---

# Request a Submission Withdrawal

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/authors/request-withdrawal
Description: How to ask the chairs to withdraw your submission, cancel a pending request, and what happens after the chair decides

If you need to withdraw a submission — for example, because the submission was accepted at another venue or you've changed direction — submit a withdrawal request from the submission page. Chairs review the request and decide whether to approve it.

<Callout type="info" title="Who can request?">
Only the **submitting author** (the person who created the submission) can request a withdrawal. Co-authors should ask the submitting author to do it on their behalf.
</Callout>

## Send the Request

1. Click **"Submissions"** in the sidebar and open the submission you want to withdraw
2. In the right sidebar under **Submission Status**, click **"Request Withdrawal"**
3. Enter a short reason for the request — chairs see this when they review
4. Click **"Send Request"**

<img src="/docs/assets/author/request-withdrawal/request-dialog.png" alt="Request Withdrawal dialog with a reason field" width="800" />

The chairs are notified by email immediately and the submission page switches to a **Withdrawal request pending review** state.

## While the Request Is Pending

The Submission Status card shows the request along with the reason you typed and when you submitted it. Editing the submission is disabled while the request is pending.

<img src="/docs/assets/author/request-withdrawal/pending-state.png" alt="Submission detail page showing the amber pending withdrawal card with the author's reason and a Cancel request button" width="800" />

If you change your mind before the chairs have decided, click **"Cancel request"**. The pending request is removed and the original **"Request Withdrawal"** button comes back — you can submit a new request later if needed.

## After the Chair Decides

| Decision | What happens |
|----------|--------------|
| **Approved** | The submission status changes to **WITHDRAWN**. You'll see the withdrawal date and the chair's reason on the submission page. |
| **Declined** | The submission stays under review. The chair's note appears on the submission page so you can see why. |

You'll get an email either way.

<Callout type="warning" title="Declined is final">
Withdrawal requests are one-shot. If a chair declines, you can't submit another request through PaperFox — contact the chairs directly to discuss next steps.
</Callout>

---

# Respond to Reviews

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/authors/respond-to-reviews
Description: Reply to each review — and to the AI review — during the author response (rebuttal) period

When a conference enables author responses, each review on your reviews page carries its own **Responses** thread — reply to a specific review right under it, clarify misunderstandings, answer that reviewer's questions, and describe changes you've made. Reviewers and chairs can reply in the thread, and reviewers may update their reviews based on your response.

## Respond to a Review

1. Go to **Submissions** in the sidebar and open your submission
2. Click **"View Reviews"** — every released review card ends with a **Responses** section showing your deadline
3. Write your response in the review's **"Respond to this review…"** box and click **"Post Response"**

<img src="/docs/assets/author/respond-to-reviews/review-responses.png" alt="A review card ending with its Responses section — the response deadline, an author response, the reviewer's reply, and the response composer" width="800" />

Each review has its own thread, so respond to Review #1 and Review #2 separately — the right reviewer sees the right response. You can post more than once while the window is open, for example a follow-up when a reviewer asks a question.

## Respond to the AI Review

If the chairs shared an AI review of your submission, it appears as its own card with its own **Responses** thread — react to the points it raises the same way:

<img src="/docs/assets/author/respond-to-reviews/ai-review-responses.png" alt="The AI Review card with its own Responses section — an author response to the AI-flagged issue and the response composer" width="800" />

A **Discussion** section at the bottom of the page remains for conversation that isn't about one specific review.

## Edit or Delete a Response

While the response window is open, use the **pencil** icon on your own response to edit it, or the **trash** icon to delete it:

- An edited response shows an **"Edited"** marker next to its timestamp — click it to see your earlier versions. The committee can also see the edit history, so edit to clarify, not to rewrite the record.
- A deleted response isn't silently removed: the thread keeps a short note showing a comment was deleted, so replies to it still make sense.

## Who Sees Your Response

A response to a review is visible to everyone who can see that review — the chairs, the editors, and (for their own review) the reviewer it answers. On blind-review tracks, reviewers appear as **"Reviewer #1"**, **"Reviewer #2"**, and so on — matching the numbering of the review cards — and your responses may appear to reviewers as **"Authors"** rather than your name.

## Tips for a Good Response

- **Respond under the right review** — each thread goes to that review's reviewer, so keep point-by-point answers where they belong
- **Be specific**: point to the exact concern in the review and state what you changed or why you disagree
- **Stay professional** — chairs read the whole exchange when making decisions
- **Watch the deadline**: after it passes, the threads become read-only for you

<Callout type="info" title="Not seeing a Responses section?">
The conference may not have enabled author responses, or your reviews haven't been released yet. The status line will say "You will be able to respond once reviews are released" when the feature is on but reviews are still pending.
</Callout>

---

# Author Submission Guidelines

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/authors/submission-guidelines
Description: Step-by-step guide for submitting submissions to conferences

## Finding the Conference

Most authors arrive via a direct link from a chair or call for papers — open the conference page and click **"Submission"** in the top navigation.

If you don't have a link, browse [All Conferences](https://www.paperfox.ai/conferences/all) and pick the one you want.

## Choosing a Track and Starting

The Submission page lists every track that is currently open along with its deadline.

<img src="/docs/assets/author/submission-guidelines/submission-picker.png" alt="Submission picker showing two open tracks with deadlines" width="800" />

1. Select the track that fits your submission
2. Click **"Start Your Submission"**
3. If you aren't signed in, you'll be sent to sign in (or create an account) and returned to the submission form

Single-track conferences skip the picker — you go straight from **"Start Your Submission"** to the form.

## Completing the Submission Form

Each conference defines its own form, but most include:

- **Submission details** — title, abstract, keywords
- **Authors** — corresponding author plus co-authors with their affiliations
- **Submission file** — usually a PDF; check the call for length and template requirements
- **Declarations** — originality, conflicts of interest, ethics approval if applicable

<Callout type="info" title="Anonymization is your job">
If the track uses double-blind review, remove author names, affiliations, acknowledgments, and identifying self-citations from the PDF *before* uploading. PaperFox does not strip them for you.
</Callout>

When everything is filled in, click **"Make a Submission"**. The form validates first — fix any errors it flags, then resubmit. You'll see a confirmation on screen and receive a confirmation email at the corresponding author's address.

## Tracking Your Submission

Open [My Submissions](https://www.paperfox.ai/submissions) to see everything you've submitted across conferences, with current status and any decision.

| Status | Meaning |
|--------|---------|
| **Submitted** | Received, awaiting reviewer assignment |
| **Under Review** | Assigned to reviewers, reviews in progress |
| **In Revision** | Decision returned; revised version expected |
| **Accepted** | Final decision: accepted |
| **Rejected** | Final decision: rejected |
| **Withdrawn** | You (or a chair) withdrew the submission |

For deeper guidance on the full author journey — preparation, revisions, camera-ready — see the [Author Workflow](/docs/authors/author-workflow).

## Getting Help

Use the contact information on the conference's public page to reach the organizers.

---

# Submit a Revision

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/authors/submit-revision
Description: How to read reviewer feedback and submit a revised version of your submission

When a track chair makes a revision decision (Minor Revision or Major Revision) on your submission and moves it to a revision phase, you will receive an email notification. Log in and follow the steps below.

---

## Step 1 — Open Your Submission

Click **"Submissions"** in the sidebar, find your submission, and click **"View Details"**. The **Submission Status** panel on the right shows everything you need:

- **Phase tracker** — which phase your submission is currently in
- **Revision Deadline** — the date by which your revised submission must be submitted
- **Review Status** — the decision (e.g., Minor Revision) with a **"View Reviews"** button
- **Edit Submission** button — click this when you are ready to submit your revision

<img src="/docs/assets/author/submit-revision/submission-detail-revision.png" alt="Submission detail page showing the revision deadline, review status badge, View Reviews button, and Edit Submission button" width="800" />

---

## Step 2 — Read the Reviewer Feedback

Click **"View Reviews"** to open the reviews page. Each reviewer's comments are listed, along with the chair's decision summary in the right panel.

Read all reviews carefully before starting your revision — most chairs expect a point-by-point response to reviewer comments.

<img src="/docs/assets/author/submit-revision/submission-reviews.png" alt="Reviews page showing reviewer comments and the Minor Revision decision panel" width="800" />

---

## Step 3 — Edit and Resubmit

Back on the submission detail page, click **"Edit Submission"**. The form header confirms which phase you are editing in — for example, **Phase: Camera-Ready** — so you know exactly what is expected.

<img src="/docs/assets/author/submit-revision/edit-form-phase2.png" alt="Edit Submission form showing the current phase (Camera-Ready) and the pre-filled title and author fields" width="800" />

All original fields are editable. The chairs may have added phase-specific fields for this revision round — a common example is a **Camera-Ready PDF** field that only appears once the camera-ready phase begins.

Update what changed in your submission:

- **Title, Abstract, Keywords** — if your revisions affect them
- **Submission File** — click **"Replace"** to upload your revised PDF
- **Camera-Ready PDF** (if shown) — upload the final publication-ready version with author names and affiliations included

<img src="/docs/assets/author/submit-revision/edit-form-save.png" alt="Bottom of the edit form showing the Submission File, Camera-Ready PDF upload fields, and the Revision Comment section" width="800" />

At the bottom:

1. Optionally describe your changes in the **Revision Comment** field — track chairs can see this
2. Optionally check **"Notify all authors about this revision"** to email all co-authors
3. Click **"Save Revision"**

Each save creates a new version. Your previous version is preserved in the **Version History** on the submission detail page and remains downloadable at any time.

---

## When the Edit Button Is Disabled

The **Edit Submission** button may be temporarily disabled if reviewers have active assignments in the current phase. This usually means the chairs are still processing the round — the button becomes available once assignments are resolved. If you are past the revision deadline, contact your track chairs directly.

<Callout type="info" title="Need more help with the edit form?">
  See [Edit a Submission](/docs/authors/edit-submission) for a full walkthrough of every field, including how to replace files and manage co-author information.
</Callout>

---

# Build Program with MCP

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/build-program-with-mcp
Description: Use Claude or ChatGPT to draft and refine your conference program by chatting

If you've connected PaperFox to Claude Desktop or ChatGPT via [MCP](/docs/mcp), you can build your entire conference program by chatting — describe what you want, let the AI draft it, then refine it the same way. The AI writes directly to your program in PaperFox, and you can always jump into the [Program Builder](/docs/chairs/program-management) to make manual adjustments.

<Callout type="info" title="Prerequisites">
You must have [MCP set up](/docs/mcp) in your AI client, be a **Conference Chair**, and have **accepted submissions** for the AI to schedule. Only chairs can use the program-building tools.
</Callout>

## Prompting Tips

A few small phrases in your opening prompt make a big difference in whether the AI uses the PaperFox tools correctly. Use these:

- **"Use the PaperFox MCP tools directly to create the program in PaperFox."** Without this, Claude sometimes builds a separate client-side artifact (a small in-chat "program builder" widget) instead of writing to your PaperFox program. The artifact looks impressive but doesn't actually save anything to PaperFox. Telling it to use the tools directly steers it to call `import_program_draft`.
- **"Don't loop through submissions one at a time — use list_submissions in a single call."** Older Claude sessions occasionally try to fetch submissions individually with `get_submission_info`, which is slow and hits rate limits. Naming `list_submissions` explicitly avoids this.
- **"Filter to accepted submissions only."** Otherwise the AI may include rejected or under-review submissions in your draft.
- **"Save it to PaperFox when you're done."** Reinforces that the goal is a real program in the database, not a chat-only sketch.

A good opening prompt combines all four:

> "Use the PaperFox MCP tools directly. Call `list_submissions` once with `decision: ['ACCEPT', 'CONDITIONAL_ACCEPT']` to get all accepted submissions for icai2025, then build a 3-day program with parallel sessions grouped by topic, and save it to PaperFox with `import_program_draft`. Don't build a separate widget."

<Callout type="warning" title="If you see 'building an AI-powered program builder...'">
That means the AI is building a client-side artifact instead of using the PaperFox tools. Stop it and reply: *"Use the PaperFox MCP tools directly — call import_program_draft to create the program in PaperFox, don't build a separate tool."*
</Callout>

## How It Works

The AI uses a small set of tools to read your accepted submissions, draft a program, and iteratively edit it. Your submissions are **never modified** — removing a submission from the program does not change its acceptance status.

1. **Plan** — AI reads all accepted submissions and the program schema
2. **Draft** — AI creates the initial program (days, sessions, items)
3. **Refine** — You chat with the AI to move submissions, add keynotes, remove sessions, etc.
4. **Polish** — Open the Program Builder in PaperFox to fine-tune and publish

---

## Step 1: Ask the AI to Build Your Program

Open Claude or ChatGPT and describe what you want. The AI will automatically call `list_submissions` and `get_program_schema` to gather context, then propose a plan.

Example opening prompts:

> "Build the program for icai2025. The conference is 3 days, 9am–5pm. Group submissions by keyword into parallel sessions of 4 submissions each. Add a keynote at 9am on day 1 and a coffee break at 10:30 every morning."

> "Draft a single-day program for dsw2027. One main track, six submission sessions of 25 minutes each, with lunch 12–1."

The AI will typically:

1. Call `list_submissions` to see what submissions need scheduling
2. Call `get_program_schema` to learn your conference dates, timezone, and valid session types
3. Propose a structure in chat for you to review
4. Call `import_program_draft` to create the program once you approve

After import, the AI will share a link to your Program Builder so you can see the result.

<Callout type="info" title="Replacing vs. adding">
If a program already exists, a full re-import is a **replace**: the AI is shown how many days, sessions, and items would be overwritten and must confirm before anything is deleted — it can't wipe your program by accident. Replacing only works while the program is a **draft**; once published, the AI can still add content (it uses append mode, which merges new days into your existing schedule) or edit entities individually, but a wholesale replace requires unpublishing first.
</Callout>

---

## Step 2: Refine Through Conversation

Once the draft exists, just tell the AI what to change. Under the hood it calls `get_program_draft` to see the current state (with stable IDs), then uses `upsert_program_day`, `upsert_program_session`, `upsert_program_item`, or `delete_program_entity` to apply changes.

Common edits you can ask for:

| What you say | What the AI does |
|---|---|
| "Move submission icai2025-7 to the afternoon ML session" | Updates the item's `sessionId` |
| "Add a keynote by Dr. Smith at 11am on day 2" | Creates a new `TALK` item with speaker metadata |
| "This speaker cancelled — remove their talk" | Deletes the program item |
| "Rename Session 2A to 'Deep Learning Applications'" | Updates the session title |
| "Swap the order of the morning and afternoon sessions" | Updates session start times |
| "Remove this submission from the program" | Deletes the item (submission stays accepted) |
| "Add a coffee break at 3pm" | Creates a `BREAK` session |
| "Put the keynote first in that session" | Sets the item's `displayOrder` |
| "Clear the location on Session 2A" | Clears the field (sets it to null) |
| "Which accepted submissions aren't scheduled yet?" | Reads the draft with `includeUnscheduled` |

You can also ask the AI to summarize the current program (`"Show me what day 2 looks like now"`) — it will call `get_program_draft` and read it back.

### Built-in guardrails

The tools validate everything the AI sends — times must be real `HH:MM` values, day dates must fall within your conference dates and can't repeat, and session/item types must be valid — so typos come back as clear errors instead of silently corrupting your schedule. The AI also gets a warning (not a failure) when an item's times fall outside its session window or when the same submission ends up scheduled in two places, so it can fix the issue in the next step. And if you're editing in the Program Builder at the same time, the AI detects that an entity changed since it last looked and re-reads the program rather than overwriting your manual edits.

---

## Step 3: Polish in the Program Builder

Once the conversational draft is in good shape, open the [Program Builder](/docs/chairs/program-management) in the web app to:

- Drag and drop to reorder items visually
- Add rich descriptions (Tiptap editor) to sessions and items
- Upload session-level files (slides, handouts)
- Preview and publish when ready

Any manual edits you make in the builder are picked up the next time you ask the AI to read the program, so you can freely switch between chat and manual editing.

---

## What the AI Can and Cannot Do

| Can do | Cannot do |
|---|---|
| Create, edit, move, delete days / sessions / items | Modify submissions (titles, authors, decisions) |
| Link accepted submissions to program items | Accept or reject submissions |
| Add keynotes, panels, workshops, breaks, meals | Upload session files |
| Update session titles, times, locations | Publish the program (do this in the web app) |
| Reorder items and sessions, list unscheduled submissions | Send notifications or emails |
| Edit draft **and** published programs item-by-item | Wholesale-replace a published program (unpublish first) |

Edits to a **published** program go live immediately — and if [Program Chat](/docs/chairs/chat-with-program) is enabled, its AI data refreshes automatically after each change.

<Callout type="warning" title="Safety">
The MCP write tools operate **only** on program entities (`Program`, `ProgramDay`, `ProgramSession`, `ProgramItem`). They cannot touch submissions, reviews, users, or any other data — so even bold prompts like "remove everyone except the keynotes" will at worst rearrange your program, never your submission decisions.
</Callout>

---

## Example: End-to-End Session

Here's a realistic exchange to give you a feel for the workflow.

**You:**
> Build the program for icai2025. We have 3 days (June 10–12, 2025). Main hall. Group submissions by topic into 4-submission sessions of 100 minutes. Morning coffee at 10:30, lunch at 12:30, afternoon coffee at 15:30. Day 1 opens with a keynote at 9am by Prof. Fei-Fei Li.

**AI:** *(calls `list_submissions`, `get_program_schema`, proposes a structure, then calls `import_program_draft`)*
> I created a draft with 3 days, 12 sessions, and 28 items. Day 1 opens with the Fei-Fei Li keynote, followed by parallel CV and NLP sessions. Review it at `/conferences/icai2025/program`.

**You:**
> Can you move icai2025-14 to the NLP session on day 2 instead? And the Tuesday keynote is cancelled — please remove it.

**AI:** *(calls `get_program_draft`, then `upsert_program_item` and `delete_program_entity`)*
> Done. icai2025-14 is now in the Day 2 NLP session, and the Tuesday keynote item has been removed.

**You:**
> Perfect. Add a 30-minute panel on "Ethics in AI" at 4pm on day 3 with Dr. Bender, Dr. Mitchell, and Dr. Gebru as panelists.

**AI:** *(calls `upsert_program_item`)*
> Added the panel as a `DISCUSSION` item at 16:00 on day 3 with all three panelists in the metadata.

When the draft looks right, open the Program Builder to publish it.

---

## Related

- [MCP Setup →](/docs/mcp) — Connect Claude Desktop or ChatGPT to PaperFox
- [Program Management →](/docs/chairs/program-management) — Manual Program Builder guide
- [Chat with Program →](/docs/chairs/chat-with-program) — Let attendees ask questions about your published program

---

# Chair Workflow Overview

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/chair-workflow
Description: Complete step-by-step workflow for setting up and managing your conference

This guide outlines the essential workflow for conference chairs from initial setup to conference management.

## Quick Task List

1. [Request a conference site](#1-request-a-conference-site)
2. [Set up submission billing](#2-set-up-submission-billing)
3. [Invite co-chairs](#3-invite-co-chairs)
4. [Create conference website](#4-create-conference-website)
5. [Set up tracks](#5-set-up-tracks)
6. [Invite track chairs](#6-invite-track-chairs)
7. [Create sub-tracks (optional)](#7-create-sub-tracks-optional)
8. [Build conference program](#8-build-conference-program)
9. [Enable forum discussions](#9-enable-forum-discussions)
10. [Set up registration](#10-set-up-registration)
11. [Transfer credits to participants](#11-transfer-credits-to-participants)

## Conference Setup Workflow

Follow these steps in order to successfully set up your conference:

### 1. Request a Conference Site
Start by submitting a site request to create your conference.
- **[Request a Conference Site](request-conference-site)** - Submit your conference details for approval

### 2. Set Up Submission Billing
Add a payment method so the conference can accept submissions beyond the free limit.
- **[Submission Billing](submission-billing)** - Add payment method and read charge status

### 3. Invite Co-Chairs
Add other chairs to help manage the conference.
- **[Invite Co-Chairs](invite-co-chairs)** - Send invitations to conference co-chairs

### 4. Create Conference Website
Build your public-facing conference page.
- **[Create Conference Website](create-conference-website)** - Design and publish your conference site

### 5. Set Up Tracks
Organize your conference into tracks for different topics or sessions.
- **[Create Tracks and Track Chairs](create-tracks)** - Add and configure conference tracks

### 6. Invite Track Chairs
Delegate track management to specialized chairs.
- **[Invite Track Chairs](create-tracks)** - Add chairs to manage specific tracks

### 7. Create Sub-Tracks (Optional)
Organize tracks into specialized sub-areas.
- **[Create Sub-Tracks](create-tracks#create-sub-tracks-optional)** - Add sub-tracks under main tracks

### 8. Build Conference Program
Create a structured schedule with days, sessions, and program items.
- **[Program Management](program-management)** - Build and publish your conference program

### 9. Enable Forum Discussions
Create a space for attendees to discuss and engage.
- **[Forum Management](forum-management)** - Enable and manage conference forums

### 10. Set Up Registration
Enable registration.
- **[Set Up Registration](setup-registration)** - Configure registration types and forms

### 11. Transfer Credits to Participants
Share credits with participants for AI-powered features.
- **[Transfer Credits](transfer-credits)** - Transfer credits by role or to individuals

---

# Set Up Program Chat

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/chat-with-program
Description: Enable, sync, and manage AI-powered chat for your conference program

## Chat with Program

Enable AI-powered chat for your conference program to help attendees quickly find sessions, speakers, and schedule information.

### 1. Prerequisites

- Your conference program must be published
- At least one program day with sessions must be created
- You must be a conference chair with program builder permissions

### 2. Enable and Sync Program Chat

1. Navigate to your conference dashboard **Program Builder**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/program-builder.png" alt="Program Builder Button" width="800" />

2. Publishing your program runs the first AI data sync automatically — or click **"Refresh AI Data"** to run it manually
3. Toggle **"Enable Program Chat"** to ON
4. Wait for the background sync to complete

The system processes your program schedule, sessions, speakers, and locations. This may take a few minutes depending on program size.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/enable-chat-with-program.png" alt="Enable Chat with Program" width="600" />

### 3. Chat Button on Program Page

Once enabled, the chat button will appear on your public program page:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/program-page.png" alt="Program Page" width="600" />

Attendees can now use the AI assistant to explore your program.

### 4. How Attendees Use Chat

Attendees can ask the AI assistant about sessions, speakers, topics, schedule, and logistics.

Here is an example:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/chat-with-program.png" alt="Chat with Program" width="600" />

### 5. Add Items to Favorites via Chat

Attendees can add sessions or program items to their favorites directly through the chat interface:

1. Ask the AI assistant about specific sessions, speakers, or topics
2. Click **"Add to Favorite"** button that appears with relevant results
3. The item will be saved to their personal favorites list for quick access

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/chat-with-program-add-favorite.png" alt="Add to Favorites via Chat" width="600" />

Favorited items will appear in the attendee's personalized schedule view:

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/view-schedule.png" alt="View Schedule" width="600" />

This feature helps attendees build their personalized conference schedule while exploring the program.

### 6. Updating Program Data

While your program is published and chat is enabled, any change to it — editing in the Program Builder, importing, or [editing through MCP chat](/docs/chairs/build-program-with-mcp) — automatically re-syncs the AI data in the background. No manual step is needed.

You can still click **"Refresh AI Data"** at any time to force an immediate re-sync. The chat feature remains enabled during updates.

---

# Conference Dashboard

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/conference-dashboard
Description: Monitor key metrics, track health, registration revenue, and author and reviewer analytics for your conference

The Conference Dashboard answers "how is the conference going?" — key metrics, per-track review health, registration revenue, and who is participating. The day-to-day review workflow (assignments, decisions, recent submissions, deadlines) lives on each track's [Track Dashboard](/docs/track-chairs/track-dashboard).

## Accessing the Dashboard

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click **"Open Conference"** on your conference card
2. Under **Conference Management**, click **"Conference Dashboard"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/find-dashboard.png" alt="Conference Dashboard link highlighted in Conference Management section" width="800" />

## Dashboard Overview

The dashboard is organized into several sections.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/dashboard-top.png" alt="Dashboard showing key metrics and status charts" width="800" />

### Key Metrics

Four summary cards at the top show:

- **Total Submissions** — Number of submissions submitted across all tracks
- **Review Assignments** — Number of reviewer assignments across all tracks and phases
- **Reviewers** — Number of registered reviewers
- **Registrations** — Number of conference registrations

### Tracks Overview

A per-track row showing submission count, review progress, the next upcoming review deadline, assigned track chairs, and an alert dot for tracks that need attention (deadlines within 3 days, or expected reviews with none completed yet). Tracks are sorted with the most urgent first.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/tracks-overview.png" alt="Tracks Overview strip with per-track review progress, next deadline, and chairs" width="800" />

For conferences with more than 10 tracks, the strip collapses to the top 5 by "needs attention" — click **"Show all (N)"** to expand.

Click the open icon at the end of any row to jump to that track's dashboard — that's where the review workflow lives: assignment and decision status, recent submissions, and upcoming deadlines.

On a single-track conference this section appears as **Review Pipeline** instead — the same row without the track column, with a **"Track Dashboard"** button to open your track's dashboard.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/review-pipeline.png" alt="Review Pipeline card on a single-track conference with a Track Dashboard button" width="800" />

### Author Overview

A summary card showing total authors, countries/regions, institutions, and collaborations. Click **"View Analytics"** to open the detailed Author Analytics page.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/view-analytics.png" alt="Author Overview card with View Analytics link highlighted" width="800" />

### Reviewer Overview

A summary card showing reviewers with completed reviews, completed review count, total and average word count, and average response/turnaround days. Click **"View Analytics"** to open the detailed Reviewer Analytics page.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/reviewer-view-analytics.png" alt="Reviewer Overview card with View Analytics link highlighted" width="800" />

### Registration Overview

Visible to conference chairs only. A summary of your registration revenue — **Total Sales**, **Refunds**, **Net Sales**, and **Total Fees** — matching the numbers on the Registration Overview page. Click **"View Overview"** for the full breakdown, sales by registration type, and recent orders.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/registration-overview.png" alt="Registration Overview card showing Total Sales, Refunds, Net Sales, and Total Fees" width="800" />

---

## Author Analytics

The Author Analytics page provides detailed insights into who is submitting to your conference.

1. From the dashboard, scroll to the **Author Overview** card
2. Click **"View Analytics"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/analytics-top.png" alt="Author Analytics page showing summary stats and distribution charts" width="800" />

### Summary Stats

Four cards at the top show:

- **Total Authors** — Unique authors across all submissions
- **Countries/Regions** — Geographic diversity of your author pool
- **Institutions** — Number of distinct affiliations
- **Collaborations** — Co-authorship connections between authors

### Authors by Country/Region

A horizontal bar chart showing author distribution by country. Helps you understand the geographic reach of your conference.

### Authors by Affiliation

A horizontal bar chart showing the top 50 institutions represented, ranked by author count. Affiliation strings are matched verbatim (after whitespace trimming) — variations like "MIT" vs "Massachusetts Institute of Technology" are kept separate.

### Co-authorship Network

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/analytics-network.png" alt="Co-authorship network visualization" width="800" />

An interactive force-directed graph that visualizes collaboration patterns:

- **Node colors** indicate submission count — green for 1 submission, yellow for 2-5 submissions
- **Edges** connect co-authors who have collaborated on submissions
- **Search** for specific authors using the search box
- **Filter** by minimum submission count using the slider
- **Drag** nodes to rearrange and **scroll** to zoom

Click on any author node to see their details.

### Submissions by Author

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/analytics-authors.png" alt="Submissions by Author list showing authors with submission counts" width="800" />

A searchable list of all authors with their submission counts and affiliations. Click the arrow on any author to expand and see their individual submissions with status and track information.

### Export

Click the **"Export Authors"** button at the top of the page to download author data for offline analysis.

---

## Reviewer Analytics

The Reviewer Analytics page helps you evaluate review quality and reviewer responsiveness by analyzing review length and turnaround times.

1. From the dashboard, scroll to the **Reviewer Overview** card
2. Click **"View Analytics"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/reviewer-analytics-top.png" alt="Reviewer Analytics page showing summary stats and review length distribution chart" width="800" />

### Summary Stats

Six cards at the top show:

- **Reviewers** — Number of reviewers with completed reviews
- **Completed Reviews** — Total number of submitted reviews
- **Total Words** — Combined word count across all reviews
- **Avg Words / Review** — Average review length
- **Avg Response Time** — Average days reviewers take to accept their assignment
- **Avg Turnaround** — Average days from assignment to review submission

### Review Length Distribution

A bar chart showing how many reviews fall into each word count range (0–50, 51–100, 101–200, 201–500, 501–1000, 1000+). Helps you spot reviewers who may be writing overly brief reviews.

### Reviewer Rankings

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/dashboard/reviewer-analytics-rankings.png" alt="Reviewer Rankings table with one reviewer expanded showing individual review details" width="800" />

A sortable table ranking reviewers by review length and responsiveness. For each reviewer you can see:

- **Reviews** — Number of completed reviews
- **Total Words** — Total word count across all reviews
- **Avg Words** — Average words per review (highlighted in a badge)
- **Response** — Average days to accept the assignment
- **Turnaround** — Average days from assignment to review submission

Click any column header to sort. Use the search box to filter by reviewer name or email.

Click on a reviewer row to expand and see their individual reviews with per-review word counts, time to accept, and total turnaround days.

---

# Configure Conference Forms

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/configure-conference-forms
Description: Set up default submission and review form fields that all tracks inherit

As a conference chair, you can configure default submission and review forms at the conference level. These forms define the base fields that **all tracks inherit automatically**. Track chairs can then add additional fields to customize their track's forms.

## Accessing Conference Forms

1. Go to your conference page
2. Under **Conference Management**, click **"Conference Forms"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/configure-conference-forms/conference-management-forms.png" alt="Conference Management section with Conference Forms highlighted" width="800" />

## Submission Form Template

The **Submission Form** tab lets you configure the default fields authors see when submitting submissions. Core fields like Title, Authors, Abstract, and Keywords are included by default and cannot be deleted.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/configure-conference-forms/submission-form-tab.png" alt="Submission Form Template" width="800" />

You can:

- **Add fields** — Click **"Add Field"** to create new fields (text, textarea, select, file, etc.)
- **Edit fields** — Click the edit icon to modify labels, descriptions, and placeholders
- **Reorder fields** — Drag and drop to change field order

<Callout type="info" title="Existing responses lock structure">
If any track already has submissions, you can still edit field labels, descriptions, and placeholders, change which options are pre-selected, and add new fields. However, existing fields cannot be deleted or reordered to preserve data integrity.
</Callout>

## Pre-selecting Options

**Single Choice** and **Multiple Choice** fields can start with an option already chosen, so authors see a sensible default instead of an empty control. This is how you build an opt-out question — "your submission will receive AI-generated feedback, uncheck to opt out" — or a Yes/No question where most submissions will answer the same way.

Check the box beside an option to pre-select it. The setting appears when you add a field and when you edit an existing one.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/configure-conference-forms/preselect-option.png" alt="Edit Field dialog with the Yes option pre-selected on a Single Choice field" width="800" />

- **Multiple Choice** — pre-select as many options as you like.
- **Single Choice** — only one option can be pre-selected. Checking a second moves the mark to it; checking the marked option again clears it.

Authors see the field already filled in, and can change it like any other answer.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/configure-conference-forms/preselect-author-view.png" alt="Submission form showing a pre-checked checkbox and a dropdown pre-set to Yes" width="800" />

<Callout type="info" title="Pre-selection only affects new submissions">
Turning a pre-selection on never rewrites a submission that already exists — authors keep whatever they answered, and a field added later stays empty on their submission until they fill it in. This is why you can safely add or change a pre-selection mid-conference.
</Callout>

## Who Sees Submission Answers

Reviewers read **every field on the submission form**, on every track that inherits it. The one exception is **Authors**, hidden on Double-Blind tracks.

A track's review type doesn't change this — it controls whether authors and reviewers see each other's *identities*, not which questions a reviewer may read. So keep organizer-only questions (student status, suggested reviewers, funding sources) off the submission form; a field you add here reaches the reviewers of every track. See [Set the Review Type](/docs/track-chairs/set-review-type#what-review-type-does-not-control).

## Review Form Template

Switch to the **Review Form** tab to configure the default fields reviewers use when evaluating submissions. Core review fields include Overall Evaluation, Reviewer Confidence, Comments for Authors, and Confidential Comments.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/configure-conference-forms/review-form-tab.png" alt="Review Form Template" width="800" />

The same editing capabilities apply — add new fields, edit labels, and reorder as needed.

<Callout type="info" title="Score and confidence are hidden from authors">
**Overall Evaluation** (score) and **Reviewer Confidence** are always confidential to authors — there's no setting to expose them. Only **Comments for Authors** (and any custom fields you mark as visible to authors) appear when authors view their reviews. See [What Authors See](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-review-forms#what-authors-see) for the full breakdown, including how reviewer identity is handled across review types.
</Callout>

## Previewing Forms

Click the **"Preview"** button next to the tab bar to see exactly how the form appears to authors or reviewers. The preview renders the real form — you can interact with all fields, open dropdowns, and test options. No data will be saved.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/configure-conference-forms/preview-button.png" alt="Preview button highlighted next to form tabs" width="800" />

The preview page shows the form with a blue info banner and a **"Back to Builder"** link to return.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/configure-conference-forms/form-preview.png" alt="Submission form preview page" width="800" />

---

## How Inheritance Works

Conference forms serve as the **starting point** for all tracks:

| Level | Who configures | What happens |
|-------|---------------|--------------|
| **Conference** (this page) | Conference chairs | Sets default fields inherited by all tracks |
| **Track** | Track chairs | Can add additional fields on top of the conference defaults |

This two-level approach ensures consistency across tracks while giving track chairs flexibility to collect track-specific information.

---

Track chairs can customize their track-level forms by following these guides:

- [Configure Track-level Submission Forms](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-submission-forms)
- [Configure Track-level Review Forms](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-review-forms)

---

# Create Conference Website

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/create-conference-website
Description: Complete guide to building and customizing your conference's public website

This guide will help you create a professional conference website using PaperFox. You'll learn how to set up submissions, showcase your event, and provide attendees with all the essential information.

## Getting Started

### Step 1: Access the Website Builder

**From your dashboard:**
1. Go to your conference dashboard
2. Click the conference you want to manage
3. Click **"Public Page Configuration"** in the Conference Management section

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/public-page-config.png" alt="Public Page Configuration" width="800" />

### Step 2: Choose Your Website Approach

PaperFox offers two approaches for your conference website:

#### Option A: Built-in Page Editor (Recommended)
- **Best for:** Most conferences
- **Features:** Drag-and-drop editor, rich content tools, integrated submissions
- **Benefits:** Easy to maintain, automatically handles submissions, mobile-optimized

#### Option B: External Website
- **Best for:** Conferences with existing websites
- **Features:** Link to your custom website
- **Benefits:** Complete design control, use existing infrastructure

If you choose Option B, you will not be able to use the built-in page editor.

---

## Landing Page Customization

The Landing Page Customization card lets you configure your main conference homepage appearance.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/landing-page-customization.png" alt="Landing Page Customization" width="800" />

### Banner

Configure the visual header of your landing page:

- **Size:** Choose from Compact, Standard, or Full Screen
- **Color:** Select from 22 professional color themes with color swatches
- **Image:** Upload a custom banner image (optional). After uploading, you can reposition the focal point using the cropper dialog to ensure the most important part of your image stays visible at different screen sizes.
- **Use Image As-Is (No Overlay Text):** Toggle that appears after uploading an image. When enabled, your uploaded image becomes the whole banner — the conference name, date, location, and website link are hidden. The banner takes the image's own shape, so a banner-shaped image displays in full with no crop or stretch. Recommended upload size is **1920 × 480** (4:1). For images that aren't banner-shaped, use **Reposition** to pan and zoom within the frame.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/banner-with-image-only-toggle.png" alt="Banner section with an uploaded image and the Use Image As-Is toggle enabled" width="800" />

### Navigation Bar

Control how the navigation appears on your site:

- **Position:** Choose where the navigation bar appears — "Above banner" or "Overlaid" on top of the banner. Full Screen banners require overlaid navigation.
- **Logo:** Upload your conference logo to display in the navigation bar
- **Logo size:** Choose Small, Medium, or Large (appears after uploading a logo)
- **Full width navigation:** Toggle to make the navigation bar span the full width of the page

### Content

- **Show conference description:** Toggle whether to display your conference description on the landing page. Click **"Edit →"** to update the description in Conference Settings.

Click **"Save Settings"** to apply your changes.

---

## Using the Page Editor

The Page Editor allows you to create and customize your conference pages.

### System Pages (Built-in)

Your website includes five system pages that connect to core features:

| Page | Status Badge | Description |
|------|--------------|-------------|
| **Home** | — | Landing page with banner, conference info, and description. |
| **Submission** | Ready | Lists tracks with deadlines. Authors submit submissions here. |
| **Program** | Published | Displays sessions by day with search and mobile app support. |
| **Registration** | Enabled | Sign-up forms with registration types and Stripe payments. |
| **Forum** | Enabled | Discussion threads for attendees to connect. |

System pages show a status badge indicating whether the feature is ready.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/built-in-page.png" alt="Built-in Pages" width="500" />

#### Renaming a system page

Click the pencil ✏ button next to any system page to change the label that appears in your menu. Labels can be any language — Chinese, Japanese, Cyrillic, emoji — they all work:

- "Submission" → "提交"
- "Program" → "プログラム"
- "Registration" → "Регистрация"

The page's URL never changes. Renaming only updates the menu label visitors see.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/system-page-rename.png" alt="Renaming Program to 议程 inline" width="500" />

### Creating Custom Pages

1. Click **"Add New Page"** in the Page Editor
2. The new page appears in your page list

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/add-page.png" alt="Add New Page" width="500" />

3. Configure page-specific banner settings (Color, Size, Image)
4. Use the rich text editor to add content
5. Click **"Save"** to save your changes

#### Editing the URL slug

Above the rich text editor, custom pages have a **URL slug** field that controls the page's web address (e.g. `/conference/dsw2027/agenda`). Slugs must be lowercase ASCII — letters, numbers, and hyphens only. Edit the field and click outside to save.

If you renamed the page label to a non-English language, click the ✨ button next to the slug field and PaperFox will translate the label into a clean English slug ("议程" → `agenda`, "プログラム" → `program`). You can edit the suggestion before it commits.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/custom-page-slug.png" alt="URL slug field with the ✨ button next to it" width="800" />

### Rich Content Editor

The built-in editor supports:

**Text Formatting:**
- Headers (H1–H3)
- Bold, italic, underline, strikethrough
- Bullet points, numbered lists, and checklists
- Text alignment (left, center, right, justify)
- Code blocks

**Media Integration:**
- **Images:** Upload and resize images
- **Links:** Add links to external websites and resources
- **File Attachments:** Upload PDFs, documents, and other files

### Page Organization

- **Drag and drop** pages to reorder navigation
- **Create submenus** by dragging pages below other pages
- **Maximum 5 main pages** and 5 submenu items per section

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/drag-page.png" alt="Drag and Drop Pages" width="800" />

### Page Visibility

Control which pages appear in your navigation by clicking the visibility toggle (eye icon) on any page. Hidden pages are still accessible by direct URL, but won't appear in the menu.

This works for custom pages and most system pages. **Home cannot be hidden** — it's the conference's landing page and always appears first in navigation.

## Preview Your Changes

You can always preview your website by clicking **"View Public Page"** in the top right to see how your changes will look to visitors.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/page-preview.png" alt="Preview Public Page" width="800" />

---

## Use a Custom Domain

By default your conference website lives at `paperfox.ai/conference/your-slug`. The **Custom Domain** add-on serves the same site from an address you own — for example `2027.yourconference.org` — so links, posters, and call-for-papers emails all point at your own brand.

Custom Domain is a one-time **$30** purchase per conference, paid by card with a hosted invoice for expensing.

### Before You Start

- You must be a **conference chair** for the conference.
- You must already own the domain, and be able to **add DNS records** at whoever manages it — your registrar (Namecheap, GoDaddy, Cloudflare) or your university IT department.
- Decide which address you want:
  - A **subdomain** like `2027.yourconference.org` — recommended, and the easiest to set up.
  - An **apex domain** like `yourconference.org` — works too, but uses a different DNS record type.

### Step 1: Open the Custom Domain Page

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Click **"Public Page Configuration"** in the Conference Management section
3. Click **"Set Custom Domain"** in the top-right actions bar

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/custom-domain/set-custom-domain-button.png" alt="Set Custom Domain button in the Public Page Configuration header" width="800" />

### Step 2: Add Your Domain

1. Type the address you want to use in the **Domain Name** field — enter it without `https://`, for example `2027.yourconference.org`
2. Click **"Add Domain"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/custom-domain/domain-configuration.png" alt="Domain Configuration card with a domain entered and the Add Domain button" width="800" />

The first time you do this, the **Purchase Custom Domain** dialog opens. Click **"Pay $30 by Card"** to go to secure Stripe checkout.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/custom-domain/purchase-dialog.png" alt="Purchase Custom Domain dialog showing the one-time $30 payment" width="800" />

After payment you return to this page and a green **Feature Purchased** badge appears in the header. **Enter your domain again and click "Add Domain"** — payment unlocks the feature, it doesn't save the domain for you.

### Step 3: Add the DNS Records

Once the domain is added, PaperFox shows exactly which DNS records to create. Each value has a copy button next to it.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/custom-domain/dns-configuration.png" alt="DNS Configuration panel showing the CNAME record and the Verify button" width="800" />

The record you get depends on the kind of address you chose:

| Your domain | Type | Name | Value |
|---|---|---|---|
| Subdomain (`2027.yourconference.org`) | `CNAME` | the subdomain (`2027`) | `cname.vercel-dns.com` |
| Apex domain (`yourconference.org`) | `A` | `@` | `76.76.21.21` |

Add the record at your registrar exactly as shown. If a second record appears under **Step 2: Domain Verification**, add that `TXT` record too — it proves you control the domain, and verification will not pass without it.

<Callout type="info" title="Where do I add these?">
Every registrar calls this screen something slightly different — "DNS", "DNS Management", "Advanced DNS", or "Zone Editor". If your domain is managed by your university or institution, send them the table above; it's all they need.
</Callout>

### Step 4: Verify

After the records are saved at your registrar, come back to this page and click **"Verify"**.

- If the records are live, the status changes to **Verified** and your conference is reachable at your domain.
- If not, you'll see a message that DNS isn't configured yet. This is normal — DNS changes can take up to **48 hours** to propagate. Wait and click **"Verify"** again.

Your domain only starts serving the conference **after** it reaches Verified status.

| Badge | What it means |
|---|---|
| **Pending Verification** | The domain is added, but the DNS records aren't visible yet. Add the records, then click "Verify". |
| **Verified** | DNS is correct and your conference is live at the custom domain. |
| **Failed** | The verification check hit an error. Re-check the records against the table above and click "Verify" again. |

### After It's Live

- Both addresses keep working — visitors can reach your conference at your custom domain **and** at `paperfox.ai/conference/your-slug`.
- Paths carry over: `2027.yourconference.org/program` shows your program page, `/register` shows registration, and so on.
- HTTPS is set up for you. There's no certificate to buy or renew.

### Changing or Removing the Domain

Click the red trash button next to **Verify** to remove the current domain. Your conference stays available at its `paperfox.ai` address, and you can add a different domain afterwards — the $30 feature purchase stays with the conference, so switching domains later costs nothing.

<Callout type="warning" title="Removing is not a refund">
Removing a domain frees it for reuse, but the one-time purchase is non-refundable. Any posters, emails, or links already pointing at the removed address will stop working.
</Callout>

### Custom Domain Troubleshooting

**"Domain is already in use by another conference"** — each domain can serve only one PaperFox conference. Remove it from the other conference first, or pick a different subdomain.

**Verify keeps saying DNS isn't configured** — check that the record **Name** matches exactly what PaperFox shows (many registrars auto-append your domain, so entering `2027.yourconference.org` can become `2027.yourconference.org.yourconference.org`). Also make sure there's no older `A`, `CNAME`, or parking record on the same name conflicting with the new one.

**The domain loads someone else's site** — an old record is still cached. Give it the full 48 hours before assuming something is wrong.

---

## Export as Static Site

Export your conference website as a zip of static HTML files. The exported site works fully offline and can be uploaded to GitHub Pages, Netlify, or any static hosting as a permanent backup.

### What Gets Exported

| Included | Details |
|----------|---------|
| **Home page** | Your landing page with banner, conference info, and description |
| **Custom pages** | All pages you created in the Page Editor |
| **CSS** | All styles inlined — no external dependencies |
| **Images** | Banner, logo, and content images downloaded locally |
| **Navigation** | Static nav bar linking all pages together |

<Callout type="info" title="System pages link to the live site">
  System pages (Submission, Program, Forum, Registration) require server functionality, so they link back to your live PaperFox site instead of being exported as static files.
</Callout>

### How to Export

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Click **"Public Page Configuration"** in the Conference Management section
3. Click the **"Export Site"** button in the top-right actions bar

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/export-static-site/export-button.png" alt="Export Site button highlighted in the page header" width="800" />

4. A zip file will download automatically (e.g., `dsw2027-static-site.zip`)
5. Unzip and open `index.html` in your browser to view the site

### Hosting Your Exported Site

#### GitHub Pages

1. Create a new GitHub repository
2. Upload all the exported files (HTML files + `assets/` folder)
3. Go to **Settings → Pages** and set the source to the main branch
4. Your site will be live at `https://username.github.io/repo-name`

#### Netlify / Other Static Hosts

Simply drag and drop the unzipped folder into Netlify's deploy interface, or upload to any static file hosting service.

<Callout type="warning" title="Export reflects current state">
  The export captures your public pages as they are right now. If you update your conference website later, you'll need to export again to get the latest version.
</Callout>

---

# Create Conference Tracks

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/create-tracks
Description: Set up conference tracks for multi-track conferences

## Track Structure and Management

For conferences with multiple research areas or themes, create tracks to organize submissions effectively.

## Accessing Track Management

1. Log in to your PaperFox account
2. Go to your conference dashboard
3. Click on "Track Configuration"

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/track-and-trackchair/dashboard.png" alt="Dashboard" width="800" />

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/track-and-trackchair/configure-track.png" alt="Configure Track Interface" width="800" />

## Creating Conference Tracks

**Create New Track:**
   - Click **"Create Track"** from the Track Configuration page
   - Fill in required track information
   - Configure track settings and deadlines
   - Save to create the track

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/track-and-trackchair/edit-track.png" alt="Edit New Track" width="800" />

**Track Information Required:**
- **Track Name**: Clear, descriptive name (e.g., "Artificial Intelligence", "Data Science")
- **Track Slug**: URL-friendly identifier (e.g., "ai", "data-science")
- **Description**: Detailed track scope and objectives
- **Submission Deadlines**: Track-specific deadlines if different from conference

## Import Multiple Tracks at Once

If your conference has many tracks, create them all in one step instead of filling in the form for each one.

1. On the **Track Configuration** page, click **"Import Tracks"**
2. Paste your track names into the **Paste List** tab — one track per line. To give a track a description, add it after a comma.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/track-and-trackchair/import-tracks-paste.png" alt="Import Tracks dialog with a pasted list of track names" width="800" />

If you already have your tracks in a spreadsheet, switch to the **Upload File** tab and upload a CSV or Excel file instead. Without a header row the first column is the track name and the second the optional description; add a header row to name your columns explicitly (see below).

3. Click **"Preview"** to see exactly what will be created

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/track-and-trackchair/import-tracks-preview.png" alt="Import preview showing each row's status label and the URL each track will get" width="800" />

Every row is labeled before anything is saved:

| Label | What happens |
|-------|--------------|
| **New** | The track will be created |
| **Already exists** | Your conference already has a track with this name — skipped, and the existing track is left untouched |
| **Repeated in list** | The same name appears earlier in your list — skipped so you don't get two identical tracks |

Names are compared ignoring capitalization, so "Posters" and "posters" count as the same track.

Each row also shows the **URL the track will get**, like `/consumer-behavior`. PaperFox builds it from the track name — lowercased, punctuation removed, spaces turned into hyphens, and cut off at 100 characters. A long title such as "Track 4: Emerging Methods for Large-Scale Systems and Their Applications in Practice" therefore produces a long URL that stops mid-word.

To choose the URLs yourself, add a header row with a **slug** column:

```
name,slug
Applied Robotics and Control,robotics
Machine Learning Systems,ml-systems
```

The `name`, `slug`, and `description` columns are matched by their headers in any order, so you only need the ones you have. If you're moving from EasyChair, its **Short Name** column is recognized as a slug — export name and short name, and your existing abbreviations become the URLs.

4. Click **"Import"** to create the tracks

Imported tracks get the same defaults as the Create Track form — a submission form, a review form, and a starting deadline — so you can adjust deadlines and review settings afterwards just like any other track. Tracks you skip are never modified.

<Callout type="info" title="Importing more than 150 tracks">
You can import up to 150 tracks at a time. If your list is longer, the dialog will point you to support and we'll help you bring in the full set.
</Callout>

## Managing Conference Tracks

Once tracks are created, you can manage them in two ways:

**From the Track Configuration page:**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/track-and-trackchair/manage-track1.png" alt="Manage Track Option 1" width="800" />

**From the Track Management page:**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/track-and-trackchair/manage-track2.png" alt="Manage Track Option 2" width="800" />

**Track Management Capabilities:**
- Define track details: name, description, and scope
- Set submission deadlines and requirements
- Configure review criteria, visibility, and access controls
- Monitor submissions and review progress
- Handle review assignments and final decisions

## Reorder Tracks

Use the **drag handle** on the left of each track card to set the order tracks appear in. The order is shared everywhere tracks are listed — the management page, the public conference page, and the submission picker your authors see.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/track-and-trackchair/reorder-tracks.png" alt="Drag handles on track cards" width="800" />

Drag a track card up or down by its handle, and PaperFox saves the new order immediately. Sub-tracks stay nested under their parent track during reorder.

## Track Configuration Settings

**Track Settings:**
- **Scope and Topics**: Define what types of submissions fit this track
- **Submission Requirements**: Track-specific formatting or content requirements
- **Review Criteria**: Specialized review criteria for this track
- **Deadlines**: Track-specific submission and review deadlines
- **Visibility**: Public visibility settings for the track

**Track Levels:**
- **Main Tracks**: Primary conference themes
- **Sub-tracks**: Specialized areas within main tracks

## Create Sub-Tracks (Optional)

Sub-tracks organize a main track into specialized areas — for example, a "Machine Learning" track can have "Deep Learning" and "Computer Vision" sub-tracks.

Find the main track on the Track Configuration page and click **Add Sub-Track** next to it. A sub-track needs a **name** and **description**, and can optionally have its own submission deadline and review settings.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/sub-track/create-sub-track.png" alt="Create Sub-Track Form" width="800" />

Sub-tracks appear indented under their parent track, showing their own submission and reviewer counts, and stay nested during reorder. Conference chairs can manage all sub-tracks; track chairs manage sub-tracks under their track; sub-track chairs manage only their own.

After creating a sub-track, you can [invite sub-track chairs](../track-chairs/invite-track-chairs), configure its [submission](../track-chairs/configure-track-submission-forms) and [review](../track-chairs/configure-track-review-forms) forms, and [invite reviewers](../track-chairs/invite-reviewers).

## Next Steps: Invite Track Chairs

Congratulations! You have successfully created your conference tracks. Now you can invite track chairs to help manage each track.

Track chairs will be responsible for:
- Managing track-specific submissions
- Inviting and managing reviewers
- Configuring submission and review forms
- Making final decisions for their track

**Ready to invite track chairs?**
- **[Invite Track Chairs](../track-chairs/invite-track-chairs)** - Send invitations to track chairs for your newly created tracks

---

# Customize Committee Emails

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/customize-committee-emails
Description: Add a chair-authored intro and signature to invitation and assignment emails so recipients recognize the sender

PaperFox sends invitation and assignment emails on your behalf — to reviewers, area editors, senior editors, track chairs, and forum moderators. By default, these emails carry only the system body. You can add a custom **intro** (after the greeting) and **signature** (before the Accept / Decline buttons) so the email reads in your voice and recipients recognize who's behind it.

## Set the Conference Default

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Click the **Settings** icon in the conference header, then choose **Committee Emails** in the settings sidebar

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/customize-committee-emails/sidebar-committee-emails.png" alt="Conference Settings sidebar with Committee Emails highlighted" width="800" />

3. Fill in the **Intro** and **Signature** fields
4. Click **"Save Changes"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/customize-committee-emails/conference-committee-emails.png" alt="Committee Emails form with intro and signature filled in" width="800" />

Both fields are plain text — a double newline starts a new paragraph. Either can be left blank. The intro renders after the recipient's greeting line, the signature renders before the Accept / Decline (or summary) buttons at the bottom of the email.

The intro and signature appear in every chair-triggered email below — **all five invitation types** (reviewer / AE / SE / track-chair / conference-chair / forum-moderator), plus **review assignments** (single and bulk), **SE and AE submission assignments**, and **compliance notices**. Decision letters and emails composed through `/notifications/compose` are unaffected — they have their own authoring flow.

## Preview Before Saving

Click **"Preview"** to see how a real Reviewer Invitation will look with your current draft intro and signature. Other invitation and assignment templates render the same intro/signature block, so a single preview reflects the change everywhere.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/customize-committee-emails/preview-dialog.png" alt="Reviewer Invitation Preview dialog showing the rendered email with greeting, intro, body, signature, and Accept/Decline buttons" width="800" />

The preview uses sample recipient data (`Dear Sarah,`) but pulls your real conference name and the draft values from the form. Unsaved changes are reflected in the preview.

## Override on a Specific Track

Each track can override the conference default — useful when a multi-track conference has different program chairs per track.

1. Go to your track's management page, then click **"Committee Settings"**
2. Scroll past the Committee Structure card to **Committee Email Overrides**

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/customize-committee-emails/track-override.png" alt="Track Committee Email Overrides card with Inheriting from conference badges next to Intro and Signature" width="800" />

When a track field is blank, it inherits the conference value. The form pre-fills the field with that inherited content, and a blue **Inheriting from conference** badge appears next to the label. Editing the field replaces the inherited value with a track-specific override; the badge disappears.

To revert a track back to inheriting, clear the field and click **"Save Changes"** — that writes a blank value, which the email pipeline then resolves back to the conference default.

## Who Can Edit What

| Surface | Who has access |
|---|---|
| Conference Settings → Committee Emails | Conference chairs only |
| Track → Committee Settings → Overrides | Track chairs of that track, plus conference chairs |

---

# Customize Decision Types

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/customize-decision-types
Description: Add custom verdict labels to your conference on top of the six built-ins

The six built-in decision types — Accept, Conditional Accept, Major Revision, Minor Revision, Reject, Desk Reject — are always available and drive a submission's submission status. **You can add custom verdict labels on top** for conferences that need finer distinctions like *Accept as Poster*, *Shepherd*, or *Reject and Resubmit*.

Navigate to **Conferences → your conference → Settings → Decision Types** in the sidebar.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/customize-decision-types/decision-types-page.png" alt="Decision Types settings page with six built-in types listed and a Custom section ready for additions" width="800" />

The page has two sections:

- **Built-in** — the six fixed types. They drive the submission's lifecycle status (accepted, rejected, in revision) and can't be renamed, recolored, or deleted.
- **Custom** — verdict labels you add. They appear in the decision dropdown and filters but **don't change a submission's status** — useful when you want a granular outcome label without altering the lifecycle.

<Callout type="info" title="Conference chairs only">
The Decision Types settings page is visible only to conference chairs. Track chairs, AEs, SEs, and reviewers see the resulting verdicts in their own workflows but can't edit the list.
</Callout>

---

## Add a Custom Decision Type

1. Click **"Add Decision Type"**
2. Fill in:
   - **Label** — the verdict text chairs will pick (e.g. *Accept as Poster*)
   - **Description** *(optional)* — shown alongside the label on this settings page; helps other chairs understand when to use it
   - **Color** — the badge color, chosen from four families that mirror the built-ins:
     - **Accept-like** (green) — positive outcomes
     - **Major-revision-like** (orange) — substantial revision asks
     - **Minor-revision-like** (amber) — light-touch revision asks
     - **Reject-like** (red) — negative outcomes

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/customize-decision-types/add-decision-form.png" alt="Add Decision Type form with Label, Description, and Color picker showing four color choices" width="800" />

3. Click **"Add Decision Type"** to save

The new label is immediately available to all chairs (and AEs/SEs) making decisions in any track of this conference. It also appears as a filter option on the decisions page.

---

## Rename or Recolor

Click the **rename** icon next to a custom decision to change its label, description, or color. This works whether or not the custom is in use — a label change updates everywhere, including on past decisions that referenced it.

---

## Delete

Custom decisions you haven't recorded on any submission yet can be deleted with the trash icon.

Once a custom decision has been recorded on at least one submission, the delete affordance becomes **disabled** — hovering shows a tooltip explaining why. A badge next to the row shows how many submissions currently carry that decision. You can still rename it, but to delete it you'd first need to change the affected decisions to something else.

Built-in decisions can never be deleted.

---

## Where Custom Decisions Show Up

After you add one, it appears in:

- The **Decision** dropdown when track chairs / AEs / SEs make a decision on a submission
- The **Decision** filter on the track's decisions page
- The decision badge wherever a decided submission is rendered (decisions page, submission detail, MCP responses, CSV exports)
- The decision-letter email to authors, using the label and color you set

See [Make Decisions on Submissions](/docs/track-chairs/make-decisions) for the track-chair workflow that uses these verdicts.

---

# Enable Conference Submissions

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/enable-submissions
Description: Open your conference tracks for submission submissions

## Accessing Track Settings

1. Go to your conference dashboard
2. Select the track you want to open for submissions
3. Click **Manage Track**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission/conference-dashboard.png" alt="Conference Dashboard" width="800" />

## Enable Submissions

In the track management page, locate the **Submission Management** section and click **"Submission Settings"** to expand it — the collapsed row shows a one-line summary of the current status and deadline:

1. Toggle **Accept Submissions** to enable
2. Set a **Submission Deadline** (optional)
3. Select the deadline **Timezone**
4. Optionally set a **Late Submission Until** date to allow a grace period after the deadline (see [Manage Submission Deadline](/docs/track-chairs/manage-submission-deadline) for details)

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission/enable-submission.png" alt="Submission Management section" width="800" />

When enabled, authors can submit submissions to this track from your conference's public submission page. Before opening submissions, you may want to [configure your submission form](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-submission-forms).

## Set Submissions for All Tracks at Once

If your conference has several tracks that share the same deadline, you don't need to open each track one by one. From the conference **Track Configuration** page, click **"Bulk Submission Settings"** in the top-right.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission/bulk-settings-button.png" alt="Bulk Submission Settings button on the Track Configuration page" width="800" />

In the dialog, every track is selected by default. Uncheck any track you want to leave alone, then choose what to apply:

- **Accept Submissions** — flip to OFF to close all selected tracks, ON to open them.
- **Submission Deadline** — set a shared cutoff. Clear the date to remove the deadline entirely.
- **Late Submission Until** — optional grace period after the deadline.

When all selected tracks share the same values, those values pre-fill the form so you can see what's currently saved before changing anything. When tracks disagree on a field, the dialog resets that field to a safe default (toggle OFF, empty deadline, AOE timezone) and shows an amber banner reminding you that **Apply overwrites every selected track with whatever you leave in the form**. The per-track row above each field still shows each track's current value so you know what's being replaced.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission/bulk-settings-dialog.png" alt="Bulk Submission Settings dialog with mixed-track banner" width="800" />

Click **"Apply to N Tracks"** to save. The action is conference-chair only and updates each track's settings in one step. This is a shortcut for the per-track flow above — anything you set here can still be fine-tuned later on each track's **Submission Management** section.

## Public Submission Page

To make the submission page visible to public, go to **Website Configuration** and enable the **Submission** page.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission/config-page.png" alt="Website Configuration" width="800" />

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission/submission-page.png" alt="Submission Page" width="800" />

You can preview how the submission page looks to authors.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission/view-submission-page.png" alt="Preview Submission Page" width="800" />

Once enabled, the submission page displays available tracks with deadlines and submit links.


See [Submission Guidelines](/docs/authors/submission-guidelines) for how authors submit submissions.

---

# Forum Management

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/forum-management
Description: Enable and manage discussion forums for your conference

Conference forums provide a space for attendees to discuss topics, ask questions, and engage with the community. As a conference chair, you can enable forums and assign moderators to help manage discussions.

## Accessing Forum Management

1. Log in to your PaperFox account
2. Go to your conference dashboard
3. Click "Forum Management" in the Conference Management section

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/forum/forum-management.png" alt="Forum Management Button" width="600" />

## Enable or Disable Forum

You can enable or disable the forum at any time:

1. Navigate to Forum Management page
2. Toggle "Enable Forum" switch

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/forum/enable-forum.png" alt="Enable Forum Toggle" width="600" />

**When enabled:** The forum becomes immediately accessible to attendees

**When disabled:** The forum is hidden from attendees and no new posts can be created

## Accessing the Forum

Once enabled, the forum appears on your conference public website. Attendees can access it by clicking the "Forum" tab in the navigation menu.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/forum/website-page.png" alt="Forum on Conference Website" width="800" />

## Managing Forum Moderators

Conference chairs and creators automatically have moderator permissions. You can add additional moderators to help manage discussions.

### Adding Moderators

**Method 1: Add Existing Users**

1. Click "Add Moderator" button
2. Search for users by name or email
3. Select the user from search results
4. Click "Add" to grant immediate moderator access

**Method 2: Email Invitation**

1. Click "Add Moderator" button
2. Switch to "Invite by Email" tab
3. Enter email address (optionally include first and last name)
4. Click "Send Invitation"
5. Recipient receives email with accept/decline links

**Method 3: Bulk Invitations**

1. Click "Add Moderator" button
2. Select "Bulk Invite" tab
3. Enter multiple emails (one per line or comma-separated)
4. Optionally include names in format: `email, firstname, lastname`
5. Click "Send Invitations"

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/forum/invite-moderators.png" alt="Add Moderator Buttons" width="600" />

### Viewing Moderators

The "Active Members" tab shows all current forum moderators with their name, email, affiliation, and who added them.

### Removing Moderators

1. Find the moderator in the Active Members list
2. Click "Remove" button
3. Confirm the removal
4. Moderator access is revoked immediately

### Managing Invitations

- **Pending Tab:** View all sent invitations awaiting response
- **Declined Tab:** See invitations that were declined
- **Resend:** Click resend icon to send reminder email
- **Cancel:** Click cancel icon to revoke pending invitation

## Moderator Permissions

Forum moderators can:
- Pin/unpin posts to highlight important discussions
- Delete posts and replies
- Manage forum content

Moderators cannot access conference settings, submissions, or other administrative features.

## Using the Forum

### Viewing the Forum

The forum displays:
- Pinned posts (shown first with pin icon)
- Recent posts sorted by last activity
- Post title, author, view count, and comment count

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/forum/forum-page.png" alt="Forum Page" width="800" />

### Creating Posts

1. Navigate to the forum page
2. Click "New Post" button

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/forum/new-post.png" alt="New Post Button" width="800" />

3. Enter post title
4. Write content using the rich text editor
5. Click "Create Post"

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/forum/edit-post.png" alt="Create Post Form" width="800" />

The rich text editor supports text formatting, headings, lists, links, images, and file attachments.

### Replying to Posts

1. Open a post by clicking its title
2. Scroll to the comment form at the bottom
3. Write your comment using the rich text editor
4. Click "Post Comment"

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/forum/reply-post.png" alt="Add a Comment" width="800" />

To respond to a specific comment, click **"Quote reply"** on that comment. A reply form opens with the original comment quoted, and your reply is shown with a "Replying to" reference.

### Pinning Posts (Moderators Only)

1. Open the post or view it in the forum list
2. Click the pin icon button
3. Post moves to the top of the forum
4. Click again to unpin

Pinned posts appear first in the forum list with a blue pin icon.

### Deleting Content

**Delete Posts:**
1. Open the post
2. Click the delete (trash) icon button
3. Confirm deletion in the dialog

**Delete Replies:**
1. Open the post containing the reply
2. Find the reply to delete
3. Click the delete icon on the reply
4. Confirm deletion in the dialog

Moderators can delete any post or reply. Post authors can also delete their own posts and any replies on their own posts, and comment authors can delete their own comments. Deleting is not permanent — content is hidden from the forum but retained for moderation records.

---

# Getting Help & Support

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/getting-help
Description: Get help through support tickets or community forum

Conference chairs can get help through two channels: dedicated support tickets (for conferences with support packages) or the free community forum.

## Support Tickets

Support tickets provide dedicated assistance from the PaperFox support team for conferences with an active support package.

### Who Can Submit Tickets

Only **conference chairs** can create support tickets. This includes:
- Conference creators (users who created the conference)
- Assigned conference chairs

Your conference must have a [support package](https://www.paperfox.ai/support-packages) (Small, Medium, Large, or Mega) to enable ticket creation.

### Accessing Support Tickets

1. Go to your dashboard
2. Click **Support** in the left sidebar navigation

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/support-package/find-support.png" alt="Support option in left sidebar" width="600" />

### Viewing Your Tickets

The Support Tickets page displays all your tickets with the following information:

- **Subject** - Brief summary of your issue
- **Conference** - Associated conference name
- **Status** - Current ticket status
- **Priority** - Urgency level
- **Replies** - Number of support responses
- **Created** - Submission date

### Status Filter

Use the status dropdown to filter your tickets:

- **All Status** - View all tickets
- **Open** - New tickets awaiting initial response
- **In Progress** - Support team is actively working on the issue
- **Resolved** - Issue has been addressed
- **Closed** - Ticket is completed

### Creating a New Ticket

1. Click the **New Ticket** button
<img src="/docs/assets/chair/support-package/add-new-ticket.png" alt="New Support Ticket form" width="800" />

2. Select the **Conference** from the dropdown
3. Enter a **Subject** (brief summary of your issue)
4. Write a detailed **Description** in the rich text editor
5. Choose a **Priority** level:
   - **Low** - General questions, non-urgent issues
   - **Normal** - Standard support requests (default)
   - **High** - Important issues affecting conference operations
   - **Urgent** - Critical problems requiring immediate attention
6. Click **Submit Ticket**

You'll receive an email confirmation once your ticket is submitted.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/support-package/ticket-email.png" alt="Support ticket submitted confirmation" width="450" />

### Viewing Ticket Details

Click any ticket to view:

- Original message and description
- Full conversation history with all replies
- Ticket details sidebar with status, priority, conference, assigned agent, and timestamps

### Ticket Status Workflow

| Status | Description |
|--------|-------------|
| **Open** | Ticket submitted, awaiting initial response |
| **In Progress** | Support team is actively working on it |
| **Resolved** | Issue has been addressed by support team |
| **Closed** | Ticket is completed and archived |

### Replying to Tickets

To add a reply to your ticket:

1. Open the ticket
2. Scroll to the **Add Reply** section at the bottom
3. Write your message in the rich text editor
4. Click **Send Reply**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/support-package/edit-ticket.png" alt="Ticket detail page with reply editor" width="600" />


**Note:** Support team replies are highlighted with a blue background and "Support" badge.

You'll receive email notifications when the support team responds to your ticket.

## Alternative: Community Forum

If your conference doesn't have a support package, you can get help through the **[Community Forum](https://www.paperfox.ai/community/forum)** - a free platform where you can:

- **Ask Questions** - Post questions about conference management, submissions, reviews, and more
- **Share Knowledge** - Learn from other conference chairs and PaperFox users
- **Connect with Community** - Engage in discussions with the broader PaperFox community
- **Browse Discussions** - Search existing threads to find answers to common questions


### Using the Community Forum

1. Visit **[Community Forum](https://www.paperfox.ai/community/forum)**
2. Click **New Post** to create a new discussion thread
<img src="/docs/assets/chair/support-package/community-forum.png" alt="Community Forum page" width="600" />

3. Enter a clear title and detailed description of your question

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/support-package/edit-post.png" alt="Create new forum post" width="600" />

4. Monitor replies from community members and moderators

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/support-package/view-post.png" alt="Community Forum post with replies" width="600" />

The Community Forum is ideal for general questions, best practices, and connecting with other conference organizers. For dedicated, priority support with guaranteed response times, consider upgrading to a [support package](https://www.paperfox.ai/support-packages).

## Support Package Information

Different support packages offer varying response times and benefits:

- **Small** (< 300 submissions) - 12-hour response time, 1 setup call
- **Medium** (300-1,000 submissions) - 12-hour response time, 2 setup calls
- **Large** (1,000-3,000 submissions) - 12-hour response time, 4 setup calls
- **Mega** (3,000+ submissions) - Custom support with dedicated account manager

Learn more about [support packages and pricing](https://www.paperfox.ai/support-packages).

---

# Import External Registrants

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/import-external-registrants
Description: Add registrants from a registration system outside PaperFox so we can flag submissions without a registered author

If your conference uses a registration system other than PaperFox, you can still import the registrant list here. Once imported, PaperFox can tell you which accepted submissions don't have a registered author yet — see [Author Registration Coverage](/docs/chairs/registration-coverage).

Required fields per registrant: **first name**, **last name**, **email**. Affiliation and country are optional.

## Open the External Tab

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click your conference.
2. Under **Registration Management**, click **"Registrants"**.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/import-external-registrants/registrants-button.png" alt="Registrants button highlighted under Registration Management on the conference dashboard" width="800" />

3. Click the **External** tab.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/import-external-registrants/external-tab.png" alt="External tab on the Registration Details page" width="800" />

The **Account** column tells you, at a glance, whether each registrant matches an existing PaperFox account. The legend above the table is the key:

- <span style={{color: '#fb7185'}}>**No PaperFox account**</span> — email isn't tied to any PaperFox user.
- <span style={{color: '#10b981'}}>**Has PaperFox account**</span> — email matches a PaperFox user. We use that user's profile (name, affiliation, country) for the registrant — see "How matching works" below.
- <span style={{color: '#8b5cf6'}}>**Already in Internal list**</span> — this person already paid through PaperFox, so they're also on the **Internal** tab. The External row remains for your records.

## Add One Registrant

1. Click **"Add Registrant"** (top right of the table).
2. Pick a **Country/Region** first, then start typing the **Affiliation** — PaperFox suggests matching institutions from ROR scoped to that country.
3. Fill in **First Name**, **Last Name**, **Email**.
4. Click **"Add Registrant"** to save.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/import-external-registrants/add-registrant-dialog.png" alt="Add Registrant dialog" width="600" />

The new row appears at the top of the table. Use the pencil icon to edit any field, or the red trash icon to remove a row.

## Bulk Import (CSV / Excel / Paste)

For more than a handful of registrants, use the bulk import.

1. Click **"Import"** to open the dialog.
2. Pick a method:
   - **Upload File** — drag a CSV, XLSX, or TXT file onto the dashed zone, or click to choose. Use **"Download CSV template"** for a starting point.
   - **Paste Rows** — paste the contents of a spreadsheet (header row included).

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/import-external-registrants/import-dialog.png" alt="Import External Registrants dialog with drag-and-drop upload zone" width="600" />

3. PaperFox parses the file and shows a preview with four counters and a per-row **Account** status:

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/import-external-registrants/import-preview.png" alt="Import preview showing per-row account status, PaperFox profile auto-fill, and dedup counters" width="800" />

   - **Will import** — rows that will be created.
   - **Already on list** — rows skipped because the email is already on the External or Internal list for this conference.
   - **PaperFox accounts** — rows whose email matches an existing PaperFox user. Their profile data overrides the CSV — see below.
   - **Invalid rows** — missing/invalid email, missing first/last name, or unknown country code. Listed with the row number so you can fix the source.

4. Click **"Import N registrants"** to commit. On a clean run you'll see a toast and the dialog closes; if any rows had errors or skips you weren't expecting, the dialog stays open so you can review before dismissing.

<Callout type="info" title="CSV column names">
The parser auto-detects common header variations: `email` / `e-mail`, `firstName` / `first name` / `given name`, `lastName` / `last name` / `surname` / `family name`, plus optional `affiliation` and `country`. A single `name` column is split into first + last (last token = family name).
</Callout>

## How Matching Works

When an imported email matches an existing PaperFox user account, **the user's profile data is written instead of the CSV** — first name, last name, affiliation, country, and ROR id all come from the user's PaperFox profile. This keeps the External list aligned with how those people show up everywhere else in PaperFox (My Registrations, submission authorship, reviewer records).

In the preview, overridden cells are rendered in blue and hovering shows "From PaperFox account profile" so you can see exactly what's about to change before you commit.

The CSV value is used as a fallback for any field the user hasn't filled in on their profile.

## Dedup Rules

Three skip rules run before any row is created — all of them are visible in the preview before you click Import:

- **Within the file** — duplicate emails in the same upload collapse to one row.
- **Already in External list** — emails already imported as External registrants for this conference are skipped.
- **Already in Internal list** — emails already on a paid PaperFox registration are skipped (no point importing — they're already covered).

The `Will import` counter and the **"Import N registrants"** button always reflect the actual count to be created.

## What Counts as Registered

Once imported, an external registrant's email contributes to the conference's coverage check. A submission "has a registered author" if at least one of its authors' emails matches:

- A paid PaperFox registration on this conference, **or**
- An external registrant you've imported here, **or**
- The current account email of any user with a paid registration on this conference (catches authors who changed their email since registering).

This is what powers the **Registration Coverage** report — see the next guide.

## What the Registrant Sees

If the email you imported belongs to someone with a PaperFox account, that person will see your conference on their **My Registrations** page (sidebar → **Registrations**) with a `Registered externally · Imported by Chair on May 4, 2026` label — no Receipt or Refund buttons since there was no payment through PaperFox. Match is by exact email (case-insensitive) against the user's current account email.

<Callout type="info" title="Email mismatch?">
If a registrant tells you the conference isn't showing on their My Registrations, they likely changed their PaperFox email since you imported. Edit the row (pencil icon) to their current email — the row will appear immediately. Same fix if they used a different email at the external system than they use on PaperFox.
</Callout>

---

# Invite Co-Chairs

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/invite-co-chairs
Description: Add other conference chairs to help manage your conference

As the primary conference chair, you can invite other chairs to help manage your conference. Co-chairs have full administrative access to all conference functions.

## Accessing Chair Management

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Under **Conference Management**, click **"Conference Chairs"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/co-chair/dashboard.png" alt="Conference dashboard with Conference Chairs highlighted" width="800" />

## Adding Co-Chairs

1. Click **"Invite Chair"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/co-chair/invite-chair.png" alt="Conference Chairs Page" width="800" />

2. Enter the person's email address

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/co-chair/chair-invitation.png" alt="Chair Invitation Modal" width="800" />

3. Click the invite button to send the invitation

The system automatically detects whether the email belongs to an existing user or a new user. They'll receive an email with a link to accept or decline.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/co-chair/new-user-invite.png" alt="New User Email Invitation" width="800" />

## Managing Invitations

**View Status:** Track pending, accepted, and declined invitations

**Resend:** Send reminder emails to non-respondents

**Cancel:** Remove pending invitations when no longer needed

## Removing Co-Chairs

1. Find the chair in your team list
2. Click "Remove" next to their name
3. Confirm the removal
4. Access is revoked immediately

---

# List Your Conference in the Mobile App

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/list-in-mobile-app
Description: Make your conference discoverable in the PaperFox mobile app so attendees can browse the program on their phones

Conferences are **not listed in the PaperFox mobile app by default**. Turning the listing on puts your conference in the app's browse list, where attendees can find it, save it, view the published program, and join forum discussions.

<Callout type="info" title="Publish your program first">
The mobile app is most useful once your program is published — attendees open the app to check the schedule. See [Program Management](/docs/chairs/program-management) for publishing the program.
</Callout>

## Enable Mobile App Listing

1. Navigate to **Conferences → your conference → Settings → Mobile App** in the sidebar
2. Toggle **"Show in Mobile App"** on

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/list-in-mobile-app/mobile-app-settings.png" alt="Mobile App settings page with the Show in Mobile App toggle highlighted" width="800" />

The change takes effect immediately — no app update is required. Toggle it off at any time to remove the conference from the app's browse list.

**Note:** people with a role in your conference (chairs, track chairs, reviewers, authors) always see it in the app under their **Involved** tab, regardless of this setting. The toggle only controls whether the conference appears when attendees browse or search all conferences.

## Share Download Links

The same **Settings → Mobile App** page provides the iOS App Store link and the direct Android APK download, each with a QR code and embeddable HTML button for your conference website or emails.

See also: [Using the PaperFox App](/docs/users/using-mobile-app) — what attendees can do in the app.

---

# Manage Storage and Upload Limits

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/manage-storage
Description: Monitor your conference's storage usage, set the per-file upload limit, and upgrade with the Storage Add-on

Every conference has a storage pool and a per-file upload limit that apply to all uploads — submissions, review attachments, and website assets. Both are managed from one place in your conference settings.

## Viewing Storage and Limits

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Click **"Settings"**, then open the **General** section
3. Scroll to **Storage & Uploads**

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/manage-storage/storage-uploads-section.png" alt="Storage & Uploads section showing usage, upload limit, and the Storage Add-on" width="800" />

The usage bar shows how much of your conference's storage pool is used. On the free plan, each conference includes **1 GB of storage** and uploads up to **15 MB per file**.

## Changing the Upload Limit

The **Upload Limit (MB)** controls the maximum size of a single uploaded file (submission files, review attachments).

1. Enter a value between **1 MB** and your plan's ceiling (15 MB on the free plan)
2. Click **"Save Limit"**

Authors see the limit on every upload field (for example, "PDF only, up to 15MB"), and oversized files are rejected before upload.

## Storage Add-on

The **Storage Add-on** is a one-time **$50** purchase per conference that raises both limits:

| | Free plan | With Storage Add-on |
|---|---|---|
| Max upload size | 15 MB per file | **100 MB per file** |
| Conference storage | 1 GB | **10 GB** |

Click **"Upgrade — $50"** to pay by card through a secure Stripe checkout. You'll receive a hosted invoice for expensing, and the higher limits apply immediately after payment.

<Callout type="info" title="When do you need it?">
The free limits comfortably cover a typical conference of PDF submissions. Consider the add-on if you collect large files — presentation slides with embedded media, camera-ready archives, or datasets — or if your conference gathers many hundreds of submissions.
</Callout>

If your conference reaches its storage limit, new uploads are blocked with a message pointing authors to you — free up space by removing unneeded files, or upgrade.

See also: [Configure Track-level Submission Forms](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-submission-forms) for accepting non-PDF formats like PowerPoint on individual upload fields.

---

# Notify All Registrants

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/notify-all-registrants
Description: Email logistics, hotel, and arrival info to everyone registered for the conference

Once registrations are open, you'll need a way to send everyone the practical information they need to show up — hotel block, venue address, arrival logistics, on-site check-in. PaperFox bundles this as a one-click preset that pulls every active registrant for the conference and pre-fills a logistics email you can edit.

## Open the Composer

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click your conference.
2. Under **Registration Management**, click **"Registrants"**.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/notify-all-registrants/registrants-link.png" alt="Registration Management section on the conference page with Registrants highlighted" width="800" />

3. Click **"Notify"** in the top right.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/notify-all-registrants/registrations-button.png" alt="Registration Details page with the Notify button highlighted in the top right" width="800" />

The button is enabled as soon as there's at least one active registration. With zero registrations the button is shown but disabled, with a tooltip explaining why.

## Edit and Send

The composer opens with everything pre-filled — recipients, subject, and a logistics template body.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/notify-all-registrants/composer.png" alt="Notify All Registrants composer with the recipient role locked to Registrants and the Logistics & Arrival Info template loaded" width="800" />

| Section | What's pre-filled |
|---------|-------------------|
| **Conference / Track** | Your conference, **All tracks** (registrations are conference-scoped, not per-track). |
| **Recipient Type** | Locked to **Registrants** — no other audience makes sense for this preset, so the role tabs are replaced with a read-only label. |
| **Audience count** | "**N** active registrants will receive this email." Only `ACTIVE` registrations count — refunded or cancelled registrations are skipped automatically. |
| **Subject** | `[{{conferenceShortName}}] Arrival, venue, and hotel info` |
| **Message** | Logistics template with placeholders for hotel info, venue & arrival, and on-site check-in. |

Replace the bracketed placeholders in the body with your actual hotel name and group rate, venue address and transit notes, and any on-site specifics. The Mustache variables (`{{conferenceName}}`, `{{recipientName}}`, etc.) are filled in per recipient at send time — leave them as-is.

Click **"Preview Email"** to see a fully rendered version, then **"Send Notification"** when ready.

## Email Specific Registrants

Sometimes you only need to reach a subset — the workshop presenters, a single institution, or everyone who booked a particular package. Instead of **"Notify"**, tick the checkbox next to each registrant you want, then click **"Notify Selected"** in the toolbar above the table.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/notify-all-registrants/select-registrants.png" alt="Registration Details table with two registrants checked and the Notify Selected button highlighted in the toolbar" width="800" />

- The toolbar keeps a running **count** of who's picked, and **Notify Selected** enables once at least one registrant is selected. **Select all** checks everyone on the current page.
- Your selection **persists as you search, filter, and page through the list** — pick people across several pages, then send once.
- Refunded registrants can't be selected (their checkbox is disabled) — only active registrants are emailable, same as **Notify**.

**Notify Selected** opens the same composer, but with the recipients locked to just the people you picked — the Recipients card reads "**N** selected registrants" instead of the full count. Edit the subject and message, preview, and send.

## From the Notifications Hub

If you're already in the Notifications hub — for example, sending out reviewer reminders or decision letters — you can launch the same flow without going back to the conference page.

1. Click **Notifications** in the sidebar.
2. Pick your conference at the top.
3. Under **Announcements**, click the **Notify All Registrants** card.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/notify-all-registrants/hub-card.png" alt="Notify All Registrants card under the Announcements section on the Notifications hub" width="800" />

The composer opens with the same pre-fill as the in-page button.

To email a subset from the hub, use the **Email Selected Registrants** card under **Context-Aware** — it takes you to the registrants list to pick recipients first (the picking has to happen on the list page, so the hub links you there rather than opening an empty composer). See [Send Notifications](/docs/chairs/send-notifications) for the full preset catalog.

---

# Program Management

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/program-management
Description: Build and manage your conference program

The Program Builder allows you to create a structured schedule for your conference with days, sessions, and program items.

## Program Workflow

1. **Add Days**: Create conference dates
2. **Add Sessions**: Create time blocks for each day
3. **Add Items**: Fill sessions with program content
4. **Add Description** (optional): Provide context about your program
5. **Publish**: Make the program visible to attendees
6. **[Enable AI Chat](/docs/chairs/chat-with-program)** (optional): Allow attendees to ask questions about your program

## Accessing Program Builder

1. Navigate to your conference dashboard
2. Click **"Program Builder"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/program-builder.png" alt="Program Builder Button" width="800" />

The program is automatically created when you first access Program Builder.

## Program Structure

Your conference program is organized hierarchically:

- **Program**: The overall conference schedule
- **Days**: Individual dates of your conference
- **Sessions**: Time blocks within each day (e.g., "Morning Session", "Keynote", "Coffee Break")
- **Items**: Individual activities within sessions (e.g., submissions, talks, panels)

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/program-different-days.png" alt="Program with Multiple Days" width="800" />

## Program Description

Add an optional description in the **Program Settings** section:

1. Click the description editor
2. Write content using the rich text editor
3. Click **"Save"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/program-description.png" alt="Program Description Editor" width="800" />

The description supports text formatting, images, links, and file attachments.

## Managing Program Days

### Add a Day

1. Click "Add Day" button

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/add-day.png" alt="Add Day Button" width="800" />

2. Fill in day details:
   - **Date** (required): Select the conference date
   - **Title** (optional): e.g., "Day 1: Opening & Keynotes"
   - **Location** (optional): e.g., "Main Conference Hall"
   - **Description** (optional): Rich text description with image and crop to avatar support
3. Click "Create Day"

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/day-detail.png" alt="Day Details Form" width="800" />

To edit or delete a day, click the edit or delete icon. Note that deleting a day removes all its sessions and items.

## Managing Sessions

### Add a Session

1. Click "Add Session" on a program day

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/add-session.png" alt="Add Session Button" width="800" />

2. Fill in session details:
   - **Session Type** (required): Choose from SESSION, BREAK, MEAL, SOCIAL, or OTHER
   - **Title** (required): e.g., "Session 1A: Machine Learning"
   - **Location** (optional): e.g., "Room 101"
   - **Start Time** (required): Session start date and time
   - **End Time** (required): Session end date and time
   - **Description** (optional): Rich text description with image and crop to avatar support
3. Click "Create Session"

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/session-detail.png" alt="Session Details Form" width="800" />

### Parallel Sessions

You can schedule multiple sessions that start at the same time to accommodate parallel tracks or concurrent activities. Sessions sharing a start time are grouped under one time slot and labeled as parallel, as shown below in the Program Builder.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/parallel-sessions.png" alt="Parallel Sessions Example" width="800" />

To edit or delete a session, click the edit or delete icon. Note that deleting a session removes all its program items.

## Managing Program Items

### Add an Item

1. Click "Add Item" within a session

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/add-item.png" alt="Add Item Button" width="800" />

2. Fill in item details:
   - **Item Type** (required): PAPER, POSTER, TALK, DISCUSSION, WORKSHOP, or OTHER
   - **Title** (required): Item title
   - **Description** (optional): Rich text description with image support
3. Click "Create Item"

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/item-detail.png" alt="Item Details Form" width="800" />

### Link to Submission

For PAPER type items, you can link to an existing submission:

1. Select "PAPER" as item type
2. Click "Load from Existing Submission"
3. Search and select a submission
4. Title, authors, and abstract are automatically filled

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/link-to-submission.png" alt="Link to Submission" width="800" />

The picker lists **accepted papers only**. Scheduling a paper copies its authors onto the program item, and publishing the program makes those authors public — so an undecided paper could otherwise reach the public program before its authors had been notified.

To schedule something that has no accept decision yet — an invited talk, or a paper you're slotting in ahead of notification — tick **"Show submissions without an accept decision"** at the bottom of the picker. Each row shows its decision badge, so you can see what you're choosing.

### Submission-Specific Fields

When creating a PAPER item:
- **Authors** (optional): List authors with affiliations
- **Abstract** (optional): Submission abstract

### Talk-Specific Fields

When creating a TALK item:
- **Presenters** (optional): List presenters with affiliations

To edit or delete an item, click the edit or delete icon.

## Crop to Avatar Tool

Use this feature to create professional circular profile pictures for speakers and presenters in your program descriptions.

1. Click the image icon in the editor toolbar

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/add-picture.png" alt="Add Picture Button" width="800" />

2. Upload your image and click it to locate the crop tool

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/find-crop.png" alt="Find Crop Tool" width="500" />

3. Adjust the circular crop area and click insert

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/crop-insert.png" alt="Crop and Insert" width="450" />

4. Result: professional speaker profiles

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/speaker-profiles.png" alt="Speaker Profiles" width="800" />

This tool is available in all description fields (program, days, sessions, items).

## Publishing the Program

After creating your program content (days, sessions, items), publish it to make it visible to attendees.

### Publish Settings

1. Navigate to the **Program Settings** section at the top of Program Builder
2. Toggle **"Publish Program"** to ON

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/enable-program.png" alt="Publish Program Toggle" width="800" />

**Requirements:**
- You must add at least one day before publishing
- Published programs appear on your conference public website

### Viewing the Published Program

To preview your published program:
1. Click **"View Public Program"** button
2. The program opens in a new tab

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/website-page.png" alt="Program on Conference Website" width="600" />

## Sharing the Program

Once your program is published, you can share it with attendees and promote your conference.

### QR Code and Link Sharing

1. On the Program Builder page, locate the **QR Code** section
2. Scan the QR code or copy the program link
3. Share via conference materials, social media, or email

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/find-qr-code.png" alt="QR Code and Link Sharing" width="800" />

The QR code and link direct attendees to your public program page where they can view the full schedule.

## Exporting the Program

Export your conference program in several formats for different use cases:

1. In the **Program Settings** section, click the **"Export Program"** button
2. Select your preferred format:
   - **Word (Stacked)**: A Word document with sessions listed top to bottom — best for light editing or a simple printed handout.
   - **Word (Parallel Columns)**: A Word document that places concurrent sessions side by side as columns, like a printed program grid. Hover this option and choose **Landscape** or **Portrait**.
   - **Markdown**: Formatted plain text for wikis or static sites.
   - **Text**: Plain text with no formatting.
   - **JSON**: Structured data for integration or re-importing later.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/program/export-program.png" alt="Export Program format menu with the Word (Parallel Columns) submenu open" width="800" />

Every format includes all program days, sessions, and items.

### Parallel Columns Layout

The **Word (Parallel Columns)** export is built for conferences with parallel tracks. Sessions that start at the same time are placed side by side as columns under a single time slot — the same way they appear on your public program page.

- Choose **Landscape** to fit more columns across the page, or **Portrait** for standard upright pages.
- Columns share the page width evenly: two parallel sessions split the page in half, three into thirds, and so on.
- When a time slot has more parallel sessions than fit comfortably across the page, they wrap onto additional rows.

Each column shows the session title, and for every submission its title and authors with affiliations.

---

# Publish the Registrants List

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/publish-registrants-list
Description: Show a curated, email-free list of registrants on your public conference site

PaperFox can publish a public list of who's registered for your conference — names and affiliations only, no email addresses, ever. You control whether the list is published at all, and you can hide any individual registrant from it. The list covers both [paid PaperFox registrations](/docs/chairs/setup-registration) and [imported external registrants](/docs/chairs/import-external-registrants).

## Open the Curation Page

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click your conference.
2. Under **Registration Management**, click **"Registrants"**.
3. Click **"Publish Registrants"** in the top right.

{/* SCREENSHOT: full page, 1440x900, chair1@paperfox.ai → /conferences/dsw2027/registrations
     The Registration Details page with the "Publish Registrants" button in the top-right
     toolbar highlighted with a red outline.
     Save to: public/docs/assets/chairs/publish-registrants-list/button-location.png
     Width: 800 */}

This opens the **Public Registrants List** page — the one place you control publication and curate who appears.

## Publish the List

The card at the top is the master switch. Nothing is public until you turn it on.

{/* SCREENSHOT: full page, 1440x900, chair1@paperfox.ai → /conferences/dsw2027/registrations/public-list
     The publication control card at the top of the page — accent rail, globe icon,
     "Publish to public site" heading with the Published / Not published pill, the
     description, the "N on public list · N hidden · N total" status strip, and the
     toggle + View Public Page / Preview button on the right.
     Save to: public/docs/assets/chairs/publish-registrants-list/publication-card.png
     Width: 800 */}

1. Flip the **toggle** on the right of the card to publish. The pill switches to **Published** and the accent rail turns green.
2. The button next to the toggle opens the list in a new tab. Before you publish it reads **"Preview"** and opens a chair-only preview; once published it reads **"View Public Page"** and opens the live list.

| Element | What it tells you |
|---------|-------------------|
| **Published / Not published** pill | Whether visitors can see the list at all. |
| **On public list** | How many registrants currently appear publicly (total minus hidden). |
| **Hidden** | How many registrants you've hidden from the list. |
| **Total** | Every registrant — internal and external — in the conference. |
| **Last updated** | The most recent change to any registrant's info. |

<Callout type="info" title="Email is never exposed">
The public list shows first name, last name, and affiliation only. Email addresses are never published, regardless of your settings.
</Callout>

Publishing also adds a **Registrants** page to your conference's public navigation. Unpublishing removes it.

## Curate Who Appears

The table below the card lists every registrant. Each row has a toggle in the **On Public List** column — switch it off to hide that person from the public list while keeping them in your records.

{/* SCREENSHOT: full page, 1440x900, chair1@paperfox.ai → /conferences/dsw2027/registrations/public-list
     The curation table — Name / Affiliation / Source / On Public List columns, the search
     box and Source / Visibility filter dropdowns above it, and the per-row eye icon +
     toggle in the last column.
     Save to: public/docs/assets/chairs/publish-registrants-list/curation-table.png
     Width: 800 */}

- **Hide or show a registrant** — click the toggle in the **On Public List** column. The eye icon shows the current state; the change takes effect immediately, no save needed.
- **Sort** — click the **Name**, **Affiliation**, or **Source** column header. Click again to reverse the direction.
- **Search** — the box above the table filters by name or affiliation.
- **Filter** — the **Source** dropdown narrows to internal or external registrants; the **Visibility** dropdown narrows to the ones currently on the public list or hidden.

For conferences with many registrants the table is paginated at 50 rows per page. Search, sort, and filter all reset to the first page.

| Source | Where the registrant came from |
|--------|--------------------------------|
| **Internal** | Registered and paid through PaperFox. |
| **External** | [Imported by a chair](/docs/chairs/import-external-registrants) from an outside registration system. |

## What Visitors See

The public page lives at `/conference/{your-conference}/registrants` and is linked from your conference's public navigation. It shows the non-hidden registrants as a simple, searchable table — name and affiliation — with a "Last updated" date.

{/* SCREENSHOT: full page, 1440x900, signed out → /conference/dsw2027/registrants
     The public-facing registrants page — the "Registrants" banner, the count and
     "Last updated" line, the search box, and the Name / Affiliation table with
     sortable headers.
     Save to: public/docs/assets/chairs/publish-registrants-list/public-page.png
     Width: 800 */}

Visitors can search by name or affiliation and sort by either column. The list is paginated the same way as the curation page.

<Callout type="info" title="Preview before you publish">
While the list is unpublished, visiting `/conference/{your-conference}/registrants` shows a "not available" message to the public — but conference chairs see a full preview with an amber banner, so you can check the curated list before flipping the switch.
</Callout>

---

# Create Registration Coupons

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/registration-coupons
Description: Generate fixed-amount discount codes that registrants apply at checkout, and track how many times each one is redeemed

Coupons let you offer a fixed dollar amount off registration. You create a code, share it with registrants, and they enter it on the registration page to get the discount. Each coupon tracks its own redemption count, expiration, and active status.

## Create a Coupon

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Under **Registration Management**, click **"Coupons"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coupons/coupons-nav.png" alt="Registration Management section on the conference page with the Coupons button highlighted" width="800" />

You can also reach this page from the **Registration Types** page via the **"Coupons"** button in the header. The Coupons page lists every coupon with its status and redemption count.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coupons/coupons-list.png" alt="Coupons page listing each coupon with its status and redemption count" width="800" />

3. Click **"Add Coupon"** and configure the coupon:

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coupons/coupon-dialog.png" alt="Create Coupon dialog with code, amount off, max claims, active toggle, and expiration fields" width="800" />

| Field | Description |
|-------|-------------|
| **Code** | What registrants type at checkout. Click **"Generate"** for a random, easy-to-read code, or enter your own (letters, numbers, and dashes). Codes are case-insensitive for registrants. |
| **Amount Off (USD)** | Flat amount subtracted from the registration price. Capped at the price — a coupon worth more than the registration simply makes it free, never negative. |
| **Max Claims** | Total number of times the coupon can be redeemed across all registrants. Leave empty for unlimited. |
| **Active** | Toggle off to pause a coupon without deleting it. |
| **Expiration** | Optional date and time (with timezone) after which the code stops working. Leave empty for no expiration. |

A coupon applies to **any paid registration type** the registrant selects.

<Callout type="info" title="Coupons are for paid registrations">
Coupons discount paid registration types. Free registration types are already $0, so there's nothing for a coupon to take off. If you haven't set up paid types and Stripe yet, see [Set Up Conference Registration](/docs/chairs/setup-registration) and [Managing Registration Payments](/docs/chairs/registration-payments).
</Callout>

## How Registrants Apply a Coupon

On the registration page, after selecting a paid registration type, registrants enter the code in the **Coupon Code** field and click **"Apply"**. The discount and updated total appear immediately, and they can **Remove** it to try a different code.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coupons/registrant-apply.png" alt="Registration page showing an applied coupon and the Subtotal, Discount, and Total breakdown" width="800" />

The registrant is charged — and refunded — based on the **discounted** amount, not the original price. A $150 registration with a $50 coupon charges $100, and a later refund is calculated from that $100. See [Handling Refunds](/docs/chairs/registration-payments#handling-refunds).

## Track and Manage Coupons

The Coupons page shows each coupon's status and redemption count (for example, **9 / 10 claimed**).

| Status | Meaning |
|--------|---------|
| **Active** | Usable now |
| **Fully claimed** | Reached its Max Claims limit |
| **Expired** | Past its expiration date |
| **Inactive** | Toggled off |

#### Editing and Deleting

- Once a coupon has been **redeemed at least once**, its **code and amount off are locked** to keep past redemptions accurate. You can still change the claim limit, expiration, and active status.
- A redeemed coupon **cannot be deleted** — deactivate it instead so its history is preserved. Coupons with zero redemptions can be deleted freely.

<Callout type="info" title="Redemption count is cumulative">
The claimed count reflects every successful redemption and does not go back down if a registrant later gets refunded — it mirrors how many times the code has been used.
</Callout>

---

# Author Registration Coverage

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/registration-coverage
Description: See which accepted submissions still need a registered author and remind them in one click

Conference rule: **at least one author of every accepted submission must register** for the submission to be included in the program. PaperFox tracks this for you — the **Author Registration Coverage** report splits accepted submissions into the ones still missing a registered author and the ones already covered.

## Open the Report

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click your conference.
2. Under **Registration Management**, click **"Registrants"**.
3. Click **"Registration Coverage"** in the top right.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coverage/button-location.png" alt="Registration Coverage button on the Registration Details page" width="800" />

The button is always visible. When every accepted submission already has a registered author, it's disabled with a tooltip explaining why — no surprise disappearance, predictable position in the toolbar.

## What You See

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coverage/report.png" alt="Author Registration Coverage report with Find Potential Matches card, stats, view pills, filter pills, and submission list" width="800" />

| Stat | Meaning |
|------|---------|
| **Submissions** | Accepted submissions in scope (filter pill above the list controls this). |
| **Covered** | Submissions that already have at least one registered author — nothing to do. |
| **Need registration** | Submissions with **zero** registered authors. These need a reminder. |

Two pill rows sit above the list:

- **View** — `Need registration` (default, shown above) lists submissions without a registered author so you can chase them. `Covered` lists submissions that already have at least one author registered, so you can verify who's in.
- **Filter** — `Accepted only` (default) restricts to accepted submissions. Switch to `All submissions` to also include submissions still under review.

The two axes are independent. Switching the filter preserves your view, and vice versa.

A **search box** above the list filters by submission id, submission title, or author name/email — handy on conferences with hundreds of submissions. Each row also shows the submission id (e.g. `icmr2027-12`) as a small monospace prefix so you can quote it in chair-to-chair messages.

Each row in the **Need registration** view carries a badge so you can triage at a glance without expanding:

| Badge | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Amber **"No registered author"** | None of the unmatched authors have a likely registrant in the system. Reminder is the next step. |
| Indigo **"N potential matches"** | One or more unmatched authors look like a registrant already in the system. Expand the row to confirm — most of these don't need a reminder. |

Sort or scan by badge color: indigo rows are usually faster to clear than amber ones.

## Run Matching

The **Find Potential Matches** card at the top of the page is how you generate suggestions. Pick a method, click **"Run Matching"**, and PaperFox scans every unmatched author against the conference's registrants and refreshes the suggestions in the list below.

| Method | Engine | Best For |
|---|---|---|
| **Algorithm Match** (default) | Name similarity + email-domain + affiliation tokens — runs entirely inside PaperFox. | Routine sweeps. Catches the bulk of "different email, same person" cases instantly. |
| **AI Match** | OpenAI reviewing a shortlist of candidates. | Hard cases — nicknames, transliterated names, ambiguous affiliations the algorithm couldn't decide on. Adds a short written explanation under each suggestion. |

Each run replaces the suggestions on the page. Decisions you've already made stick: **Confirm match** keeps the submission Covered, and **Not a match** stops that specific candidate from resurfacing for that author on later runs.

### AI Match privacy

Choosing **AI Match** opens a confirmation dialog before any data leaves your conference:

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coverage/ai-confirm.png" alt="Enable AI Matching confirmation dialog warning that names, emails, and affiliations will be sent to OpenAI" width="800" />

Author and registrant names, emails, and affiliations are sent to OpenAI when AI Match runs. If that's a privacy concern for your conference, stay on **Algorithm Match** — it never leaves PaperFox. AI matching only produces *suggestions*; a chair must still **Confirm match** before any submission flips to Covered.

## Confirm a Likely Match

Authors often register under a different email than the one on their submission (a personal email vs. their institutional address, an old account, a co-author submitting on their behalf). PaperFox flags these as **Potential matches** under the unmatched author so you don't have to chase them with a reminder when they're already in.

Rows with potential matches show an indigo **"N potential matches"** badge in the collapsed view. Expand any such row to see the suggestion.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coverage/potential-match.png" alt="Potential match suggestion showing the method badge, confidence, AI explanation, and Not a match / Confirm match buttons" width="800" />

Each suggestion carries two badges so you know how it was generated and how confident the system is:

- A **method badge** — `Algorithm match` or `AI match` — telling you which engine produced this candidate.
- A **confidence percentage** — strong overlap on the matching signals shows in the high 90s; below ~65% no candidate is shown so you don't see noisy near-misses.

**Algorithm Match** needs **both** a shared identity signal (an institutional email domain — exact or shared base like `nyu.edu` ⊂ `stern.nyu.edu`; a ROR id; or at least one distinctive affiliation token like `Purdue` or `NYU`) **and** a high name similarity. Consumer email domains like `gmail.com`, `yahoo.com`, or `outlook.com` are intentionally not counted as a signal — sharing those domains says nothing about being the same person.

**AI Match** evaluates a shortlist of candidates and adds a short written **explanation** under the row (e.g. *"First and last names match, affiliation identical, and emails share the same domain with a middle initial on registrant"*) so you can see *why* it thinks they're the same person before confirming.

You have two actions on each suggestion:

- **Confirm match** records the link. The submission flips to **Covered** immediately. If the linked registrant is later refunded (internal) or deleted (external), the link is automatically reverted so the submission goes back on the chase list.
- **Not a match** dismisses the suggestion. The same candidate will never resurface for that author again — useful when names happen to overlap but the affiliations or context tell you it's a different person.

<Callout type="info" title="Only suggested for unmatched authors">
Suggestions only appear when the email check failed — PaperFox never second-guesses a real email match.
</Callout>

## Review and Reverse Decisions

Every **Confirm match** and **Not a match** click is recorded and reversible. To audit or undo your decisions, click **"Matching Decisions"** in the top right of the coverage page.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coverage/matching-decisions.png" alt="Matching Decisions page with Confirmed matches and Dismissed suggestions tabs" width="800" />

Two tabs:

- **Confirmed matches** — every submission covered because a chair manually linked an author to a registrant under a different email. **Revoke** sends the submission back to the need-registration list and the candidate suggestion resurfaces on the coverage page.
- **Dismissed suggestions** — every fuzzy candidate a chair has marked &ldquo;Not a match.&rdquo; **Restore** clears the dismissal and lets the suggestion appear again on the coverage page next time you visit.

Each row shows the author on the submission, the registrant they were linked to or dismissed against, and who made the decision when. Both actions are idempotent — revoking an already-revoked match or restoring an already-restored suggestion is a no-op, so you can't accidentally double-action.

## Send Reminders

From the **Need registration** view:

1. Tick the checkboxes next to each submission whose authors you want to email. Use the top-row checkbox to select all.
2. Click **"Notify Authors"**.

PaperFox routes you to the **Notification Composer** with the **Registration Reminder** template pre-loaded and recipients restricted to the authors of the submissions you selected. You can:

- Edit the subject and body (Mustache placeholders like `{{authorName}}` and `{{paperTitle}}` are filled in per-recipient).
- Preview before sending.
- Send when ready.

After the email goes out, refresh the report. As authors register, submissions move from **Need registration** to **Covered** automatically — both sources count: paid PaperFox registrations and your [external imports](/docs/chairs/import-external-registrants), plus any **Confirm match** links you've added manually.

## Verify Coverage

Switch to the **Covered** view to audit who's actually in. Each row shows the submission, a green badge of how many authors have registered (`1 of 2 registered`), and the names and emails of the registered authors when you expand the row.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-coverage/covered-view.png" alt="Covered view listing submissions with at least one registered author" width="800" />

This view is read-only — no checkboxes, no Notify button — because there's nothing to chase. It's there so you can spot edge cases (e.g., a student registered while the senior author hasn't) before locking the program.

<Callout type="info" title="Discoverable from the Notifications hub">
The reminder flow is also reachable from **Notifications → Context-Aware → Remind Authors to Register**. That card links directly to this report when there's anything to chase.
</Callout>

---

# Set Up and Manage Registration Payments

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/registration-payments
Description: Set up Stripe Connect, receive payments, withdraw funds, and handle refunds

To accept paid registrations for your conference, you need to connect a payout method through [Stripe Connect](https://stripe.com/connect). This allows registration payments to flow directly to your bank account.

## Before You Start

**What you'll need:**
- A bank account or debit card in your country
- Government-issued photo ID (driver's license, passport, or state ID)
- Your phone for SMS verification codes
- About 5-10 minutes to complete setup

**Important notes:**
- You must be in a [Stripe-supported country](https://stripe.com/global) (46+ countries including US, Canada, UK, EU, Australia)
- PO boxes are not accepted for business addresses
- You can use a personal bank account — no business account required

---

## Step-by-Step Setup Guide

### Step 1: Navigate to Payments & Payouts

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Under **Registration Management**, click **"Payments & Payouts"**

You'll see the Stripe Account status showing **"Not Connected"**.

### Step 2: Start Stripe Connect

1. Click the **"Connect Stripe"** button
2. You'll be redirected to Stripe's [secure onboarding page](https://docs.stripe.com/connect/onboarding)

### Step 3: Enter Your Email and Phone

1. Enter your email address (this becomes your Stripe login)
2. Enter your phone number
3. Click **"Continue"**
4. Stripe will text you a 6-digit verification code
5. Enter the code to verify your identity

### Step 4: Select Your Account Type

Choose the option that best describes you:

| Account Type | When to Use |
|--------------|-------------|
| **Individual** | You're collecting payments personally (easiest option for most chairs) |
| **Company** | You have a registered business entity |
| **Nonprofit Organization** | Payments go to a university or registered nonprofit |

**Tip:** If you're unsure, select **Individual**. You can still use your personal bank account and receive payments directly.

### Step 5: Provide Your Information

Based on your account type, you'll need to provide:

**For Individuals:**
- Legal name (as it appears on your ID)
- Date of birth
- Last 4 digits of SSN (US) or equivalent national ID
- Home address

**For Nonprofits/Companies:**
- Legal business name (as it appears on government documents)
- EIN (US) or equivalent tax ID number
- Business address
- Your personal information as the account representative

See [Stripe's verification requirements](https://docs.stripe.com/connect/required-verification-information) for country-specific details.

### Step 6: Verify Your Identity

Stripe requires [identity verification](https://docs.stripe.com/connect/handling-api-verification) to comply with financial regulations:

1. Upload a photo of your government-issued ID
2. Take a selfie for verification (some cases)
3. Wait for automatic verification (usually instant)

**Accepted IDs:** Driver's license, passport, or state-issued ID card.

### Step 7: Connect Your Bank Account

Choose how you want to receive payments:

**Option A: Bank Account (Recommended)**
1. Select your bank from the list, or
2. Enter your routing and account number manually

**Option B: Debit Card**
1. Enter your debit card details
2. Note: Limited to $9,999 per withdrawal

### Step 8: Review and Submit

1. Review all your information
2. Accept the [Stripe Connected Account Agreement](https://stripe.com/connect-account/legal)
3. Click **"Submit"**
4. You'll be redirected back to PaperFox

Your account status should now show **Active**. You're ready to accept paid registrations!

---

## Account Status Explained

| Status | What It Means | What to Do |
|--------|---------------|------------|
| **Not Connected** | No Stripe account linked | Click **"Connect Stripe"** to start |
| **Pending** | Setup started but incomplete | Click **"Continue Setup"** to finish |
| **Active** | Ready to accept payments | No action needed |
| **Restricted** | Verification issues | Click **"Complete Verification"** or visit Stripe Dashboard to resolve |

---

## Understanding Fees

For each paid registration, fees are automatically deducted:

| Fee | Amount | Description |
|-----|--------|-------------|
| Platform Fee | $1.00 | PaperFox service fee per registration |
| Stripe Processing | ~2.9% + $0.30 | [Credit card processing fee](https://stripe.com/connect/pricing) |

**Example:** For a $150 registration:
- Stripe fee: $4.65 (2.9% + $0.30)
- Platform fee: $1.00
- **You receive: $144.35**

<Callout type="info" title="International Pricing">
Stripe processing fees vary by country. The ~2.9% + $0.30 rate applies to US-based accounts. See [Stripe's pricing page](https://stripe.com/pricing) for your country's rates.
</Callout>

---

## How Payments Work

When a registrant registers for your conference, here's what happens:

```
Registrant pays $100
       ↓
   Stripe processes payment
       ↓
┌────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Your Conference's Stripe Balance   │
│ $94.35 available                   │
│ ($100 - $4.65 Stripe - $1 fee)     │
└────────────────────────────────────┘
       ↓
   You click "Withdraw" when ready
       ↓
   Money arrives in your bank (1-2 days)
```

**Key points:**
- Money goes to your **Stripe balance** first, not directly to your bank
- You control when to withdraw funds
- PaperFox charges a $1 platform fee per registration
- Stripe charges ~2.9% + $0.30 processing fee

---

## Withdrawing Your Funds

Once you have funds available:

1. Go to **Registration Management → Payments & Payouts**
2. View your **Available Balance**
3. Click **"Withdraw to Bank"**
4. Enter the amount (or click **"Max"** to withdraw everything)
5. Confirm the payout

**Timeline:** Funds typically arrive in your bank account within [2-3 business days](https://docs.stripe.com/connect/bank-debit-card-payouts#payout-speed).

<Callout type="warning" title="Keep a Buffer for Refunds">
If you withdraw everything and need to issue a refund later, Stripe will automatically debit your bank account to cover it.
</Callout>

---

## Managing Your Stripe Account

To update your bank account, identity information, or view detailed transaction history:

1. Go to **Registration Management → Payments & Payouts**
2. Click **"Stripe Dashboard"** in the Receive Registration Payments card
3. You'll be redirected to the [Stripe Express Dashboard](https://docs.stripe.com/connect/express-dashboard)

In the Stripe Dashboard you can:
- Change your bank account or debit card
- Update your business or personal information
- View detailed transaction and payout history
- Download tax documents (1099 forms for US accounts)

You may need to verify your identity again when making changes.

---

## Frequently Asked Questions

**Do I need a business bank account?**
No. You can use your personal bank account to receive payments.

**Can I use my university's bank account?**
Yes, if you have authorization. Select "Nonprofit Organization" during setup and provide the university's EIN (or equivalent tax ID).

**How long until I can accept payments?**
Most accounts are verified instantly. In some cases, additional review may take 1-2 business days.

**What if I don't have an EIN?**
Select "Individual" as your account type. You'll use your SSN (or equivalent national ID) instead.

**Can I change my bank account later?**
Yes, through the Stripe Dashboard accessible from the **Stripe Dashboard** button on the **Payments & Payouts** page.

**Is my information secure?**
Yes. All financial data is handled by Stripe, which is [PCI-DSS compliant](https://docs.stripe.com/security). PaperFox never sees your full bank account number or SSN.

**What countries are supported?**
Stripe Connect is available in 46+ countries including the United States, Canada, United Kingdom, Australia, and most of Europe. See [Stripe's global availability](https://stripe.com/global) for the complete list.

**Ca registrants get an invoice for reimbursement?**
Registrants receive a Stripe receipt automatically. If a registrant's finance department needs a formal invoice (common for VAT jurisdictions), see [Issuing Invoices for Registrants](#issuing-invoices-for-registrants) below.

---

## Handling Refunds

When a registrant requests a refund, you'll receive a notification and can approve or reject it from the **Refund Management** page. The administrative fee deducted from each refund is set **once** in your Registration Types setup — see [Refund Policy](/docs/chairs/setup-registration#refund-policy) — so you don't re-enter it for every refund, and registrants see the same fee you've set when they request the refund.

### Issuing a Refund

1. Go to **Registration Management → Refund Management**

   <img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-payments/refund-management-inbox.png" alt="Refund Management inbox showing pending requests as cards with amber accent strips, applicant name, amount, requested date, the registrant's reason as a quote, and Reject + Approve buttons" width="800" />

   Each pending request appears as a card with an amber accent strip on the left edge. The registrant's reason is shown verbatim. Approved refunds switch to an emerald strip with a tinted footer summarizing the verdict; rejected ones get a rose strip.

2. Find the refund request and click **"Approve"**
3. Review the breakdown — the administrative fee is sourced from your refund policy
4. Click **"Approve Refund"** to process

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/registration-payments/approve-refund-dialog.png" alt="Approve Refund dialog with breakdown sourced from the conference refund policy" width="800" />

The dialog shows you the full economics of the refund:

| Line | Meaning |
|------|---------|
| **Original payment** | What the registrant paid |
| **Stripe processing fee** | Stripe's 2.9% + $0.30 — Stripe keeps this on partial refunds |
| **PaperFox platform fee** | The $1 PaperFox fee from the original charge |
| **Administrative fee** | From your refund policy — registrant saw this when requesting |
| **Refunded to registrant** | Original payment minus the admin fee |
| **Net retained by conference** | What you actually keep after Stripe and PaperFox fees |

The registrant receives the refund automatically and gets an email showing the breakdown plus a link to their Stripe receipt — the same charge receipt they received at purchase, now updated to reflect the refund.

### Administrative Fee

The administrative fee is a flat amount deducted from every refund, set once on the **Registration Types** page. It's **shown to the registrant in the refund-request dialog before they submit** — so the chair and registrant agree on the number up front, and the chair doesn't decide it per-case.

To change the policy, go to **Registration Types** and edit the **Refund Policy** card. See [Refund Policy](/docs/chairs/setup-registration#refund-policy) for the setup walkthrough. The fee can be set anywhere from **$0 to $10,000**.

<Callout type="warning" title="The fee can't exceed the ticket price">
A refund **can't be approved if the admin fee meets or exceeds what the registrant paid**. If you try, the approval dialog blocks it and tells you the fee is greater than or equal to the original payment — lower it on the Registration Types page first, then approve. Because the fee is a single flat amount, set it below your cheapest paid registration type so it applies cleanly to every refund.
</Callout>

#### Example: $300 ticket with a $50 admin-fee policy

```
Original payment:                      $300.00
Stripe processing fee (kept by Stripe): −$9.00
PaperFox platform fee (kept):           −$1.00
Administrative fee (you keep):         −$50.00
Refunded to registrant:                $250.00

Net retained by conference:             $40.00
```

The registrant sees **$300 paid → $50 admin fee → $250 refunded** in their refund-request dialog and on their refund statement.

<Callout type="warning" title="Pick your refund policy deliberately">
The conference always loses $10 (Stripe + PaperFox fees) on every refund, regardless of admin fee. With a $0 policy, "Net retained" goes negative on every approval. Either accept that loss as a cost of issuing refunds, or set a policy fee that covers it. Changing the policy applies to every refund approved from that point on, including pending requests submitted under the old policy — so avoid raising it after registrants have already submitted their refund requests.
</Callout>

### What Happens During Refund Approval

When you approve, PaperFox checks your Stripe balance:

| Your Stripe Balance | What Happens |
|---------------------|--------------|
| **Sufficient funds** | Refund processes instantly from your balance |
| **Insufficient funds** | Stripe [debits your bank account](https://docs.stripe.com/connect/account-balances#understanding-negative-balances) (takes 5-7 days) |

You'll see a warning before approving if your balance is insufficient.

### Example: Refund with Insufficient Balance

```
Scenario: You have $50 in Stripe balance, need to refund $250

1. You approve the refund in PaperFox
2. Stripe uses your $50 balance
3. Stripe debits $200 from your bank account
4. Registrant receives the full $250 refund
5. Bank debit takes 5-7 business days
```

### Fees on Refunded Registrations

When you refund a registrant, **the original transaction fees are not returned**. This is standard across the payments industry.

| Fee | Per $300 refund | Returned? |
|-----|-----------------|-----------|
| Stripe payment processing (2.9% + $0.30) | $9.00 | No — Stripe keeps it |
| PaperFox platform fee | $1.00 | No — PaperFox keeps it |
| **Total non-recoverable cost** | **$10.00** | — |

This matches published Stripe policy:

> "The payment processing, Connect and currency conversion fees from the original transaction are not returned." — [Stripe pricing](https://stripe.com/pricing) (also [Stripe refunds docs](https://docs.stripe.com/refunds))

### What the Registrant Sees

The refund-approved email itemizes the original payment, your admin fee, and the refunded amount. The **View Receipt** CTA opens their Stripe-hosted charge receipt — the same document they received at purchase, automatically updated to show the partial refund. Internal Stripe and PaperFox fees stay between you and your payment processor.

For expense reimbursement, registrants submit the original receipt (now showing the refund) plus the conference's email confirming the admin-fee deduction.

---

## Issuing Invoices for Registrants

Most registrants use their **registration confirmation email** and the linked Stripe receipt as proof of payment — that's sufficient for expense reimbursement in most cases.

Some finance departments (especially in VAT jurisdictions like the EU and UK, and some corporate accounts-payable systems) require a formal **invoice** with your conference's legal business name and tax ID. PaperFox doesn't issue these automatically because the exact content depends on your conference's business setup and tax jurisdiction — your conference is the seller of record, not PaperFox.

### When a registrant requests an invoice

**Option 1: Create an invoice from your Stripe Dashboard** (~2 minutes per invoice)

1. Go to **Registration Management → Payments & Payouts** and click **"Stripe Dashboard"**
2. Under **Payments**, find the registrant's charge
3. Click **Create invoice** and link it to the existing charge
4. Fill in the registrant's billing details (name, address, tax ID if needed) and submit
5. Stripe generates a PDF invoice with your business info and emails it to the registrant

This is the simplest path and produces a Stripe-hosted invoice + PDF that finance departments accept. Stripe's own walkthrough is at [Create an invoice from the Dashboard](https://docs.stripe.com/invoicing/dashboard).

To make the institution name and tax/VAT number appear in the invoice header, add them to the registrant as a **customer tax ID** — Stripe documents this at [Customer Tax IDs](https://docs.stripe.com/billing/customer/tax-ids) (a customer's tax ID displays in the header of the invoice PDF).

**Option 2: Issue an invoice using your institution's template**

If you prefer to use your university or conference's own invoice template, generate it manually using the data from the registrant's Stripe receipt:

- Invoice number (your own sequence)
- Issue date, conference name + dates, registration item, amount
- Your conference's legal entity name, address, and tax ID
- Reference to the Stripe receipt number as proof of payment

### Keep your Stripe business profile complete

Whether or not you end up issuing manual invoices, keep your Stripe Connect business profile up to date. Update these via **Registration Management → Payments & Payouts → Stripe Dashboard**:

- Legal business name
- Billing address
- Tax ID (VAT, EIN, GST — whichever applies to your jurisdiction)

Two benefits:

1. **Receipts show the correct business name** — finance departments reconcile payments against a legal entity, so seeing your conference's real business name (not a personal name or placeholder) reduces back-and-forth.
2. **Manual invoices are faster to create** — when you use Option 1 above to issue an invoice from Stripe Dashboard, these fields auto-populate the Bill-From section, so each invoice takes about 2 minutes instead of filling in business info every time.

<Callout type="info" title="Profile fields don't turn receipts into invoices">
Filling in tax ID and address affects the **formal invoice** (the Download-invoice PDF), not the simpler charge receipt. If a finance department specifically requires an invoice document (common for VAT jurisdictions), you still need to create one from your Stripe Dashboard.
</Callout>

<Callout type="info" title="Why doesn't PaperFox do this automatically?">
For registration payments, your conference is the merchant of record — not PaperFox. Stripe generates invoices on your Connect account using your business details, so the invoice content depends on what you've configured. Auto-issuing invoices when that info is incomplete would produce legally-incomplete documents in some jurisdictions, which is worse than no invoice.
</Callout>

---

## Need Help?

If you encounter issues during setup:

1. **Verification failed:** Ensure your ID photo is clear and matches the name you entered
2. **Bank connection failed:** Try entering account details manually instead of using instant verification
3. **Account restricted:** Check the Stripe Dashboard for specific requirements

For additional support, use the [Help Desk](/support/new) (available with paid support packages) or visit our [Community Forum](/community/forum).

---

# Request a Conference Site

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/request-conference-site
Description: Submit a site request for a real conference or a demo sandbox to evaluate PaperFox

To create a new conference on PaperFox, submit a site request for admin approval. The same form covers two site types:

- **Real Conference** — a production site for your actual conference
- **Demo Sandbox** — a full-featured sandbox to evaluate PaperFox, train co-chairs and reviewers, or rehearse your submission and review workflow before going live

## Submit a Request

1. Sign in to your PaperFox account
2. Open the site request form — any of these work:
   - Click **"Request Your Conference for Free"** on the [paperfox.ai](https://www.paperfox.ai) homepage
   - Go to **Settings → Site Requests** and click **"Request New Site"**
   - Visit [paperfox.ai/site-requests/new](https://www.paperfox.ai/site-requests/new) directly
3. Under **Site Type**, select **Real Conference** or **Demo Sandbox**
4. Fill out the form with your conference details:
   - Conference name and short name (acronym)
   - Conference slug (URL identifier, e.g., `icds2027`)
   - Description and subject areas
   - Start and end dates
   - Location (city, state, country)
   - Additional information about your organization
5. Click **"Submit Conference Request"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/site-request/request-form.png" alt="Conference Site Request Form" width="800" />

<Callout type="info" title="Tip: Help us approve your request faster">
Use your **business or institution email** (not personal email like Gmail) and provide details in the **Additional Information** field about your organization, conference history, or expected attendees. This helps us verify legitimate requests and process approvals quickly.
</Callout>

---

## Requesting a Demo Sandbox

Select **Demo Sandbox** under **Site Type** when you want to explore PaperFox without committing to a real conference. An amber banner appears with submission reminders, and the slug field shows a **`demo-`** prefix so you can see exactly what the URL will become.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/site-request/site-type-demo.png" alt="Demo request with amber banner and demo- slug prefix" width="800" />

Still fill out the form with **your real conference details** (name, dates, subject areas) — vague or placeholder submissions get held up. Describe the evaluation scenario in the **Additional Information** field (e.g., "Evaluating PaperFox for our 2027 conference", "Training reviewers before go-live").

Demo prefixes are applied automatically so the conference is clearly identifiable as a sandbox:

| Field | What you entered | Demo conference |
|-------|------------------|-----------------|
| Name | International Conference on AI | **[Demo]** International Conference on AI |
| Short name | ICAI 2027 | **Demo-**ICAI 2027 |
| Slug (URL) | `icai2027` | **`demo-`**`icai2027` |

The demo is a fully-functional conference — you can create tracks, invite reviewers, submit test submissions, and run the review cycle end to end.

<Callout type="warning" title="Demo data does not carry over">
Treat the demo purely as a sandbox for learning. When you're ready to run your real conference, submit a new site request with **Real Conference** selected — configuration, submissions, and reviews from the demo are independent and will not migrate automatically.
</Callout>

---

## Request Status

After submission, your request will show one of these statuses:

| Status | Meaning |
|--------|---------|
| **Pending** | Awaiting admin review |
| **Approved** | Your conference site is being created |
| **Rejected** | Not approved (you'll receive feedback) |
| **Active** | Conference site is ready to use |

You can check your request status anytime in **Settings → Site Requests**.

---

# Reuse Setup from a Previous Conference

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/reuse-conference-setup
Description: Export a conference's configuration as a file and import it into a new edition instead of starting from scratch.

Running a new edition of the same conference? Export the previous edition's setup as a file, then import it into the new conference — tracks, forms, phases, decision types, website content, and registration setup all carry over.

## What Transfers

The setup file is split into sections you can pick individually, on both the export and import side:

| Section | What it contains |
|---------|-----------------|
| General Settings | Visibility and feature flags, notification defaults, upload size limit, committee email intro/signature |
| Decision Types | Built-in and custom decision types |
| Default Forms | Conference-level default submission and review form fields |
| Tracks & Phases | Track structure (including sub-tracks) with review settings, phases, per-track forms, and compliance rules |
| Website | Public page layout settings and page content |
| Registration | Registration form and registration types |

<Callout type="info" title="What never transfers">
The file contains configuration only. Deadlines and dates, submissions, reviews, registrations, people (chairs, reviewers, committee), uploaded images, and billing/payment settings are never included. Imported phases arrive with empty deadlines for you to fill in.
</Callout>

## Export the Setup

1. In the previous conference, go to **Conference Settings → Setup Export & Import**
2. Untick any sections you don't want to share — all are included by default
3. Click **"Export Setup"** — a `.json` file downloads

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/reuse-conference-setup/setup-export-page.png" alt="Setup Export & Import settings page with section checkboxes" width="800" />

## Import Into the New Conference

1. In the new conference, go to **Conference Settings → Setup Export & Import**
2. Click **"Choose Setup File"** and select the exported `.json` file
3. A preview shows which conference the file came from and which sections it contains — untick anything you don't want to apply

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/reuse-conference-setup/setup-import-preview.png" alt="Import preview showing the source conference and selectable sections" width="800" />

4. Click **"Import Setup"** and confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/reuse-conference-setup/setup-import-confirm.png" alt="Import confirmation dialog warning that imported sections overwrite current configuration" width="800" />

<Callout type="warning" title="Importing overwrites">
Imported sections replace the new conference's current configuration for those sections — importing **Tracks & Phases** replaces the entire track structure, including its forms and phases. Import is only available while the conference has no submissions, and the Tracks & Phases section is blocked once reviewers or track chairs have been added.
</Callout>

## After Importing

A few things need fresh input in every edition:

1. Set submission, review, and revision deadlines — they always import empty
2. Re-upload the website banner image, if you use one
3. Invite your committee — chairs, track chairs, and reviewers are never carried over

See also: [Create Tracks](/docs/chairs/create-tracks), [Configure Conference Forms](/docs/chairs/configure-conference-forms), [Set Up Registration](/docs/chairs/setup-registration)

---

# Send Notifications

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/send-notifications
Description: Send email notifications to authors, reviewers, and committee members from the Notifications hub

PaperFox sends every chair-facing email through one place — the **Notifications hub** at `/notifications`. The hub lists pre-built notifications (called **presets**) for the things chairs do over and over: send decision letters, remind authors to register, ping reviewers about overdue reviews, broadcast announcements. Click a preset card and the composer opens with the right audience and template already filled in.

## The Notifications Hub

1. Click **Notifications** in the sidebar (or the **Compose** sub-item)

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/notifications-hub.png" alt="Notifications hub with the Conference and Track pickers, the search box, and the Author Notifications section of decision-letter and reminder cards" width="800" />

The hub groups presets by category:

| Category | Examples |
|----------|----------|
| **Author Notifications** | Send Acceptance / Conditional Acceptance / Major Revision / Minor Revision / Rejection / Desk Rejection Letters, Remind to Register, Remind to Upload Camera Ready, Remind to Submit Revision |
| **Reviewer Notifications** | Reminders and thank-yous for reviewers, AEs, and SEs — profile prompts, invitation and assignment chasers, review reminders, and more. [Full list below.](#email-reviewers-from-the-committee-page) |
| **Announcements** | Send Conference Announcement (broadcast to authors / reviewers / chairs), [Notify All Registrants](/docs/chairs/notify-all-registrants) (logistics & arrival info to everyone registered, including registrants you imported) |
| **Custom** | Custom Notification — the freeform composer if no preset fits |
| **Context-Aware** | Email Selected Authors / Reviewers / Associate Editors / Senior Editors / Track Chairs, Notify Authors of Compliance Issues, Remind Authors to Register — these open the relevant list page so you can pick recipients, then notify only the rows you selected |

<Callout type="info" title="Custom decision types get their own cards">
If your conference defines its own decision types beyond the six built-in ones — say **Accept as Poster** — the hub adds a **"Send Accept as Poster Letters"** card under Author Notifications automatically. It opens the composer with that decision already selected and a neutral decision letter loaded, which you then edit to say what the decision actually means.
</Callout>

<Callout type="info" title="Reminder cards skip authors who already delivered">
**Remind to Submit Revision** and **Remind to Upload Camera Ready** email only the authors who still owe you a new version — anyone who already uploaded one for the current phase drops out of the audience automatically, so nobody gets nagged for work they've done.

"Still owes a version" is the same test behind the **No revision yet** badge on Track Submissions, so the card's recipient count matches what you see filtering that page. It works whether or not you recorded a formal decision: submissions moved into a revision or camera-ready phase are included on the strength of the phase alone.
</Callout>

2. Use the **Conference** and **Track** pickers at the top to scope the cards to the conference and track you want to email
3. (Optional) Type in the **search box** to filter cards by name or description — type "register" to narrow to registration-related presets, "overdue" for the overdue-review reminder, etc.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/hub-search-filter.png" alt="Notifications hub with the search box typed 'register' filtered to three matching cards: Remind to Register, Notify All Registrants, and Remind Authors to Register" width="800" />

4. Click a preset card. The composer opens with **everything pre-filled** — recipients, subject, message body, and a **Back to Notifications** button to return:

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/composer-preset-prefilled.png" alt="Composer page after clicking Send Acceptance Letters: page header with Back to Notifications link, compact Conference/Track pickers, and the Recipients section with Authors tab and the Accept decision pre-checked" width="800" />

5. Edit the subject or body if you want to add conference-specific context, then click **Send Notification**.

<Callout type="info" title="Each preset is one click">
The hub replaces the old "pick conference, pick track, pick role, pick filter, pick template" multi-step flow. If you find yourself wanting a notification that isn't on the list, see [Don't see what you need?](#dont-see-what-you-need) below.
</Callout>

---

## All Tracks

When a conference has more than one track and you manage them all, the **Track** picker shows an **All tracks** option at the top. Picking it lets you send a single notification across every track in the conference — useful for conference-wide announcements or multi-track decision letters.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/all-tracks-option.png" alt="Track dropdown on the notifications hub showing three options: All tracks at the top, then Consumer Behavior (current), then Digital Marketing" width="600" />

The "All tracks" option only appears in conferences where you manage 2 or more tracks. In a single-track conference there's nothing to combine.

---

## Email a Submission's Authors

You can email the authors of a specific submission directly from the submission detail page.

1. Open a submission in your track
2. Next to the **Authors** heading, click **"Email Authors"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/email-authors-link.png" alt="Email Authors link next to Authors heading on the submission detail page" width="800" />

This opens the composer pre-filled with the submission's details:

- **Recipients** are pre-loaded from the submission's author list, each with a checkbox you can toggle individually
- **Subject** is pre-filled with the submission slug (e.g., `[ICAI2027-5]`)
- Quick-filter buttons above the list reset the selection: **Select All**, **Corresponding Only** (when there's a corresponding author), **Submitter Only** (when the submitter is one of the authors), and **Unselect All**

Compose your message and click **"Send Notification"**. (The picker UI is the same as the bulk-select flow shown in [Email Authors of Selected Submissions](#email-authors-of-selected-submissions) below.)

<Callout type="info" title="Who can see this?">
The "Email Authors" link only appears for conference chairs and track chairs. Authors and reviewers do not see it.
</Callout>

---

## Email Authors of Selected Submissions

When you want to email the authors of several specific submissions — for example, all accepted submissions in a track, or a hand-picked shortlist — use the bulk-select tool on the Track Submissions page.

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click your conference
2. Under **Track Management**, open your track and click **"All Submissions"**
3. (Optional) Use the status filter or search to narrow the list — for example, filter to **Accepted** to email accepted authors
4. Check the box on each submission you want to include, or check the top box to select every row on the page
5. Click **"Notify Authors"** in the toolbar above the list

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/notify-selected-authors.png" alt="Track Submissions page with three submissions selected and the Notify Authors button in the toolbar" width="800" />

The composer opens with all selected submissions pre-loaded:

- The **Recipients** card shows the count of selected submissions and a deduplicated checkbox list of every author across them
- Use the quick filters (**Select All**, **Corresponding Only**, **Submitter Only**, **Unselect All**) or toggle individual checkboxes to pick exactly who should receive the email — co-authors who appear on multiple selected submissions receive only one email
- Compose your message and click **"Send Notification"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/author-picker.png" alt="Email Selected Authors composer page. Header shows 'Email Selected Authors' title with a Back link above. The Recipients card lists submission dsw2027-4 'AutoML for Time Series Forecasting' and a Send to picker with three author rows. Jessica Taylor is checked and tagged with a blue C (Corresponding) badge after her name; Kevin Brown and Michael Chen are unchecked, with Michael carrying an amber S (Submitter) badge. Each row shows email and affiliation on one line separated by a middot. Quick filters above the list: Select All, Corresponding Only (active in this state), Submitter Only, Unselect All. A legend at the bottom of the picker explains the C and S badges. Footer shows '1 recipient' with a Preview Recipients button." width="800" />

The **C** badge marks the corresponding author; the **S** badge marks the user who actually submitted the submission. They can be the same person or different.

The same select-and-notify affordance is available in the toolbar on the **Track → Decisions** page — useful right after making decisions, when you want to email authors by decision outcome without leaving the review workflow.

---

## Email Reviewers from the Committee Page

From the Reviewer Management page, you can jump to the Notifications hub pre-scoped to your conference and track — no need to re-pick them when you arrive.

1. Open your track and click **"Manage Reviewers"** (or navigate to **Track → Reviewers**)
2. Click the **"Notify"** button in the Reviewers toolbar

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/notify-reviewers-btn.png" alt="Reviewer Management page with the Notify button highlighted in the Reviewers card toolbar" width="800" />

3. The hub opens with your conference and track already selected. Pick the preset that fits — typically one of:

| Preset | When to use it |
|--------|----------------|
| **Remind to Complete Profile** | Reviewers who accepted their invitation but haven't filled in name, affiliation, etc. |
| **Remind: Empty Research Profile** | Reviewers whose profile is otherwise complete but who haven't added research keywords — they get random-assignment fallbacks instead of expertise-matched submissions |
| **Remind to Answer Committee Invitation** | Invited people who haven't joined the committee yet |
| **Remind to Answer Submission Assignments** | Reviewers already on the committee who haven't accepted or declined the submissions you assigned them |
| **Remind to Submit Reviews** | Reviewers with at least one review still unsubmitted — includes those part-way through, not just those who never started |
| **Remind About Overdue Reviews** | Reviewers with at least one review past the deadline |
| **Thank Members Who Finished** | Reviewers who submitted *every* review assigned to them |
| **Follow Up on Declined Assignments** | Reviewers who declined at least one submission — offer them different submissions or a lighter load |
| **Notify of New Assignments** | Tell members about the submissions currently assigned to them |
| **Custom Notification** | Anything else — opens the freeform composer |

<Callout type="warning" title="Two different invitations">
**Remind to Answer Committee Invitation** and **Remind to Answer Submission Assignments** sound alike but reach different people — on a large conference the audiences differ by an order of magnitude. Check the count on the card before sending.
</Callout>

<Callout type="info" title="Counts are people, not submissions">
Every number on the composer's Status Filter counts **people**, not submissions or reviews. Because one reviewer can hold several submissions, they can match more than one filter — anyone in **Remind About Overdue Reviews** is also in **Remind to Submit Reviews**, and someone who declined one submission may still owe a review on another. So the counts overlap and won't add up to your committee total.

**Remind to Submit Reviews** and **Thank Members Who Finished** are the exception: they never overlap. A reviewer with two reviews in and one outstanding counts as unfinished, so the thank-you never reaches someone who still owes you work.
</Callout>

---

## Email Reviewers You Pick by Name

The presets above target a *cohort* — everyone with an overdue review, everyone who never filled in a profile. When the people you want don't share a status like that (say you invited five reviewers personally and want to nudge just them), pick the rows yourself:

1. Open **Track → Reviewers** and stay on the **Active** tab
2. Tick the checkbox next to each person you want to reach — or use **Select all** in the toolbar above the table to take everyone on the page
3. Click **"Notify Selected"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/send-notification/notify-selected-reviewers.png" alt="Reviewer Management page with two reviewers checked and the Notify Selected button active in the selection toolbar" width="800" />

The composer opens with those people as a fixed recipient list — a read-only **Recipients** card instead of the usual audience picker — so you write the message once and it goes to exactly who you ticked. Click **Preview recipients** on that card to see the names before you send.

The same checkboxes are on the **Associate Editors**, **Senior Editors**, and **Track Chairs** pages, and behave identically.

<Callout type="info" title="A few things worth knowing">
- **Your picks survive paging.** On a large committee, tick people on page 1, move to page 2, and tick more — the count in the toolbar keeps the running total, and all of them reach the composer. **Select all** adds only the current page, so it never wipes picks you made elsewhere.
- **Active members only.** People on the **Pending** and **Declined** tabs haven't joined the committee, so they can't be selected here. To chase them, use **Remind to Answer Committee Invitation** above, or **Resend All** on the Pending tab.
- **Undeliverable addresses.** A reviewer tagged *Undeliverable* can still be ticked, but the email will not reach them — their address previously bounced or was suppressed. Ask them for a different address and update it before relying on the send.
</Callout>

---

## Don't see what you need?

Below the preset cards on the hub there's a **request form**. If your conference needs a notification that doesn't exist yet — for example, a visa-support reminder for accepted authors from a specific region — describe what you'd like in the form and click **Send request**. PaperFox support reviews each request and adds new presets as patterns emerge.

The form is plain text. Tell us:

- **Who** the notification should go to (e.g., "accepted authors from Asia-Pacific")
- **When** to send it (e.g., "30 days before the conference")
- **What** it should say (a sentence is enough — we'll draft the template)

---

# Set Up Conference Registration

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/setup-registration
Description: Configure registration types with pricing and availability windows, then enable registration for your conference

Configure conference registration to allow registrants to register for your event. Registration requires setting up registration types and configuring the registration form.

## Registration Setup Process

### 1. Create Registration Types

Registration requires at least one enabled registration type.

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Under **Registration Management**, click **"Registration Types"**
3. Click **"Add Registration Type"**

**For each registration type, configure:**

| Field | Description |
|-------|-------------|
| **Name** | Display name (e.g., "Early Bird", "Regular", "Student") |
| **Price (USD)** | Set to 0 for free registration |
| **Max Quantity** | Leave empty for unlimited capacity |
| **Enabled** | Toggle on to make it available to registrants |

#### Availability Window

You can set an **availability window** to control when each registration type is open for purchase:

- **Available From** — When registration opens (e.g., start of early bird period)
- **Available To** — When registration closes (e.g., end of early bird period)
- **Timezone** — Defaults to Anywhere on Earth (AoE)

Leave both dates empty to make the type always available when enabled.

<Callout type="info" title="Time-Based Registration Example">
Create multiple types with different windows for tiered pricing:
- **Early Bird** ($100): Available From Jan 1 → Available To Mar 31
- **Regular** ($200): Available From Apr 1 → Available To Jul 31
- **On-Site** ($300): Available From Aug 1 → Available To Sep 15
</Callout>

#### What Registrants See

- **Available types** — Selectable with price shown
- **Expired types** — Shown as "Registration closed" (greyed out)
- **Sold-out types** — Shown as "Sold out" (greyed out)
- **Future types** — Hidden until their availability window opens

#### Locked Fields After Sales

Once a registration type has sales, **name and price are locked** to protect existing buyers. You can still change:
- Max quantity (increase or decrease capacity)
- Enabled status
- Availability window dates

### 2. Configure Registration Form

1. Under **Registration Management**, click **"Registration Form"**
2. Customize form fields for registrant information, or use the default form
3. Add custom fields specific to your conference (e.g., dietary preferences, T-shirt size, accessibility needs)
4. Save and publish the form

#### Core Fields

Five fields are marked **Core** and must remain on every registration form:

- **First Name**
- **Last Name**
- **Email Address**
- **Affiliation**
- **Country/Region**

Their labels, descriptions, and placeholders are fully editable, but the fields themselves cannot be removed. The country field's options come from a built-in country list.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/setup-registration/registration-form-rules.png" alt="Registration form builder showing the soft-lock banner and Core badges on the five required fields" width="800" />

#### Editing Rules

| Action | Before any registration | After registrations exist |
|---|---|---|
| Edit field labels, descriptions, placeholders | ✅ Allowed | ✅ Allowed |
| Add new custom fields | ✅ Allowed | ✅ Allowed |
| Delete a custom field | ✅ Allowed | ✅ Allowed if no responses; otherwise blocked |
| Reorder fields | ✅ Allowed | ❌ Blocked (drag handles replaced by lock icons) |
| Delete a Core field | ❌ Blocked | ❌ Blocked |
| Change a Core field's **type** (e.g. text → dropdown) | ✅ Allowed | ❌ Blocked |

<Callout type="info" title="Why Core fields are protected">
First Name, Last Name, Email, Affiliation, and Country are stored as dedicated columns on each registration record. Removing them or changing their type would orphan data already collected from registrants, so PaperFox locks their structural shape — but their visible text stays free for you to reword as needed.
</Callout>

### 3. Enable Registration

1. Return to your conference page
2. In **Registration Management**, toggle **"Enable Registration"**

The system automatically publishes your registration form when you enable registration.

<Callout type="warning" title="Stripe Required for Paid Types">
If you have paid registration types, you must connect Stripe before enabling registration. See [Managing Registration Payments](/docs/chairs/registration-payments) for setup instructions.
</Callout>

---

## Managing Active Registration

### Registration Overview

Monitor all registrations from the **Registration Overview** page under **Registration Management → Overview**.

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/setup-registration/registration-overview.png" alt="Registration Overview page showing revenue stats and sales chart" width="800" />

The overview page includes:

- **Revenue stats** — Total sales, refunds, net sales, and fee breakdown at a glance
- **Sales by Registration Type chart** — Visual bar chart showing revenue per registration type (only types with sales are charted). Hover over bars to see revenue and quantity sold. When no sales exist yet, a placeholder appears until the first registration is sold.
- **Sales table** — Detailed breakdown of all registration types with price, quantity sold, and subtotal
- **Recent orders** — Latest registration purchases with registrant info and payment status

### Registration Types Page

From the **Registration Types** page, you can:
- View all enabled and disabled types with their availability dates and capacity
- Click **"View Registration Page"** to preview the public registration page
- Add, edit, or delete registration types
- **Reorder types** by dragging the grip handle on the left of each row

#### Reordering Registration Types

Registration types are displayed to registrants in the order you set. To change the order:

1. Go to **Registration Management → Registration Types**
2. Grab the **drag handle** (the dotted grip icon on the left side of any row)
3. Drag the row up or down to the desired position
4. Release — the new order is saved automatically

The order you set here is the order registrants see on the public registration page. Both the **Enabled** and **Disabled** tabs support independent reordering.

### Refund Policy

Set a flat administrative fee that's deducted from every refund. You set this **once** here, registrants see the same amount when they request a refund, and you don't re-enter it for each approval.

1. Go to **Registration Management → Registration Types**
2. In the **Refund Policy** card at the top, enter the fee in the USD field (e.g. `30.00`)
3. Click **"Save"**

<img src="/docs/assets/chairs/setup-registration/refund-policy.png" alt="Refund Policy card on the Registration Types page with USD admin fee input and Save button" width="800" />

Set the policy to **0** for full refunds. Authors see "You'll receive $X" in their refund-request dialog with this amount already deducted, so the policy is transparent before they submit.

The fee is a flat amount between **$0 and $10,000** — it's not a percentage. Keep it below your registration prices: a refund **can't be approved if the fee meets or exceeds what the registrant paid**. If that happens, the approval dialog prompts you to lower the fee on this page first (for example, a $50 fee can't be applied to a $40 ticket's refund).

Changing the policy applies to every refund approved from that point on, including pending requests submitted under the old policy — so avoid raising it after registrants have already submitted their refund requests. See [Handling Refunds](/docs/chairs/registration-payments#handling-refunds) for the approval workflow.

### Refund Management

Handle refund requests through **Refund Management**:
- Review refund requests from registrants
- Approve or deny requests
- Communicate with requesters

### Form Modifications After Registration Opens

Once registrants start registering, the builder shows a banner with the response count and switches into soft-lock mode. You can still:

- Edit any field's label, description, placeholder, and required flag
- Add new custom fields
- Delete custom fields that have no answers yet

What's locked once registrations exist:

- The five Core fields (First Name, Last Name, Email, Affiliation, Country) cannot be removed and their input type cannot change
- Existing fields cannot be reordered (drag handles are replaced with lock icons)
- Custom fields with answers cannot be deleted (delete button is disabled)

See [Configure Registration Form](#2-configure-registration-form) above for the full editing rules table.

---

# Submission Billing

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/submission-billing
Description: Set up payment to support submissions over the free limit

Each conference includes 20 free submissions. If you expect more, you'll need to add a payment method to avoid blocking submissions when the limit is reached.

## Opening the Submission Billing Page

Submission billing is **per-conference** — the payment method lives on the conference, not your personal account. Any conference chair can add or update it.

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar and click your conference
2. Click **Settings** in the conference sidebar
3. Open **Submission Billing** from the settings navigation

This opens `/conferences/{your-conference}/settings/billing`.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission-billing/billing-page.png" alt="Submission Billing settings page showing Usage Summary and Payment Method sections" width="800" />

The page has two sections:

- **Usage Summary** — current submissions vs. free limit, the per-submission rate, and your estimated charge. The progress bar fills as you approach the free limit and shows any billable count beyond it.
- **Payment Method** — the saved card for this conference. Empty until you add one.

<Callout type="info" title="Personal billing is a separate page">
If you're looking to buy AI credits for your personal account, that lives at **Settings → Billing & Payment** (from your profile menu). The two pages look similar but manage different things.
</Callout>

---

## Adding a Payment Method

1. Click **"Add Payment Method"**
2. Enter your credit card details in the Stripe form
3. Confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/submission-billing/setup-payment-method.png" alt="Add Payment Method interface" width="800" />

The card is attached to this conference's Stripe customer only — it is not a shared personal payment method. Removing it from this conference does not affect any other conference or your personal billing.

To **change** the card later, click **"Change"** in the saved-card panel and re-enter card details. To **remove** it, click the small **"Remove payment method"** link below the card; submissions over the free limit will be blocked until a new card is added.

---

## How Billing Works

### Automatic Billing Process

**During Conference:**
- First 20 submissions are free
- Submissions 21+ require a valid payment method
- No charges occur during the conference

**After Conference Ends:**
- You receive an advance-notice billing email 7 days before the conference end date
- Final billing is charged 1 day after the conference end date
- Only charged for submissions beyond the free limit

### Reading the Charge Status

After the conference ends, the top of the Submission Billing page shows the latest charge's state. You'll see one of these banners — and only when there's something to know:

| Banner | What it means | What to do |
|--------|---------------|------------|
| **Charge Scheduled** (blue) | A charge is queued and will run within 24 hours. | Nothing — sit back. |
| **Charge Retrying** (blue) | A previous attempt failed; the next retry is scheduled for the date shown. | Optionally click **"Retry Now"** if you've fixed the underlying issue (e.g. updated the card). After 3 total attempts the row flips to **Charge Failed**. |
| **Charge Failed** (red) | All retry attempts exhausted. | Update the payment method below, then click **"Retry Now"** — we'll re-attempt within 24 hours. |
| **Charge Completed** (green) | Charge succeeded. The banner includes a **"View receipt"** link to Stripe's hosted invoice page. | Done. The same link is also in the email Stripe sends you. |

If no banner is shown, there's no charge state to surface yet — typically because the conference hasn't ended, or you stayed within the free tier.

### Receipts and Invoices

Unlike registration payments (where your conference is the seller), submission billing is invoiced directly by **PaperFox (DataMonet LLC)**. Each charge produces a full Stripe invoice — not just a simple receipt.

After a successful charge, the email you receive includes a **"View Receipt"** button that opens Stripe's hosted invoice page. From there you can:

- Download the invoice as a **PDF** (standard invoice with PaperFox business details, invoice number, tax info, line-item breakdown)
- Forward the PDF to your finance department for reimbursement
- Reference the invoice number on your institution's expense system

The invoice line item reads, for example: `AB4SC — 32 billable submissions × $2.00 (52/20 free)` so finance can see the exact pricing breakdown without needing additional documentation.

---

## Payment Security

**Secure Processing:**
- All payments processed through Stripe
- Your card information is encrypted and secure
- PaperFox never stores your full card details
- Industry-standard security practices

**Payment Method Management:**
- View, change, or remove the saved card from the Submission Billing page anytime
- Past charge receipts arrive by email and stay accessible at the Stripe invoice URL — there's no in-app charge history page today

---

# Transfer Credits to Participants

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/chairs/transfer-credits
Description: Transfer credits to conference participants individually or by role

Credits are used for AI-powered features such as profile discovery, conflict matching, and submission analysis. As a conference chair, you can transfer credits to participants to help them access these features.

1. Log in to your PaperFox account and go to your dashboard
2. Click the conference you want to manage
3. Navigate to **Credit Transfer** from the conference management menu

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/credit-transfer/find-credit-transfer.png" alt="Find Credit Transfer" width="800" />

Your current credit balance is displayed at the top. Click **Buy More Credits** to purchase additional credits.

## Transfer by Role

Send the same amount of credits to all participants in a specific role.

1. Select a role:
   - **All Chairs** - Conference chairs (excluding yourself)
   - **All Track Chairs** - Track chairs in your conference
   - **All Reviewers** - Reviewers across all tracks
   - **All Authors** - Authors who submitted submissions

2. Enter the **Credits per Person** amount
3. Review the summary showing recipients, amount per person, and total required
4. Add optional notes
5. Click **Transfer to [number] [role]** and confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/credit-transfer/transfer-by-role.png" alt="Transfer by Role" width="800" />

## Transfer to Individual

Send credits to a specific participant.

1. Click the search field and search by name, email, or affiliation
2. Select the user from the results
3. Enter the **Credits to Transfer** amount
4. Review the summary
5. Add optional notes
6. Click **Transfer Credits** and confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/credit-transfer/transfer-to-ind.png" alt="Transfer to Individual" width="800" />

## Transfer History

View your credit transfers in the **Transfer History** tab. Each entry shows the amount, recipient details, roles, date, and optional notes.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/credit-transfer/transfer-history.png" alt="Transfer History" width="800" />

---

# Automated Testing

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/engineering/automated-testing
Description: Automated tests ensure PaperFox reliability and quality

PaperFox maintains a comprehensive automated test suite to ensure reliability and catch issues before they reach production.

## Test Coverage

| Type | Tests | Duration | Coverage |
|------|-------|----------|----------|
| Unit Tests | ~2,500 | ~5 seconds | Utilities, permissions, business logic |
| E2E Tests | ~600 | ~6 minutes | Full user workflows |
| **Total** | **~3,000** | **~6 minutes** | **Full stack** |

## What This Means

- **Reliable releases**: Every code change is validated against ~3,000 tests before deployment
- **Rapid iteration**: Unit tests run in seconds, enabling fast development cycles
- **User journey coverage**: E2E tests simulate real users performing actual workflows
- **Regression prevention**: Automated checks catch bugs before they affect users

## Unit Tests

Fast, focused tests covering core functionality:

- **Utilities** - Date/time handling, string manipulation, file operations
- **Permissions** - Role-based access control validation
- **Business Logic** - Phase management, decision handling, notifications
- **Data Validation** - Country codes, email formats, form schemas

## E2E Tests

Browser-based tests simulating complete user workflows:

- **Authentication** - Sign in, sign up, password reset
- **Submissions** - Submission submission, file uploads, revisions
- **Reviews** - Assignment, submission, delegation
- **Conference Management** - Track setup, deadlines, notifications
- **Website Builder** - Page creation, content editing
- **Program Builder** - Sessions, schedule management
- **Registration** - Registration purchase, payment processing
- **Forum** - Thread creation, moderation
- **Support System** - Ticket creation, replies, status changes

## CI/CD Integration

Every pull request automatically runs:

1. TypeScript compilation
2. ESLint code quality checks
3. Full unit test suite

Code cannot merge without all tests passing.

## Testing Tools

- **[Vitest](https://vitest.dev/)** - Unit testing with instant feedback
- **[Playwright](https://playwright.dev/)** - Cross-browser E2E automation
- **[GitHub Actions](https://github.com/features/actions)** - Continuous integration pipeline

---

# Performance & Scalability

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/engineering/load-testing
Description: PaperFox handles thousands of concurrent submission submissions

PaperFox is built to handle large conferences with thousands of concurrent users submitting submissions, even during deadline rushes.

## Tested Capacity

We regularly load test our infrastructure to ensure reliability during peak submission periods.

### 1000 Concurrent Users

| Metric | Result |
|--------|--------|
| Success Rate | **100% (1000/1000)** |
| Total Time | ~16.5 seconds |
| PDF Size | 2MB+ |

| Step | Time |
|------|------|
| Authentication | 2-3s |
| File Upload | 2-3s |
| Database Write | 8-11s |

### 2000 Concurrent Users

| Metric | Result |
|--------|--------|
| Success Rate | **100% (2000/2000)** |
| Total Time | ~30 seconds |
| PDF Size | 2MB+ |

| Step | Time |
|------|------|
| Authentication | 3-4s |
| File Upload | 2-3s |
| Database Write | 22-26s |

### 5000 Concurrent Users

| Metric | Result |
|--------|--------|
| Success Rate | **100% (5000/5000)** |
| Total Time | ~48 seconds |
| PDF Size | 2MB+ |

| Step | Time |
|------|------|
| Authentication | 1-2s |
| File Upload | 2-16s |
| Database Write | 29-30s |

## What This Means

- **Large conferences**: With 5,000+ concurrent submissions supported, conferences with tens of thousands of submissions can be handled easily since submissions are spread over time
- **Deadline rushes**: System remains stable during peak submission times
- **File uploads**: Direct-to-cloud uploads for fast, reliable PDF submission
- **No queuing**: Every submission processes in real-time, no waiting

## Testing Methodology

Our load tests simulate real-world submission submissions:

1. **User Authentication** - Full login flow with session management
2. **Presigned URL** - Secure upload URL generation
3. **Direct S3 Upload** - 2MB+ PDF uploaded directly to cloud storage
4. **Submission Creation** - Complete database transaction with author records

Tests run on **Grafana k6 Cloud** from distributed AWS load zones, simulating geographically distributed users submitting simultaneously.

## Infrastructure

- **Database**: Neon PostgreSQL with connection pooling
- **File Storage**: AWS S3 with presigned direct uploads
- **Hosting**: Vercel Edge Network (global CDN)

---

# Smart Matching Algorithm

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/engineering/smart-matching-algorithm
Description: Technical deep-dive into PaperFox's reviewer-submission assignment algorithm

PaperFox uses Smart Matching to automatically assign reviewers to submissions. The algorithm combines text similarity scoring with [Min-Cost Max-Flow](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Minimum-cost_flow_problem) network optimization to find the globally optimal assignment across all submissions simultaneously.

---

## Architecture Overview

```
Data Collection → Scoring → COI Filtering → MCMF Assignment → Output
```

| Stage | What it does |
|-------|-------------|
| **Data Collection** | Fetch submissions, reviewers, conflicts, system keywords |
| **Scoring** | BM25 or OpenAI embeddings (0–70) + keyword phrase matching (0–30) |
| **COI Filtering** | Block reviewer-submission pairs with conflicts |
| **MCMF Assignment** | Find globally optimal assignment via network flow |
| **Output** | Suggestions with scores, reasoning, workload summary |

---

## Step 1: Data Collection

Submissions and reviewers are fetched in parallel from the database.

**Reviewer expertise tags** come from three sources (deduplicated case-insensitively):

| Source | Description |
|--------|-------------|
| AI-discovered | Tags from AI profile discovery (`aiExpertiseTags`) |
| User-declared | Manually added by the reviewer (`userExpertiseTags`) |
| System keywords | Extracted from reviewer's own submission submissions in PaperFox (top 20 by frequency, from 20 most recent submissions) |

A reviewer with any tags is "profiled" and matched by expertise. Reviewers with no tags are assigned as fallback to fill remaining slots.

**Conflicts** are fetched via `getUserConflicts()` which returns:
- `USER_DECLARED` — self-disclosed by the reviewer
- `SYSTEM_DETECTED` — co-authors computed live from the Author table (last 3 years)

---

## Step 2: Scoring

Each profiled reviewer is scored against each submission. The score has two components:

| Component | Range | Weight |
|-----------|-------|--------|
| Text similarity | 0–70 | Primary signal |
| Keyword overlap | 0–30 | Direct keyword matching bonus |

```
matchScore = min(100, textScore + keywordScore)
```

### Text Similarity (two options)

**BM25 (default, free):**
Uses [Okapi BM25](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Okapi_BM25) — an improvement over TF-IDF used by systems like [OpenReview's TPMS](https://docs.openreview.net/how-to-guides/paper-matching-and-assignment/how-to-compute-affinity-scores). BM25 adds term frequency saturation (a word appearing 10x doesn't score 10x higher) and document length normalization (short abstracts aren't penalized vs long ones).

- Submission `title + abstract` is tokenized (title tokens duplicated 2x for emphasis) using the [`natural`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/natural) NLP library: [WordTokenizer](https://naturalnode.github.io/natural/tokenizers.html) for word splitting, [Porter Stemmer](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stemming) for normalization, and `natural`'s 170 English stop words plus academic-specific terms (propose, method, results, evaluate, etc.) that appear in every abstract but carry no matching value
- Reviewer expertise tags are tokenized as the query (same pipeline)
- BM25 IDF formula: `log((N - df + 0.5) / (df + 0.5) + 1)` — never produces negative values
- Scores normalized by max score across all pairs

**AI Semantic (credits):**
Uses [OpenAI text embeddings](https://platform.openai.com/docs/guides/embeddings) (`text-embedding-3-small`) for semantic understanding. Understands that "NLP" ≈ "natural language processing" or "deep learning" ≈ "neural networks".

- Submission and reviewer texts embedded as dense vectors
- [Cosine similarity](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cosine_similarity) between vectors
- Scores normalized by max score across all pairs

### Keyword Phrase Matching

Both scoring methods also compute keyword overlap:

1. **Phase 1**: Exact phrase match (case-insensitive) — "machine learning" matches "machine learning" as a whole phrase
2. **Phase 2**: Porter-stemmed word-level fallback for unmatched keywords — catches partial overlaps (e.g., "computing" and "computational" both stem to "comput")

---

## Step 3: COI Filtering

The reviewer's conflicts (user-declared + system-detected co-authors) are checked against submission authors by name, email, or affiliation. Any match blocks the assignment — the pair has **no edge** in the flow network, so the solver cannot assign them.

---

## Step 4: Optimal Assignment (Min-Cost Max-Flow)

Smart Matching models the entire assignment as a [minimum-cost flow problem](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Minimum-cost_flow_problem) and solves it optimally using the [Successive Shortest Path algorithm](https://cp-algorithms.com/graph/min_cost_flow.html) with [SPFA](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shortest_path_faster_algorithm). This finds the assignment that **maximizes total match quality across all submissions simultaneously** — the same approach used by major conference systems like [OpenReview](https://github.com/openreview/openreview-matcher).

### Flow Network Structure

```
Source ──→ Papers ──→ Reviewers ──→ Sink
```

| Edge | Capacity | Cost |
|------|----------|------|
| Source → Submission | `reviewersPerPaper` | 0 |
| Submission → Profiled Reviewer | 1 | `-matchScore × 100` |
| Submission → Non-Profiled Reviewer | 1 | small random (-1 to -9) |
| Reviewer → Sink | `maxPapersPerReviewer - existingWorkload` | 0 (or escalating for balance) |
| Overflow → Sink (soft mode only) | 2 | 100,000 (last resort) |

### Constraint Mode

The **Max submissions per reviewer** setting supports two modes:

- **Soft limit** (default) — Adds overflow edges (capacity 2, cost 100,000) from each reviewer to the sink. This allows reviewers to exceed their max by up to 2 submissions at extreme cost, ensuring all submissions can be assigned even when capacity is tight. The solver only uses these edges as a last resort.
- **Hard limit** — No overflow edges are added. The reviewer's capacity is strictly enforced. If total capacity (`reviewers × max`) is less than total demand (`submissions × target`), some submissions will receive fewer reviewers than the target.

### Reviewer Priority

The cost structure creates a natural priority:

1. **Profiled reviewers** — strongly preferred (cost = -7000 for score 70)
2. **Non-profiled reviewers** — fallback (cost = -1 to -9, randomized for fairness)
3. **Overflow** — over-capacity at extreme cost (100,000), only when no other option exists (soft mode only)

### Balance Mode

When **Balance Workload** is enabled, reviewer-to-sink edges use escalating costs:
- 1st submission assigned: cost = 0
- 2nd submission: cost = 500
- 3rd submission: cost = 1000
- ...

This penalizes loading any single reviewer, encouraging even distribution even at the cost of slightly lower expertise matches.

### Implementation

The solver is implemented in pure TypeScript with no external dependencies. It uses an index-based SPFA queue for O(1) dequeue performance. For typical conference sizes (50–500 submissions, 20–200 reviewers), it completes in milliseconds.

---

## Output

Each submission receives a list of recommended reviewers:

| Field | Description |
|-------|-------------|
| `matchScore` | 0–100 for profiled, `null` for non-profiled |
| `assignmentType` | `EXPERTISE_MATCH` or `RANDOM_NO_PROFILE` |
| `reasoning` | Human-readable explanation (e.g., "text similarity: 45/70; keyword overlap: 20/30; matching keywords: NLP, deep learning") |
| `expertiseOverlap` | Actual matching keywords for display |

The workload summary shows **existing + new** breakdown per reviewer, so chairs can see the impact before applying.

---

## References

- [Okapi BM25](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Okapi_BM25) — text similarity scoring
- [Min-Cost Max-Flow](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Minimum-cost_flow_problem) — optimal assignment formulation
- [Successive Shortest Path Algorithm](https://cp-algorithms.com/graph/min_cost_flow.html) — MCMF solver
- [SPFA (Shortest Path Faster Algorithm)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shortest_path_faster_algorithm) — shortest path finding
- [OpenReview Matcher](https://github.com/openreview/openreview-matcher) — similar approach used by NeurIPS/ICML
- [NeurIPS 2024 Submission-Reviewer Assignment](https://www.cs.cmu.edu/~csd-phd-blog/2025/neurips2024-paper-assignment/) — related research
- [OpenAI Embeddings](https://platform.openai.com/docs/guides/embeddings) — AI semantic scoring
- [Cosine Similarity](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cosine_similarity) — embedding vector comparison

---

# Delegate a Review to a Sub-Reviewer

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/reviewers/delegate-review
Description: How to delegate a review assignment to a sub-reviewer

If you're unable to complete a review, you can invite a sub-reviewer to handle it on your behalf. The sub-reviewer goes through the same assignment workflow as any other reviewer — they see it under **Awaiting Response** on their **Reviews** page, accept it, and write the review.

<Callout type="info" title="Track setting required">
Sub-reviewers must be enabled by the track chair. If you don't see the **"Invite Sub-Reviewer"** card on your review page, this feature is not enabled for your track.
</Callout>

## Prerequisites

- You must have **accepted** the review assignment
- The track must have **sub-reviewers enabled**
- You can only invite **one sub-reviewer per assignment**
- Sub-reviewers **cannot** invite further sub-reviewers (one level only)

## Invite a Sub-Reviewer

1. Click **Reviews** in the sidebar
2. If you haven't accepted yet, **Accept** the invitation on the **Awaiting Response** tab
3. On the **To Review** tab, click **"Write Review"** to open the review
4. On the review page, locate the purple **Sub-Reviewer** card and click **"Invite Sub-Reviewer"**

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/sub-reviewer/invite-card.png" alt="Sub-Reviewer invitation card on the review page" width="800" />

5. Enter the sub-reviewer's **email address** and an optional personal message
6. Click **"Send Invitation"**

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/sub-reviewer/invite-dialog.png" alt="Invite Sub-Reviewer dialog" width="800" />

The sub-reviewer will receive an email notification. They will also see the invitation under **Awaiting Response** on their **Reviews** page with a **"Delegated by [your name]"** badge — so they can find it even if the email goes to junk.

## Track Your Delegation

After inviting, the invite card is replaced by a status card:

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/sub-reviewer/pending-status.png" alt="Pending sub-reviewer invitation status" width="800" />

| Status | Meaning | Your Options |
|--------|---------|-------------|
| **Pending** | Sub-reviewer hasn't responded yet | Cancel the invitation |
| **Accepted** | Sub-reviewer is working on the review | Cancel (before they submit) |
| **Declined** | Sub-reviewer declined | Invite someone else, or write the review yourself |

## Cancel a Delegation

You can cancel the delegation **before the sub-reviewer starts writing their review**:

1. On the **Reviews** page, find the delegated review and click **"Manage"**
2. Click **"Cancel"** on the status card
3. Your assignment returns to **Accepted** status — you can write the review yourself or invite someone else

On the sub-reviewer's side, the assignment shows as **Cancelled** (not Declined) with a note that it was cancelled by the delegating reviewer — no action is needed from them, and it never counts as them having declined.

You can also **re-invite the same person later**: sending them a new invitation reactivates the cancelled assignment and they receive a fresh email to accept or decline.

<Callout type="warning" title="Cannot cancel after review starts">
Once the sub-reviewer has any review data (even a draft), the delegation cannot be cancelled. This ensures no review work is lost.
</Callout>

## View the Sub-Review

Once you delegate, the **Reviews** page shows the delegation status on the review's phase row:

- A **"Delegated to [name]"** badge
- A **"Manage"** button linking to the assignment page (before the sub-review is submitted)
- A **"View Sub-Review"** button to view the completed review (after submission)

The review page shows a read-only view with the sub-reviewer's scores and comments. You **cannot edit** the sub-review — only the sub-reviewer can update it.

## Sub-Reviewer's Experience

When you're invited as a sub-reviewer, the experience is identical to a regular review assignment:

1. You receive an email titled **"Sub-Review Delegation"** with the submission details and who delegated it
2. The invitation appears under **Awaiting Response** on your **Reviews** page with a **"Delegated by [name]"** badge

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/sub-reviewer/delegated-by-badge.png" alt="Delegated by badge on the Awaiting Response tab of the Reviews page" width="800" />

3. **Accept** or **Decline** the assignment as usual
4. If you accept, click **"Write Review"** and complete the review form
5. The review page and edit page show a notice: **"This review was delegated to you by [name]"**
6. Submit the review — the original reviewer will be notified

If the delegating reviewer cancels the invitation before you start writing, the assignment moves to your **Declined** tab labeled **"Cancelled by the delegating reviewer"** — nothing is required from you, and it is not recorded as a decline on your part.

## Important Notes

- You cannot invite yourself as a sub-reviewer
- Sub-reviewers are marked with a **"Sub-reviewer"** badge visible to track chairs
- The original reviewer is still responsible for ensuring the review is completed on time — track chairs contact the original reviewer, not the sub-reviewer, for reminders

---

# Manage Your Reviews

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/reviewers/manage-assignments
Description: Respond to invitations and write your reviews across all conferences

## Opening the Reviews Page

Everything you do as a reviewer lives on one page. Click **Reviews** in the sidebar, or from your **Dashboard** click **"View All"** under the **My Reviews** card.

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/review-assignment/review-dashboard.png" alt="Dashboard showing the Reviews sidebar item and My Reviews summary card highlighted" width="800" />

## The Four Tabs

The **Reviews** page organizes your work by where each review is in its lifecycle:

- **Awaiting Response** — new invitations to accept or decline
- **To Review** — accepted reviews you still need to write
- **Completed** — reviews you've submitted
- **Declined** — invitations you passed on, plus any sub-review delegations that were **cancelled by the delegating reviewer** (marked "Cancelled" — these don't count as declines by you)

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/review-assignment/reviews-page.png" alt="The Reviews page with Awaiting Response, To Review, Completed, and Declined tabs" width="800" />

### Responding to a New Invitation

New invitations appear under **Awaiting Response**:

1. Click the chevron (**›**) next to the title to read the abstract
2. Click **"Accept"** to commit to the review, or **"Decline"** to pass it on

Before you accept, you see the submission's **title and abstract** — the full submission, including the PDF, becomes available once you accept. This mirrors standard journal practice: the accept decision is about fit and time, and a reviewer who declines never had the manuscript in hand.

### Writing a Review

Accepted reviews you haven't submitted yet appear under **To Review**, grouped by submission. Each submission is listed once. On tracks with multiple review phases, every row is labeled with its **track phase** (for example, **Phase: Submission**) so you can tell which phase a review is for at a glance; on single-phase tracks the row simply reads **Review**. If you're assigned the same submission across multiple review phases, the **To Review** card shows only the phases you still need to write — once you submit a phase it moves to the **Completed** tab, so each phase lives under the tab that matches its status.

Each assignment shows the submission **as it was in that assignment's phase**. If the authors later revise the submission for a newer phase, your earlier-phase review keeps showing the version you were asked to review — you'll only see the revision if the chair assigns you in the new phase too.

1. Click **"Write Review"** (or **"Continue Draft"**) next to the phase you're reviewing
2. Read the abstract, keywords, and download the submission file on the left
3. Fill in the review form on the right and submit before the deadline — if the deadline has already passed, the row shows a **Past due** marker and the review page explains [whether you can still submit](/docs/reviewers/write-review#missing-the-review-deadline)

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/review-assignment/review-details.png" alt="Review editor showing submission details on the left and the review form on the right, labeled with its phase" width="800" />

Once submitted, a review moves to the **Completed** tab, where you can reopen it with **"View Review"**.

---

## Delegating a Review

If you're unable to complete an assignment, you can delegate it to another qualified reviewer. See the [Delegate a Review](/docs/reviewers/delegate-review) guide for instructions.

---

# Reviewer Workflow

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/reviewers/reviewer-workflow
Description: The complete reviewer journey in PaperFox — from invitation to submitted review — plus guidelines for writing good reviews

This guide walks you through the reviewer experience end to end, with links to detailed how-tos for each step, and closes with guidelines for writing high-quality reviews.

## Workflow at a Glance

1. [Respond to the reviewer invitation](#1-respond-to-the-invitation)
2. [Complete your research profile](#2-complete-your-research-profile)
3. [Accept or decline submission assignments](#3-respond-to-submission-assignments)
4. [Write and submit your reviews](#4-write-and-submit-your-reviews)
5. [Update a review or join the discussion](#5-update-a-review-or-join-the-discussion)
6. [Delegate to a sub-reviewer](#6-delegate-a-review-optional) (if enabled)

Everything happens on one page: click **Reviews** in the sidebar to see your invitations and reviews across all conferences, organized into **Awaiting Response**, **To Review**, **Completed**, and **Declined** tabs.

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/review-assignment/reviews-page.png" alt="The Reviews page with Awaiting Response, To Review, Completed, and Declined tabs" width="800" />

### 1. Respond to the Invitation

Track chairs invite you by email. The invitation names the conference and track — click the link to accept or decline (creating a PaperFox account first if you don't have one). Respond promptly either way: a quick decline lets the chair find another reviewer. See [Managing Invitations](/docs/users/managing-invitations).

Before accepting, check that the conference matches your expertise and that you have time for the review period.

### 2. Complete Your Research Profile

Add your expertise keywords in your [Research Profile](/docs/users/research-profile) — chairs use them to match submissions to you, so a complete profile means assignments you're actually qualified to review. Also [declare any conflicts of interest](/docs/users/conflicts) so conflicted submissions are never assigned to you.

### 3. Respond to Submission Assignments

When a chair assigns you a submission, it appears under **Awaiting Response** on the **Reviews** page (and you're notified by email). Expand the row to read the abstract, then **Accept** or **Decline**. Decline promptly if the submission is outside your expertise, you can't meet the deadline, or you have an undeclared conflict with the authors. See [Manage Your Reviews](/docs/reviewers/manage-assignments).

### 4. Write and Submit Your Reviews

Accepted submissions wait under **To Review**. Click **"Write Review"** to open the review editor: submission details and the PDF on the left, the review form on the right. The form's fields — ratings, comment boxes, optional file upload — are configured by the track chair, and on multi-phase tracks a **Phase** badge shows which review phase you're writing for.

Save your work as a **draft** anytime (drafts are private to you and sync across devices), and submit before the deadline. See [Write and Update Reviews](/docs/reviewers/write-review).

Whether you can see the authors' names depends on the track's review type: **double-blind** (identities hidden both ways), **single-blind** (you see authors; they don't see you), or **open** (both visible).

### 5. Update a Review or Join the Discussion

Submitted reviews move to **Completed** and can be revised until decisions are finalized — open the review, click **"Update Review"**, and optionally add a revision note for the chairs. Each update is versioned in the review history. Chairs may also contact you to clarify your review or discuss submissions where reviewers disagree — engage with other perspectives, explain your reasoning, and adjust your assessment if you're persuaded.

If the track enables author responses (rebuttal), the authors' response to **your** review appears in a **Responses** thread directly under **My Review** on your review page, and you can reply in the thread anytime — the response deadline binds only the authors:

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/reviewer-workflow/reviewer-responses.png" alt="The Responses thread under My Review — the anonymized author response, the reviewer's reply with edit and delete buttons, and a committee-only note marked with the Hidden from authors badge" width="600" />

If the chairs released an AI review to you, it appears as an **AI Review** card with its own thread, where you can read the authors' reaction to the AI-raised points:

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/reviewer-workflow/reviewer-ai-responses.png" alt="The AI Review card on the reviewer's page with its attached Responses thread showing the authors' reply to the AI-flagged issue" width="600" />

- On double-blind tracks, author responses appear as **"Authors"**, and authors see you as **"Reviewer #N"** — matching your review's number, so don't reveal your identity in a response.
- **"Hide from authors"** keeps a note between you, the editors, and the chairs. In the general **Discussion** section it is **on by default**, so committee notes stay private unless you clear it; in a response thread under a review it starts off, because that thread is your conversation with the authors. The **ⓘ** next to it explains exactly who sees the note.
- You can edit or delete your own responses: an edit shows an **"Edited"** marker (the committee can view earlier versions), and a deletion leaves a note in the thread.
- A **Discussion** section lower on the page carries conversation that isn't about one review.
- The typical loop: read the response, reply, then **update your review** if it changed your assessment.

### 6. Delegate a Review (Optional)

If the track allows sub-reviewers and you can't complete an assignment yourself, you can delegate it to a qualified colleague and stay responsible for the result. See [Delegate a Review](/docs/reviewers/delegate-review).

---

## Review Guidelines

### What to Evaluate

- **Technical quality** — Is the methodology sound? Are the conclusions supported by the evidence? Could the work be reproduced?
- **Novelty and significance** — What is new here, and how much does it advance the field?
- **Clarity** — Is the submission well-organized and understandable, with readable figures and tables?
- **Fit** — Does the work match the track's scope, and will the audience find it valuable?

### Writing a Good Review

Structure your comments as a brief **summary** of the contribution (showing you understood the work), followed by specific **strengths** and **weaknesses**, then detailed suggestions.

- **Be constructive** — focus on how to improve the work; suggest fixes, not just faults
- **Be specific** — point to sections, figures, or claims; explain the reasoning behind each criticism
- **Be balanced** — acknowledge what's good even in a submission you recommend rejecting
- **Be professional** — critique the work, never the authors; in double-blind review, don't reveal your identity in your comments

Allow a few focused hours per submission, and start early enough to submit before the deadline. If you're falling behind, tell the track chair rather than going silent.

### Ethics

- **Confidentiality** — never share or discuss a submission outside the review process, and don't use its ideas in your own work before publication
- **Conflicts of interest** — decline (or report to the chair) any submission by a recent collaborator, colleague at your institution, or anyone you can't judge objectively; see [Managing Conflicts of Interest](/docs/users/conflicts)
- **Fairness** — judge the work on its merits alone

---

*Ready to begin? Check [Reviews](https://www.paperfox.ai/reviews) for pending invitations and submissions waiting on your review.*

---

# Write and Update Reviews

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/reviewers/write-review
Description: How to write, submit, and revise your reviews in PaperFox

## Finding Your Reviews to Write

1. In the sidebar, click **Reviews**
2. The **To Review** tab shows accepted submissions waiting for your review, grouped by conference and track. On tracks with multiple review phases each row is labeled with its phase; on single-phase tracks the row simply reads **Review**
3. Click **"Write Review"** to open the review editor. If you've already saved a draft, the button shows **"Continue Draft"** instead

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/my-reviews-pending.png" alt="Reviews page To Review tab showing a submission card with the Write Review button" width="800" />

---

## Writing a Review

The review page has a two-column layout:

- **Left column** — Submission details: title, abstract, keywords, and a link to view the submitted PDF
- **Right column** — The review form configured by the track chair. On multi-phase tracks its header carries a **Phase** badge (for example, **Phase: Submission**) showing which review phase you're writing for

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/assignment-detail.png" alt="Review page with submission details on the left and the review form with its phase badge on the right" width="800" />

1. Read the submission by clicking **"View PDF"** in the submission details
2. Fill in all required fields (marked with a red asterisk):
   - **Rating fields** — Select a value from each dropdown (e.g., Overall Evaluation, Reviewer Confidence)
   - **Text fields** — Enter your comments (e.g., Comments for Authors, Confidential Comments for Chairs)
   - **File upload** — Drag and drop a PDF or click **"Choose File"** (optional, depending on the form)
3. Click **"Submit Review"** at the bottom of the form

<Callout type="info" title="Reviewing a revision round">
On tracks with multiple review phases, the submission panel tells you whether the authors have updated the submission for your round, and submitting asks you to confirm when they haven't. See [Reviewing a Later Round](#reviewing-a-later-round) below.
</Callout>

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/review-form-bottom.png" alt="Bottom of the review form showing the rating and comment fields with the Save as Draft and Submit Review buttons" width="800" />

<Callout type="warning" title="File uploads">
If you attach a file, wait for the upload to finish before clicking submit. The form will block submission while files are still uploading.
</Callout>

---

## Saving a Draft

If you aren't ready to submit, click **"Save as Draft"** to store your in-progress review on the server. Drafts sync across devices — you can save on your laptop and finish on another machine later.

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/save-draft.png" alt="Review form footer showing the Draft saved indicator next to the Save as Draft and Submit Review buttons" width="800" />

Drafts are private to you. Chairs and other reviewers cannot see draft content — only submitted reviews are visible to them.

**Resuming a draft:**

1. Go to **Reviews**, on the **To Review** tab
2. Submissions with a saved draft show a **"Continue Draft"** button
3. Click **"Continue Draft"** to reopen the form with your data restored

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/continue-draft.png" alt="Reviews To Review tab showing a Continue Draft button on a submission with a saved draft" width="800" />

When you're done, click **"Submit Review"** to finalize. The draft becomes a submitted review and it moves to the **Completed** tab.

<Callout type="info" title="Unsaved changes protection">
If you try to navigate away with unsaved changes, a dialog offers to save them as a draft before leaving, so your work isn't lost.
</Callout>

---

## Reviewing a Later Round

When a submission reaches a revision or camera-ready round, PaperFox tells you at the top of the submission panel whether the authors actually submitted anything new for that round:

- **"Revised for this round"** — a new version landed, with the date it arrived.
- **"No revision has been submitted for this round"** — you're reading the version from the previous round. If you reviewed this submission before, the notice says so.

Chairs often assign the next round's reviewers before the authors have finished revising, so the second notice is common and does not mean anything is wrong.

If you click **"Submit Review"** while that notice is showing, PaperFox asks you to confirm first:

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/unrevised-confirm.png" alt="Confirmation dialog reading The Authors Haven't Submitted a Revision Yet, with Go Back and Submit Review buttons, over a review form showing the amber no-revision notice" width="800" />

- **Reading the submission for the first time this round?** Click **"Submit Review"** — reviewing the current text is exactly what you were asked to do.
- **Waiting for the authors' revision?** Choose **"Go Back"** and click **"Save as Draft"** instead. You can finish once the new version arrives — a submitted review cannot be withdrawn.

Either way, the authors are never blocked from submitting their revision, even if reviews have already come in for the round.

---

## Missing the Review Deadline

If a review's deadline passes before you submit, the **To Review** row shows an amber **Past due** marker, and a banner at the top of the review page tells you where you stand:

- **"The review deadline passed ⟨date⟩ — you can still submit your review."** — the chairs accept late reviews for this phase; finish and submit as usual.
- **"Review submissions are closed for this phase."** — the chairs enforce the deadline, so **"Submit Review"** is disabled. Contact the chairs if you still need to submit; they can reopen it.

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/deadline-closed.png" alt="Review page with an amber banner reading Review submissions are closed for this phase, naming the deadline that passed" width="800" />

Either way, **"Save as Draft" always works** — a deadline never blocks saving, so work you've already typed is never lost.

---

## Viewing a Submitted Review

After submitting, you are redirected to the review view page. On multi-phase tracks the **My Review** card shows a **Phase** badge in its header (for example, **Phase: Submission**) — helpful when you review the same submission in more than one phase. The page shows:

- **Submission Details** — The submission information (authors are hidden in double-blind reviews); use **"Hide Submission"** in the page header to give the review column the full width
- **My Review** — Your submitted ratings, comments, and status
- **Other Reviews** — On tracks where the chairs share reviews between reviewers, the other reviewers' submitted reviews appear here once your own review is in, labeled **"Reviewer #1"**, **"Reviewer #2"**, and so on
- **AI Review** — If the chairs shared the submission's AI-generated review with you, it appears as its own card with an AI disclaimer; it is a supplement, not a human review
- **Review History** — Previous versions if you've updated your review

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/review-view.png" alt="Review view page with submission details and the My Review card showing the phase badge and Update Review button" width="800" />

You can also reach this page from the **Completed** tab on **Reviews**.

---

## Updating a Review

To revise a submitted review:

1. Open the review from the **Reviews → Completed** tab, or from the review view page
2. Click **"Update Review"**
3. Edit any fields you want to change
4. Optionally, add a **Revision Note** describing what changed — this helps track chairs understand the update
5. Click **"Update Review"** to save

<img src="/docs/assets/reviewer/write-review/edit-review-revision.png" alt="Edit review page showing the Revision Note field highlighted" width="800" />

Each update creates a new version visible in the Review History section.

---

# Senior Editor Workflow

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/senior-editors/senior-editor-workflow
Description: Guide for Senior Editors to manage submission assignments and distribute to Associate Editors

This guide outlines the workflow for Senior Editors who manage submission assignments in a hierarchical review structure.


## Senior Editor Workflow

### 1. Receive Submission Assignments
Track Chairs assign submissions to you through the SE Assignments page. Assigned submissions appear in your SE Console.

### 2. Access the SE Console
View your assigned submissions from the conference dashboard.


### 3. Assign Submissions to Associate Editors
Distribute submissions to Associate Editors for reviewer management.
- Select an Associate Editor from the dropdown for each submission
- The AE will then manage reviewer assignments for that submission

### 4. Monitor Review Progress
Track the status of submissions you've distributed.
- View review completion status for each submission
- See which AE is handling each submission

### 5. Write Meta Reviews
Provide summary evaluations for submissions after reviews are complete.
- Synthesize reviewer feedback into a consolidated assessment
- Make recommendations based on all reviews

---

# Account Settings

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/users/account-settings
Description: Manage your PaperFox account settings

To access your account settings, click your name at the bottom-left of the sidebar and select **Settings**.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/access-setting.png" alt="Access Settings" width="800" />

## Profile

First, you can update your personal information and profile picture.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/edit-profile.png" alt="Edit Profile" width="800" />

**What you can edit:**
- **Display Name** - Your public name shown across PaperFox
- **First Name** and **Last Name** - Your legal name
- **Affiliation** - Your organization or institution
- **Country** - Your location
- **Profile Picture** - Upload and crop your avatar

**To update your profile:**
1. Go to Settings → Profile
2. Edit the fields you want to change
3. Click **"Update profile"**

## Email Addresses

You can link multiple verified email addresses to one PaperFox account — useful when you want invitations sent to either your institutional or personal address to land on the same dashboard. Manage them at **Settings → Emails**.

See [Managing Your Email Addresses](/docs/users/email-addresses) for the full guide — adding, verifying, switching your primary, and how invitations resolve across all your addresses.

## Password

Next, you can change your account password to keep your account secure.

**To update your password:**
1. Go to Settings → Password
2. Enter your current password
3. Enter your new password
4. Confirm your new password
5. Click **Update Password**

## Billing & Payments

Additionally, you can manage your payment methods and view billing history. This section shows all your payments including conference fees (when you're a chair managing submissions over the free limit) and AI credit purchases.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/billing.png" alt="Billing & Payments" width="800" />

**What you can do:**
- Add or update payment methods
- View past invoices and transactions for all services
- Manage your subscription
- See charges for conference submissions (if you're a chair - [learn more about submission billing](/docs/chairs/submission-billing))
- View AI credit purchase history

## Credit History

Furthermore, you can view your credit balance and transaction history.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/credit-history.png" alt="Credit History" width="800" />

**What you can see:**
- Current credit balance
- Credit usage for each action (AI reviews, submissions, etc.)
- Credit purchase history
- Credit expiration dates

## Site Requests

If you need a custom conference site, you can request one for your organization. Learn more about [how to request a conference site](/docs/chairs/request-conference-site).

**What you can do:**
- Submit new site requests
- Track the status of your requests (pending, approved, or rejected)
- View approved sites
- Withdraw pending requests if your request is not approved yet

## Payouts

Finally, you can connect your bank account to receive payouts from conference fees.

---

# Managing Conflicts of Interest

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/users/conflicts
Description: Declare and view conflicts of interest to ensure fair review assignments

Your conflict of interest (COI) list ensures you won't be assigned to review submissions from collaborators, advisors, or co-authors.

Go to **Settings** in the sidebar, then click **Conflicts**.

## COI Rules

PaperFox checks these rules when assigning reviewers to submissions. Three **block** the assignment; one is a **warning** the chair can override:

| Rule | What It Checks | Effect |
|------|---------------|--------|
| **Self-conflict** | You are listed as an author on the submission | Blocks |
| **Co-author conflict** | You co-authored another submission with one of the authors in the last 3 years | Blocks |
| **Declared conflict** | You manually declared a conflict with one of the authors (see below) | Blocks |
| **Same institution** | You share an institution with one of the authors | Warns — the chair is notified but can still assign you |

The three blocking rules match on **name and email**; the same-institution warning matches on **affiliation** (see [How Matching Works](#how-matching-works)).

<Callout type="info" title="Keep your affiliation current">
The same-institution warning relies on the affiliation in your profile. Keep it up to date under **Settings → Profile** so chairs see accurate warnings.
</Callout>

## Declared Conflicts

Click **"Add Conflict"** to declare someone whose submissions you should not review — for example, your PhD advisor, a close collaborator, or a co-author from outside PaperFox.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/COI/add-conflict.png" alt="Add Conflict dialog with user search" width="800" />

Type a name to search existing PaperFox users. Selecting a user auto-fills their email and affiliation. You can also enter details manually for people not on PaperFox.

## System-Detected Co-author Conflicts

PaperFox automatically identifies your co-authors from submission submissions on the platform. These appear under **System-Detected Conflicts** and update whenever a submission listing you as co-author is submitted.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/COI/system-detected.png" alt="System-detected co-author conflicts" width="800" />

System-detected conflicts show the co-author's name, email, and affiliation. Click **Collaboration History** to see which submissions you co-authored together.

<Callout type="info" title="3-year window">
Only co-authorships from the last 3 years are shown. Older collaborations are not considered active conflicts.
</Callout>

## How Matching Works

The self-conflict, co-author, and declared rules compare a conflict entry against submission authors by **name and email**:

- **Name match** — the conflict's name appears as a substring of the author's full name (case-insensitive)
- **Email match** — the conflict's email exactly equals the author's email (case-insensitive)

A match on **either** name or email is enough to block the assignment.

The **same-institution** warning compares affiliations instead:

- **Organization match** — when your affiliation and an author's affiliation are recognized as the same organization (PaperFox matches both to the same [ROR](https://ror.org) record, so "MIT" and "Massachusetts Institute of Technology" count as the same place)
- **Affiliation name match** — otherwise, the two affiliation names must be identical after ignoring case, spacing, and punctuation

This is intentionally strict: it won't treat "MIT" and "MIT Media Lab" as the same institution unless they're matched to the same organization. A missed match is safer than a noisy false warning.

## For Track Chairs

COI is checked on all assignment paths — auto assign, manual drag-and-drop, and bulk save. Self-conflict, co-author, and declared conflicts block the assignment; a same-institution match is a warning the chair can override.

See the [Track Chair COI Guide](/docs/track-chairs/conflicts) for details on enforcement across assignment paths and how to encourage reviewers to declare conflicts.

---

# Managing Your Email Addresses

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/users/email-addresses
Description: Link multiple verified email addresses to one PaperFox account so you can sign in with any of them and never miss an invitation sent to the wrong inbox

## Overview

You have **one PaperFox account** but can link **multiple verified email addresses** to it — for example, your institutional and personal email together. Any verified address can sign you in, and invitations sent to any of them land on the same account.

Manage your linked addresses at **Settings → Emails**.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/account-settings/emails-page.png" alt="Email Addresses settings page" width="800" />

## When You'd Want More Than One Email

- **Institutional + personal.** You sign up with your university email, but a colleague invites you to review under your gmail. Add both — either lands on this account.
- **Changing institutions.** You're moving from one university to another. Add the new address now, and any invitation chairs send under the old address still reaches you while you transition.
- **Multiple roles, multiple inboxes.** You're a chair under one address and a reviewer under another. One PaperFox account, two inboxes — no juggling separate logins.
- **You missed an invitation that went to the wrong inbox.** Add that address as an alias, and any future invitation to it (including ones still pending) resolves to this account.

## Adding an Email Address

1. Go to **Settings → Emails**
2. Type the new address into the **Add Email Address** field
3. Click **"Add Email"** — a verification link is sent to that inbox

The new address appears in your list immediately with a **Pending verification** badge:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/email-addresses/emails-pending.png" alt="Email Addresses page showing a pending verification badge" width="800" />

4. Open the verification email from the new inbox and click the link
5. The badge changes to **Verified** — the address can now sign you in

The verification link expires in 24 hours. If it expires, just add the address again from the same page to send a fresh link.

## Signing In with Any Verified Email

Once an address is verified, you can sign in with it on the **Sign In** page using your existing password — no separate account or password to remember. The session shows your **primary** email at the top of the sidebar regardless of which address you used to sign in.

## Invitations Land on Your Account No Matter Which Address

This is the core benefit. When a chair invites you to review, chair, or moderate, they invite by *email*. If they use any of your verified addresses, the invitation appears on your dashboard automatically.

You don't have to tell every chair which address you prefer — add your common addresses once, and PaperFox routes incoming invitations to the right account on its own.

## Setting Your Primary Email

Your **primary** email is the address shown on your profile and where PaperFox sends notifications (review reminders, decision letters, password resets, etc.). To switch:

1. Verify the address first (add it and click the verification link if you haven't already)
2. Click **"Set primary"** next to the verified address

Your previous primary stays on the account as a **verified secondary** so any pending invitations or co-authorship under that address still resolve to you. Past submissions, reviews, and registrations are unaffected — they're tied to your account, not to a specific address.

<Callout type="info" title="Notifications go to your primary only">
  PaperFox sends notifications to your primary email address only — we don't double-email the same person at multiple addresses. Sign-in, invitations, and author matching work across **all** your verified addresses, but outbound notifications target the primary.
</Callout>

## Removing an Email

Click the trash icon next to any non-primary address to remove it. The primary address cannot be removed directly — if you want to retire your current primary, switch primary to a different verified address first, then remove the old one.

Removing an email means:
- That address can no longer sign you in
- New invitations sent to it will not resolve to this account (they'll either bounce, or — if a different account has it — go there)
- Past submissions, reviews, and registrations are unaffected

## Merging Two Accounts

If you end up with two separate PaperFox accounts — for example, you signed up with your gmail address years ago and forgot, then a conference chair later invited you under your institutional email and a new account was auto-created — you can merge them into one.

The flow lives at **Settings → Emails**: add the other account's address as you would any new email. When PaperFox detects the address belongs to a separate account, you'll be offered a **Claim from your other account** option.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/email-addresses/merge-conflict-cta.png" alt="Email Addresses page showing the 'Email already in use' dialog with a Claim from your other account button" width="800" />

A verification email goes to the other address, and clicking the link in that inbox brings you to a confirmation page summarizing what will move:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/email-addresses/merge-preview.png" alt="Merge confirmation page showing which account is being absorbed, what records will move, and the Confirm merge button" width="800" />

Click **"Confirm merge"** to run the merge — the other account is absorbed into your current one and its address is added as a verified secondary.

### What Moves to the Surviving Account

All of the absorbed account's PaperFox history follows you to the surviving account:

- Submissions you authored or submitted
- Reviews you wrote (and their version history)
- Conference, track, reviewer, AE, and SE memberships
- Registrations (except where they conflict — see below)
- Pending and accepted invitations
- Activity log entries and audit trail
- AI conversations and credit-history transactions
- All verified email addresses (added to the surviving account as aliases)

After the merge, the surviving account is your only account. You sign in with its credentials, and the absorbed account's addresses continue to receive new invitations on your behalf — same multi-email behavior as if you had added them as aliases all along.

### What Doesn't Carry Over

A few things from the absorbed account are dropped — the surviving account's versions are the canonical ones:

- **Profile fields** — name, affiliation, country, image. The surviving account's profile stays as-is. If you'd rather use the absorbed account's name or affiliation, update your profile after the merge.
- **Password from the absorbed account** — discarded. You sign in to the merged account with the surviving account's password (or magic link).
- **Credit balance from the absorbed account** — credit-history rows move over for audit, but the absorbed account's spendable balance does not add to the survivor's. If this matters, contact support before initiating the merge.
- **Active sessions and social logins on the absorbed account** — anyone signed in there is logged out. Google or other social sign-in bindings on the absorbed account are removed; you'd need to re-link them on the surviving account.

<Callout type="warning" title="Conflicts that block or trim the merge">
  A merge is **blocked** if both accounts have a paid registration in the same conference — one would need to be refunded or cancelled first. Duplicate role memberships are **silently de-duplicated** — for example, if both accounts are reviewers on the same track, the absorbed account's reviewer row is dropped and the surviving account's keeps the position.
</Callout>

### Removing a Merged-In Email

After a merge, the absorbed account's address lives on your account as a verified secondary. You *can* remove it like any other alias — but think twice, because it's the only remaining link between that address and your account.

When you click the trash icon next to a merged-in address, the confirmation dialog shows an extra warning:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/email-addresses/remove-merged-email-warning.png" alt="Remove email confirmation dialog showing an amber warning that the address was added through an account merge" width="800" />

Here's what removal does and doesn't touch:

- **Your history stays put.** Roles, submissions, reviews, and registrations that came over in the merge are tied to your account identity, not to the email — they're unaffected.
- **The address stops working.** You can no longer sign in with it.
- **Future invitations to it won't find you.** Because nothing links the address to your account anymore, an invitation a chair later sends to it won't resolve here — it would spin up a brand-new, separate account, re-splitting the identity you just consolidated.

To use the address again, you'd have to add it back from the **Add Email Address** field and verify it from scratch.

## Privacy and Security

- Only **verified** addresses (those where you clicked the verification link) can sign you in or resolve invitations. An unverified pending address is inert until verified.
- Adding an email sends a verification link only to that new address — your existing inboxes aren't notified.
- We rate-limit verification-email sends to prevent abuse (currently 5 per hour per account).
- If you suspect someone added an email without your permission, sign in and remove it from **Settings → Emails**, then change your password.

---

# Managing Invitations

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/users/managing-invitations
Description: View and respond to conference, track chair, and reviewer invitations

## Overview

When someone invites you to participate in a conference, you'll receive an email invitation and the invitation will appear in your PaperFox account. You can accept or decline any invitation.

## Accessing Your Invitations

**From Dashboard:**
- Go to `/dashboard` - pending invitations appear at the top
- Click "View Invitations" to see all invitations

**From Sidebar:**
- Click "My Invitations" in the left navigation menu

<img src="/docs/assets/user/find-my-invitation.png" alt="Find My Invitations" width="800" />

## Invitation Types

You may receive invitations for three roles:

- **Conference Chair** - Manage the entire conference
- **Track Chair** - Manage a specific track within a conference  
- **Reviewer** - Review submissions for a track

## Responding to Invitations

You can respond to invitations in two ways:

**From Email:**
You will receive a notification email with **Accept** and **Decline** buttons. Accepting takes you to a confirmation page where you sign in first — or create a PaperFox account if you don't have one yet — and then confirm the invitation.

If you're signed in to a different account than the one the invitation was sent to, the confirmation page offers to attach the invitation's email address to your current account, so you keep a single account.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/invitation-by-email.png" alt="Email Invitation" width="600" />

**From PaperFox Platform:**
<img src="/docs/assets/user/view-invitation.png" alt="View Invitations" width="600" />

**To Accept:**
- Click the blue **Accept Invitation** button (in email) or **Accept** button (in platform)
- Sign in (or create your account) if you aren't already signed in
- You'll gain access to the conference tools for your role

**To Decline:**
- Click the gray **Decline Invitation** button (in email) or **Decline** button (in platform)
- The invitation will be marked as declined
- No PaperFox account will be created

## Invitation Status

- **Pending** - Awaiting your response
- **Accepted** - You've joined the conference in this role
- **Declined** - You've declined the invitation

All invitations remain in your history for future reference.

---

# Research Profile

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/users/research-profile
Description: Manage your research profile and expertise keywords used for submission-reviewer matching

Your research profile helps track chairs match you with submissions that fit your expertise. It combines three types of keywords to build a complete picture of your research areas.

## How It Works

When you're invited to review for a conference, PaperFox automatically runs **AI Profile Discovery** — it searches the web for your publications (Google Scholar, ORCID, Semantic Scholar, etc.) and extracts expertise keywords. You'll receive an email asking you to verify the results.

All your keywords are combined and used by the [Auto Assign Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/auto-assign-reviewers) feature to match you with relevant submissions.

## Access Your Research Profile

1. Click your profile icon in the top right corner
2. Select **Settings**
3. Click **Research Profile** in the sidebar

<img src="/docs/assets/user/research-profile/research-links.png" alt="Research Profile page showing verified status and research links" width="800" />

---

## Research Links

Add URLs to your academic profiles so track chairs can verify your expertise:

- **Google Scholar** — Your citation profile
- **ORCID** — Your researcher identifier
- **Semantic Scholar** — Your publication profile
- **ResearchGate** — Your research network profile
- **Personal Website** — Your academic homepage

These links are also used by AI Profile Discovery to find your publications more accurately.

---

## Three Types of Keywords

Your profile uses three types of keywords, each with a different source and color:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/research-profile/keyword-types.png" alt="System Keywords and Your Expertise Tags sections" width="800" />

### System Keywords (purple)

Automatically extracted from submissions you've submitted in PaperFox. These are **read-only** and update whenever your submissions change. You cannot edit them.

### Your Expertise Tags (green)

Keywords you add manually. You have full control — add, edit, or remove these anytime.

1. Type a keyword (e.g., "machine learning", "NLP")
2. Press **Enter** or click **"Add Tag"**
3. Click the **x** on any tag to remove it

### AI-Discovered Tags (blue)

Automatically discovered from your recent publications via web search. These are replaced each time you run AI Profile Discovery.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/research-profile/ai-tags-and-actions.png" alt="AI-Discovered Tags section with discovery button" width="800" />

You can remove individual AI tags by clicking the **x** on each one. Removed tags won't reappear until the next discovery run.

---

## Running AI Profile Discovery

To discover or refresh your AI tags:

1. Click **"AI Profile Discovery (10 credits)"** at the bottom of the page
2. Wait 30-90 seconds while the AI searches for your publications
3. Review the results and click **"Save Changes"**

<Callout type="info" title="Credits required">
  AI Profile Discovery costs 10 credits per run. When you're invited to review, the first discovery is run automatically at no cost to you.
</Callout>

If discovery doesn't find results (e.g., no public Google Scholar or ORCID profile), add your keywords manually using **Your Expertise Tags**.

---

## Save Your Profile

After making changes, click **"Save Changes"** (or **"Verify & Save"** if your profile hasn't been verified yet).

Your profile status shows:
- **Profile Verified** — Your profile is complete and active
- **Not Verified** — Review and save your profile to complete setup

---

# Signing In

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/users/signing-in
Description: Sign in to PaperFox with your password or a passwordless email link, and what to do when you forget your password or your email isn't verified

## Two Ways to Sign In

Go to [paperfox.ai/signin](https://www.paperfox.ai/signin) (or click **Sign In** from the top of any public page) to reach the sign-in form. You'll see two options.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/signing-in/signin-form.png" alt="Sign-in page with the Sign In with Password button highlighted, and a Sign In with Email Link option below" width="800" />

## Option 1: Password

1. Enter your **Email**
2. Enter your **Password** (click the eye icon to show what you typed)
3. Click **"Sign In with Password"**

You'll land on your dashboard.

## Option 2: Email Link (Passwordless)

If you'd rather not type a password — or you've forgotten it and don't want to reset right now — use the email link instead.

1. Click **"Sign In with Email Link"**
2. Enter your **Email**
3. Click **"Send Sign-In Link"**
4. Open the email PaperFox just sent and click the link inside

The link signs you in directly. It expires in 1 hour, and each link works only once.

## If You Forgot Your Password

Click **"Forgot password?"** below the password field. PaperFox emails you a reset link; clicking it opens a page where you set a new password.

## If Your Email Isn't Verified Yet

If you try to sign in before clicking the verification link from your sign-up email, the form shows a red warning and a **Resend verification email** button. Open the verification email, click the link, then return to the sign-in page and try again.

<Callout type="info" title="Sign in with any of your verified emails">
  You can sign in with **any** verified email address linked to your account, not just the one you originally signed up with. See [Managing Your Email Addresses](/docs/users/email-addresses) for how to add more.
</Callout>

## Don't Have an Account?

Click **"Sign up"** at the bottom of the sign-in form to create one. After signing up, you'll need to verify your email before you can sign in.

---

# Using the PaperFox App

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/users/using-mobile-app
Description: Browse conferences, save favorites, and manage your schedule

Access PaperFox on mobile, tablet, and desktop with full functionality across all devices.

## Download the App

Download the PaperFox mobile app for iOS or Android. There are three ways to download:

**Method 1: Scan QR Codes**

Scan the QR code to download the app directly:

iOS App Store:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/ios-qr-code.png" alt="iOS App Store QR Code" width="200" />

Android APK:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/android-qr-code.png" alt="Android APK QR Code" width="200" />

**Method 2: Search in App Store**

Search for "PaperFox.AI" in your app store:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/app-store.png" alt="Search PaperFox.AI in App Store" width="400" />

**Method 3: Click Download Buttons**

Visit our website and click the download buttons:

https://www.paperfox.ai/

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/download-button.jpeg" alt="Download PaperFox App" width="400" />



## Sign In

Sign in to access your personalized dashboard, save conferences, and manage your schedule. You can browse public conferences without signing in.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/sign-in.PNG" alt="Sign In" width="400" />

After signing in, you'll see your personalized dashboard:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/dashboard.png" alt="Dashboard" width="400" />

## Browsing Conferences

Browse conferences without signing in, or sign in to save favorites and access additional features. The **All Conferences** tab shows conferences whose organizers have enabled mobile app listing — if you can't find a conference, ask its organizers to turn on [mobile app listing](/docs/chairs/list-in-mobile-app). Conferences where you have a role always appear under **My Conferences**, regardless of listing.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/browse-without-signin.PNG" alt="Browse Without Sign In" width="400" />


Access your conferences through two organized tabs:

**Involved**
- Conferences where you have a role (chair, track chair, reviewer, author)

**Saved**
- Click the star icon on any conference to save it
- Access saved conferences from this tab
- Click the star again to remove

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/my-conference.PNG" alt="My Conferences" width="400" />
<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/saved-conference.PNG" alt="Saved Conferences" width="400" />

## Conference Details

Each conference page displays:
- Basic information and dates
- Published program schedule
- Forum discussions (when enabled)

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/conference-detail.PNG" alt="Conference Details" width="400" />

## Conference Programs

View published schedules organized by day and session:
- Session times and locations
- Program items with presenters and authors
- Click the star icon to save items to your personal schedule

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/view-program.PNG" alt="View Program" width="400" />

## My Schedule

Build your personal conference schedule:

1. View any conference program
2. Click the star icon on sessions you want to attend
3. Access "My Schedule" to view all saved items
4. Toggle between "Upcoming" and "Past" conferences
5. Click the star again to remove items

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/my-schedule.png" alt="My Schedule" width="400" />

## Forums

Participate in conference discussions when forums are enabled:

1. Navigate to the conference forum tab
2. Browse existing threads and pinned posts
3. Click "New Post" to start a discussion (requires sign-in)
4. Reply to posts using the text editor

<img src="/docs/assets/user/apps/view-forum.PNG" alt="Forum Discussions" width="400" />

---

# Run AI Content Detection

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/ai-content-detection
Description: Screen submissions for AI-generated text with external AI services, paid in credits

**AI Content Detection**, powered by **Pangram AI Detection**, scores how much of each submission's text looks AI-generated — a screening signal for a track's submissions. (Looking for AI-generated technical *reviews* of submissions instead? That's [AI Review](/docs/track-chairs/ai-review).)

<Callout type="warning" title="Submissions are sent to an external provider">
Unlike [compliance checks](/docs/track-chairs/compliance-check), which run entirely inside PaperFox, detection sends each submission's extracted text to Pangram for analysis. No author information is ever included — text only.
</Callout>

## How It Works

1. **Confirm the charge** — The confirmation dialog shows the estimated cost before anything runs
2. **Run in the background** — PaperFox extracts each submission's text and sends it to Pangram
3. **Review results** — Per-submission verdicts, composition scores, and in-app evidence showing the flagged passages

---

## Credits and Pricing

Detection costs **20 credits per 1,000 words**, pay-as-you-go: each submission is charged from its actual length as it's analyzed — a typical 9,000-word submission costs about 180 credits, a short submission costs less.

- The service card shows the rate; the confirmation dialog shows the estimated cost — an exact per-submission figure from the submission's measured word count for a single-submission run, an approximate total for Run All
- Submissions are charged **one at a time, as each is analyzed** — you're never charged for a submission that wasn't analyzed
- **Unchanged submissions are free** — if a submission's text is identical to a previous run, the earlier result is reused at no charge. A submission whose current text already has a result can't be re-run at all (its **Re-run** button is disabled — there's nothing new to analyze)
- If your balance runs out mid-run, analysis **stops automatically** — already-analyzed submissions keep their results, the rest are marked "insufficient credits," and running again after a top-up picks up exactly where it stopped (the analyzed submissions reuse for free)
- Submissions that fail on the provider's side after being charged are **refunded automatically**
- Starting a run requires enough balance for at least one typical submission

---

## Running Detection

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Navigate to your track and under **Submission Management**, click **"AI Content Detection"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-content-detection/track-page-ai-services.png" alt="Track page Submission Management section with the AI Content Detection button highlighted" width="800" />

3. Click **"Run All"** on the service card — or click **"Run"** / **"Re-run"** on any individual submission's row to analyze just that submission

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-content-detection/ai-services-page.png" alt="AI Content Detection page showing the Pangram AI Detection card with its per-word rate, the Run All button, and the per-submission results list with verdicts and Re-run buttons" width="800" />

4. The confirmation dialog shows the estimated cost — an exact figure from the submission's measured word count for a single submission, an approximate total for Run All — and reminds you that submission text is sent to the external provider. Confirm to start

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-content-detection/confirm-dialog.png" alt="Confirmation dialog showing the exact estimated cost for one submission, the per-word rate, and the external data disclosure" width="800" />

The analysis runs in the background with a progress bar — a typical track finishes in under a minute. You can keep working or cancel the run; cancelling refunds any submissions that weren't analyzed, while submissions that already finished keep their results and their charges.

### Multiple File Fields

If your submission form has more than one file upload field (for example a manuscript plus an appendix), a **Submission field** selector appears above the service cards — pick which field's upload gets analyzed. Submissions without an upload in the selected field are skipped, never billed. Forms with a single file field need no configuration.

### Multi-Phase Tracks

If your track has more than one phase, a **Phase** selector appears above the service cards. The run analyzes each submission's latest version in the selected phase; submissions with no version in that phase are not included. Single-phase tracks hide the selector.

---

## Reviewing Results

The **Submissions** list on each service card shows every submission in scope with its latest result — single-submission re-runs simply refresh that submission's row. On large tracks, use the **search box** (title, author, or submission ID) and the **result filter** next to it (All / AI / Mixed / Human / Skipped / Not analyzed, with live counts) to narrow the list; the two combine. Verdicts:

| Verdict | Meaning |
|---------|---------|
| **AI** (red) | Most of the text looks AI-generated |
| **Mixed** / **AI-Assisted** (amber) | Parts of the text look AI-generated or AI-edited |
| **Human** (green) | The text looks human-written |

Each analyzed row also shows:

- **Composition bar** — how much of the text looks AI-generated (red), AI-assisted (amber), and human (green); hover for exact percentages
- **Evidence** — click the magnifier icon to see the full composition breakdown and the flagged passages
- **Version badge** — if the submission has been revised since the run, the row shows which version was analyzed so you know the result may be outdated
- **Skipped / Failed** — submissions without a PDF, with unreadable files, or stopped by an empty balance; failed-after-charge submissions are refunded automatically

### Viewing Evidence

Click the magnifier icon on any analyzed row to see the submission's full composition and exactly which passages were flagged, each with its own label, score, and confidence level. Long passages are collapsed — click **"Show full passage"** to expand:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-content-detection/evidence-sheet.png" alt="Evidence panel showing a submission's verdict, composition bar, and a collapsed flagged passage with its label, score, and confidence" width="800" />

Submissions with a **Human** verdict have no flagged passages — the evidence panel simply confirms nothing was flagged.

<Callout type="info" title="No public result pages">
PaperFox never requests shareable result links from the provider — a public link would expose the submission's text to anyone with the URL. All evidence stays inside PaperFox, visible to chairs only.
</Callout>

<Callout type="warning" title="Detection is a signal, not proof">
AI detectors have known false-positive risks — especially for non-native English writers. Treat scores as a screening signal that tells you where to look, and never make decisions on the score alone.
</Callout>

Re-running the service refreshes results for submissions that changed and reuses earlier results for submissions that didn't — you're only billed for what's actually re-analyzed. Only one run per service can be active on a track at a time.

---

# Run AI Review

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/ai-review
Description: Generate reviewer-style technical reports on a track's submissions, paid in credits

**AI Review** reads each submission the way a careful reviewer would — passage by passage, keeping a running summary of definitions, equations, and claims — and produces a technical report: an overall assessment plus a list of concrete issues (flawed logic, equation inconsistencies, undefined notation, unsupported claims), each anchored to a verbatim quote from the submission.

<Callout type="warning" title="Submissions are sent to an external provider">
PaperFox Reviewer2 sends each submission's extracted text to OpenAI — no author information, text only. Refine.ink receives the submission's PDF file. The confirmation dialog states exactly what leaves PaperFox before every run.
</Callout>

## Choose a Provider and Model

Two providers are available. **PaperFox Reviewer2** runs the same review process on your choice of three OpenAI models — pick per run based on how deep you need the review to be. **Refine.ink** is a specialist vendor with a single flat-rate review:

| Provider | Model | Cost | Typical 9,000-word submission |
|----------|-------|------|--------------------------|
| **PaperFox Reviewer2** | Fast — GPT-5.6 Luna | 15 credits per 1,000 words | ~135 credits |
| **PaperFox Reviewer2** | Standard — GPT-5.6 Terra | 35 credits per 1,000 words | ~315 credits |
| **PaperFox Reviewer2** | Premium — GPT-5.6 Sol | 70 credits per 1,000 words | ~630 credits |
| **Refine.ink** | — | 18,000 credits per submission (flat) | 18,000 credits |

**Refine.ink** is a separate specialist vendor at a premium price point — a proofreading-grade review service. Unlike Reviewer2 (which sends extracted text to OpenAI), it uploads the **submission's PDF file** to refine.ink for analysis. Its reports appear, share, and bill exactly like the other review services.

Every option is **pay-as-you-go**: submissions are charged one at a time, failed submissions are refunded automatically, and a run stops safely if your balance runs out. Enabling [Reference Check](#reference-check) adds a small per-submission surcharge based on the length of the submission's references section.

Unlike detection, **every run produces — and is charged for — a fresh review, even on unchanged submissions**. Reviews aren't deterministic: running the same model twice gives you two different reports, and both are kept. Use this deliberately — a second opinion from the same model, or a Premium pass over submissions Fast flagged.

<Callout type="info" title="Reviews take a few minutes per submission">
Unlike detection (seconds per submission), a review makes many AI passes over each submission — expect several minutes per submission. The run continues in the background; you'll get an email when it finishes.
</Callout>

---

## Running a Review

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Navigate to your track and under **Submission Management**, click **"AI Review"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-review/track-page-ai-review.png" alt="Track page Submission Management section with the AI Review button highlighted" width="800" />

3. Pick a **Provider** from the dropdown — **PaperFox Reviewer2** or **Refine.ink**. With Reviewer2 selected, a **Model** dropdown picks Fast, Standard, or Premium. The card below shows the selection's rate and submission list — click **"Run All"**, or **"Run"** on an individual submission's row to review just that submission

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-review/ai-review-page.png" alt="AI Review page with the Provider and Model dropdowns above a single service card showing the per-word rate, Run All button, and per-submission list — one submission's run history expanded with the Shared version marker and Set as Shared actions" width="800" />

4. The confirmation dialog shows the estimated cost and the external-data disclosure. Confirm to start

Multi-phase tracks and forms with several file fields get the same **Phase** and **Submission field** selectors as detection — see [AI Content Detection](/docs/track-chairs/ai-content-detection#multiple-file-fields).

---

## Reading the Report

Every run of a submission is listed under its row with the provider, model, date, and a verdict badge — **No Issues** (green), or the issue count (amber, red at 10+). The **Shared version** marker shows which run the submission would share (the latest, by default); click **Set as Shared** on another run to share that version instead — see [Sharing](#the-share-ai-reviews-page) below for who sees it. Click a run's magnifier icon to open its full report:

- **Overall Assessment** — a reviewer-style summary of the submission's strengths and weaknesses
- **Issues** — each with a title, a tag (**technical**, **logical**, **suggestion**, or **reference** when [Reference Check](#reference-check) is on), the verbatim quote from the submission it refers to, and an explanation of what's wrong

Reports render the vendor's formatting — LaTeX math, tables, and emphasis all display properly, including inside quoted passages. The **copy** and **download** icons next to the verdict export the report as Markdown or plain text.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-review/review-report-sheet.png" alt="AI review report panel showing the issue-count verdict, provider, copy and download actions, and overall assessment with rendered formatting" width="600" />

Use the **result filter** above the submission list to focus on submissions with **Issues Found**, confirm the **No Issues** ones, or find submissions that were **Skipped / Failed**.

<Callout type="info" title="Reports stay inside PaperFox">
Reports are visible to chairs only — unless you share one with the submission's authors (below). The report itself never leaves PaperFox, and no author information is ever sent to a provider.
</Callout>

<Callout type="warning" title="An AI review is a signal, not a decision">
The model can misread notation, miss context, or flag something an expert would accept. Treat the report as a screening aid that tells you where to look — verify every flagged issue against the submission, and never make an accept/reject decision on the report alone.
</Callout>

Every review is kept — a submission's run list spans **all providers and models**, so you can run **Fast** across the whole track and **Premium** on just the borderline submissions, then compare all the reports side by side under each submission. The **result filter** above the list buckets submissions by the most recent run of the provider/model selected in the dropdowns.

---

## Reference Check

**Reference Check** verifies every entry in a submission's bibliography against the Crossref, OpenAlex, and arXiv databases to catch **hallucinated or inaccurate citations** — an increasingly common problem in AI-assisted writing. It's off by default; turning it on is a per-track setting that applies to all Reviewer2 models.

1. On the **AI Review** page, click **"Configure"** at the top right — this opens the **AI Review Settings** page
2. Turn on the **"Verify references"** switch and click **"Save Settings"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-review/ai-review-settings.png" alt="AI Review Settings page — Reference Check and Author Feedback switches on the left, the seven editable prompt blocks with Default pills on the right" width="800" />

When enabled, every review additionally extracts the submission's reference list and looks each entry up by DOI, arXiv ID, or title search. The lookups are plain database queries — no AI involved — so a citation can never be "hallucinated as verified". Each entry gets a status:

| Status | Meaning |
|--------|---------|
| **Verified** | Matched a database record — the link jumps straight to it |
| **Mismatch** | A record was found, but the cited metadata disagrees (wrong year, venue, or authors) |
| **Not Found** | No matching record in any database — a possible hallucinated citation |
| **Unverifiable** | Books, websites, and theses the databases don't cover — never flagged |
| **Ambiguous** | Close candidates but no confident match — never flagged |

The report gains a **Reference Check** section with the verdict counts and the full per-entry breakdown, each verified or mismatched entry linking its matched record so confirming a citation is one click. **Mismatch** and **Not Found** entries also appear as issues with a **reference** tag, and a free extra check flags in-text citations like `[41]` that point past the end of the bibliography:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-review/reference-check-results.png" alt="Reference Check section of an AI review report — per-entry list with Verified, Not Found, and Mismatch status badges, each matched entry linking its database record" width="600" />

Reference Check adds **15 credits per 1,000 words of the references section** (a typical bibliography is 1–2 units, so ~15–30 credits per submission) — the exact amount is shown in the run confirmation dialog. With it enabled, bibliography metadata (titles, authors, DOIs) is queried against the public Crossref, OpenAlex, and arXiv databases in addition to the submission text going to OpenAI.

<Callout type="warning" title="Not Found is a flag, not a verdict">
Database coverage has gaps — a very recent submission, a renamed venue, or an unusual citation format can show as **Not Found** without being fabricated. Verify flagged entries manually before raising them with authors.
</Callout>

---

## Customize Review Prompts

The **Prompts** section of the same **AI Review Settings** page lets you tailor what the reviewer looks for — for example, empirical-methodology criteria for a social-science track instead of the default math-and-logic focus. Seven building blocks are editable:

- **Reviewer Role** — the reviewer's role and mindset, the opener that leads every prompt
- **Check Criteria** — the list of issue types the reviewer flags in each passage
- **Explanation Style** — how each issue's explanation is written
- **Leniency Rules** — what the reviewer should tolerate and not flag
- **Do Not Flag** — the base list of things never to flag
- **Reference Match Criteria** / **Reference Leniency** — what counts as a citation mismatch, and which differences to forgive (used by Reference Check)

Each block starts collapsed with a **Default** or amber **Customized** pill — expand one to see the effective text prefilled and edit it. Customized blocks get a per-field **"Reset"**, and **"Reset All Prompts"** restores every block (the Reference Check and Author Feedback switches keep their state). Write `{currentDate}` anywhere to insert today's date at run time; any other curly braces — including LaTeX — pass through unchanged.

Settings are per-track, apply to **future runs only**, and affect the Reviewer2 models (not Refine.ink). Output formats can't be broken — only the review's criteria and tone change.

---

## The Share AI Reviews Page

Generating AI reviews and deciding who sees them are separate jobs, so they live on separate pages. The AI Review page only runs and reads them; all sharing happens on the **Share AI Reviews** page — click **"Share AI Reviews"** in the AI Review page's header.

The page lists every submission **with an AI review** — one row per paper, one column per audience:

- **Authors** — a switch per paper, plus a track-wide **"Share with Authors"** switch in the header
- **Reviewers** — a per-reviewer switch list (below), plus the paired track-wide **"Share with Reviewers"** switch

*Which* run a paper shares is decided on the AI Review page's run history — **latest** by default (a re-run automatically becomes the shared one), or the run you marked **Set as Shared**. One choice per paper; it drives what authors *and* released reviewers see.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-review/share-ai-reviews-page.png" alt="Share AI Reviews page — one row per paper with an Authors switch and a Reviewers shared count, with the Share with Authors and Share with Reviewers switches in the header" width="800" />

## Sharing with Authors

**Sharing takes effect immediately.** Authors see the report on their submission's reviews page as soon as you share it — an AI review is a supplement you grant per paper, not a human review, so it does not wait on releasing the phase's decisions and reviews. Your track's release settings still govern human reviews exactly as before; the two are independent.

1. **"Share with Authors"** shares every submission that **has an AI review** — the count beside it is out of the submissions *with AI reviews*, not the whole track: a track of 8 submissions where only 5 have been reviewed reads **3/5 shared**, never 3/8. Submissions reviewed later are not shared automatically; share them individually or flip the switch again
2. Turning the switch **off** unshares **everything**; the switch is on whenever at least one submission is shared
3. Each paper's own **Authors** switch shares or unshares just that submission

Authors see the report on their submission's reviews page, opening with the AI-generated disclaimer and presented like a human review — the same overall assessment and issue list you see, but **without** the verdict badge, provider, model, or run date, which stay chair-only. From that page's **Reviews** header, authors can copy or download all of their reviews — the shared AI review included — as one document. Reviewers don't see AI reviews unless you share one with them (below).

If your phase has [author responses](/docs/track-chairs/author-responses) enabled, the shared AI review card carries its own **Responses** thread — authors can react to the AI-raised points there, and reviewers you've released the report to read those responses in the same thread on their review page. You monitor every AI-review thread from the submission's management reviews page.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-review/author-ai-review-card.png" alt="The AI Review card as authors see it — the AI-generated disclaimer, overall assessment, issue list, and a single helpful/not-helpful rating for the whole report" width="600" />

---

## Sharing with Reviewers

You can also share a submission's AI review with its **reviewers** — all of them, or a specific one — for example as a supplementary opinion during discussion. The **Reviewers** column shows how many of each paper's reviewers the AI review is shared with:

1. Click the **"n/m shared"** count on the submission's row to expand its reviewer list
2. Toggle a reviewer on to share the AI review with just them, or **All reviewers** to cover the paper's whole panel; toggle off to take it back
3. **"Share with Reviewers"** in the header shares with every reviewer of every paper with an AI review at once; turning it off unshares everything

Two things to know before sharing with reviewers:

- **It's immediate**, like sharing with authors — a reviewer sees the AI review the moment you toggle them on, **even if they haven't submitted their own review yet**. If you're worried about anchoring, share only with reviewers whose reviews are already in.
- Reviewers see the same AI review authors would — the AI disclaimer and the issue list, without the chair-only verdict badge, provider, or model — as an **AI Review** card on their review page. It never counts toward the submission's reviews.

The shared AI review is the submission's **current** one: the run marked **Set as Shared** if you chose one, otherwise the latest. Re-running the submission updates what reviewers see, exactly as it does for authors.

When a review is shared, authors can rate the whole report as helpful or not helpful, with optional reason tags on a downvote (**Inaccurate**, **Too generic**, **Not actionable**, **Other**). Ratings are **visible to chairs only**, never to other authors, so authors can be candid.

Two switches on the **AI Review Settings** page control this per track:

| Switch | Default | What it does |
|--------|---------|--------------|
| **Let authors rate shared reviews** | On | One helpful/not-helpful rating per shared report |
| **Also rate each issue** | **Off** | Adds a rating under *every* issue in the report, on top of the report-level one |

Turn on **"Also rate each issue"** when you want to know *which* comments miss rather than just whether the report landed — it's what fills the **Most Downvoted Issues** list below. It's off by default because one verdict per report is enough for most tracks, and asking authors to rate a dozen issues each is a lot to ask. Turning off the parent switch disables both.

Click **"View Feedback Analytics"** next to that switch (or open **Analytics → AI Review Feedback** from the track dashboard) to see how the reviews land:

- **Helpful rate and total votes** — every percentage shows its raw counts; treat rates from only a few votes as anecdotes, not scores
- **Participation** — how many shared reviews received at least one vote; a low rate means the helpful rate reflects a small, self-selected sample
- **Downvote reasons** — the "why" behind negative votes
- **Most Downvoted Issues** (track view) — the specific AI comments authors rejected, the fastest way to understand how the reviewer fails in your track and what to change in [the prompts](#customize-review-prompts). This list only fills up on tracks with **"Also rate each issue"** turned on — without it there are no per-issue votes to rank

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/ai-review/feedback-analytics.png" alt="AI Review Feedback analytics — helpful rate, total votes, participation and shared-review tiles above the downvote reasons and the most-downvoted issues list" width="800" />

The conference-level view at **Analytics → AI Review Feedback** adds a per-track comparison, so multi-track conferences can see where AI reviews land well.

---

# Assign Submissions to Associate Editors

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/assign-associate-editors
Description: Guide for track chairs to assign submissions directly to Associate Editors

## Associate Editor Assignment

When your track uses Associate Editors without a Senior Editor level, you assign submissions directly to AEs who then manage reviewer assignments.

### Configure Committee Structure

1. Go to your conference dashboard
2. Navigate to your track
3. Click **Committee Settings**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/committee-setting.png" alt="Committee Settings" width="600" />

4. Under **Committee Structure**, select **Standard (with Associate Editors)**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-ae/committee-structure.png" alt="Committee Structure" width="600" />

5. Optionally select a **Terminology Preset** or customize role names (e.g., "Meta-Reviewer" instead of "Associate Editor")

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/role-name-change.png" alt="Role Name Customization" width="600" />

### Invite Associate Editors

After enabling the AE level:

1. Go back to Track Management
2. Click the **Associate Editors** button (or your custom name)

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-ae/associate-editor.png" alt="Associate Editors Button" width="600" />

3. Invite users to serve as Associate Editors

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-ae/invite-ae.png" alt="Invite Associate Editors" width="600" />

### Accessing AE Assignments

1. Go to your track management page
2. Click **Associate Editor Assignments**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-ae/ae-assignment.png" alt="Assign Submissions to AE" width="800" />

The AE Assignments page displays:
- All submissions in your track
- Available Associate Editors
- Current assignment status

### Assigning Submissions

1. Select submissions from the list
2. Choose an Associate Editor to assign
3. Confirm the assignment

Each submission can be assigned to one Associate Editor. The AE will then assign reviewers through their console.

### Assignment Settings

Configure assignment limits:

- **Submissions per AE** — Maximum submissions each Associate Editor can handle
- **AEs per submission** — Typically set to 1

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-ae/ae-assignment-dashboard.png" alt="AE Assignments Page" width="600" />


### After Assignment

Once assigned:
- Associate Editors see submissions in their AE Console
- AEs assign reviewers to their submissions
- AEs monitor review progress

---

# Manually Assign Reviewers

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/assign-reviewers
Description: Guide for track chairs to manually assign reviewers to submissions, set deadlines, and track progress

## Review Assignment Process

Track chairs are responsible for assigning submissions to reviewers to ensure thorough and fair evaluation of all submissions.

### 1. Accessing Review Assignments

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Under **Track Management**, select your track and click **"Manage Track"**
3. Under **Review Management**, click **"Review Assignments"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-assignment/review-assign.png" alt="Track Management page with the Review Assignments button highlighted" width="800" />

### 2. Phase Selection and Deadline Management

The bar above the assignment panels shows which phase you're managing and its review deadline:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-assignment/edit-phase-time.png" alt="Phase selector and review deadline bar on the Review Assignments page" width="800" />

- The page opens to the track's current phase — the furthest phase holding submissions; use the **Phase** dropdown to switch between review rounds, since assignments are managed per phase. The dropdown appears only when the track has multiple phases — single-phase tracks just show the deadline
- The current phase's review deadline appears on the right; click the edit icon next to it to adjust deadlines on the **Track Phases** page

### 3. Assignment Overview

The assignment interface displays:
- **Submissions list** - All submissions submitted to your track for the selected phase
- **Reviewer pool** - Available reviewers for your track
- **Assignment status** - Shows for each submission:
  - Number of reviewers currently assigned
  - Review completion status (Pending, Completed)
  - Reviewer names and their progress
- **Review requirements** - Number of reviews needed per submission

### 4. Conflict of Interest Enforcement

COI rules are enforced automatically — if you try to assign a reviewer who has a conflict with a submission's authors, the assignment will be blocked. Three rules are checked: self-conflict, co-author conflict, and declared conflict.

See [Conflict of Interest Enforcement](/docs/track-chairs/conflicts) for full details on how COI works across all assignment paths.

### 5. Assigning Reviewers to Submissions

1. **Select a submission** from the left panel to view its current assignments
2. **Assigned reviewers appear at the top** of the right panel, highlighted in blue with their assignment status (pending, accepted, or declined). Unassigned reviewers are listed below.
3. **Choose additional reviewers** from the list based on expertise and workload
4. **Confirm assignments** — COI conflicts are checked automatically

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-assignment/assignment-panel.png" alt="Review Assignments panel showing assigned reviewers sorted to top" width="800" />

#### Reactivating a Declined Reviewer

When a reviewer declines by mistake, you can return their invitation to **Pending** so they can accept or decline again — no need to re-invite from scratch.

1. **Select the submission** the reviewer declined
2. Find the reviewer in the **Assign Reviewers** panel — their row shows an **"Assignment declined"** badge with a **"Reset to Pending"** button
3. Click **"Reset to Pending"** and confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-assignment/reset-declined-panel.png" alt="A declined reviewer row in the Assign Reviewers panel with a highlighted Reset to Pending button" width="800" />

The invitation returns to that reviewer immediately, and they'll see it again on their **Reviews** page. To hand the slot to someone else instead, simply select a different reviewer.

You can also reset a declined assignment from the [Review Progress](/docs/track-chairs/review-progress#reactivating-a-declined-assignment) page — from either the By Submission matrix or the By Reviewer list.

### 6. Copying Reviewers into a Later Phase

For multi-phase tracks (for example a Revision or Camera-Ready round with its own reviews), you usually want the same reviewers who handled each submission in the previous phase. Instead of re-selecting them submission by submission:

1. Make sure the **Phase** dropdown is on the later phase — once you've moved submissions there it's already the current phase the page opens to
2. Select a submission — reviewers from the previous phase are marked with a **"Reviewed in [phase]"** badge and sorted near the top
3. Click **"Copy Reviewers"** in the toolbar

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-assignment/carry-over-reviewers.png" alt="Camera-Ready assignments page with the Copy Reviewers button highlighted and reviewers badged Reviewed in Submission" width="800" />

4. Review the summary and click **"Copy Reviewers"** to confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-assignment/carry-over-dialog.png" alt="Copy Reviewers confirmation dialog summarizing how many assignments will be created" width="800" />

The copy applies to **every submission in the phase at once**: each submission gets pending assignments for its own previous-phase reviewers. Reviewers who declined in the previous phase are not copied, existing assignments are unchanged, and submissions that already have a decision in this phase are skipped. You can still add or remove reviewers on any submission afterwards.

<Callout type="info" title="Reviewers only see their phase's version">
Each assignment is pinned to its phase. A reviewer assigned only in Phase 1 sees the submission as it was in Phase 1 — they never see revisions the authors upload in later phases. When you copy a reviewer into Phase 2, their new assignment shows the Phase 2 version, while their original Phase 1 review keeps showing the version they originally reviewed.
</Callout>

### 7. Managing Assignment Workload

**Balance Reviewer Load:**
- Monitor how many submissions each reviewer has been assigned
- Distribute assignments evenly across your reviewer pool
- Respect maximum submissions per reviewer limits set in track configuration

**Track Assignment Progress:**
- Review assignment completion status for all submissions
- Identify submissions that still need reviewer assignments
- Ensure all submissions meet the minimum review requirements


### 8. Notification Process

New assignments start as **Pending** — reviewers see them on their **Reviews** page, but no email is sent automatically. When you're done assigning:

1. Click **"Notify Reviewers"** in the toolbar
2. Review the pre-filled assignment notification and send it

This lets you finish (or adjust) all assignments first, then notify everyone once.

### 9. Review Progress

Click **"Review Progress"** to open a visual overview of review completion across all submissions — as a submission-by-reviewer matrix or a reviewer status list — with options to search, filter, export data, and send reminders.

See [Review Progress](/docs/track-chairs/review-progress) for full details.

---

# Assign Submissions to Senior Editors

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/assign-senior-editors
Description: Guide for track chairs to assign submissions to Senior Editors for management

## Senior Editor Assignment

When your track uses a hierarchical committee structure, you assign submissions to Senior Editors who then distribute them to Associate Editors.

### Configure Committee Structure

1. Go to your conference dashboard
2. Navigate to your track
3. Click **Committee Settings**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/committee-setting.png" alt="Committee Settings" width="600" />

4. Under **Committee Structure**, select **Full (with Senior Editors + Associate Editors)**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/committee-structure.png" alt="Committee Structure" width="600" />

5. Optionally select a **Terminology Preset** or customize role names (e.g., "Area Chair" instead of "Senior Editor")

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/role-name-change.png" alt="Role Name Customization" width="600" />

### Invite Senior Editors

After enabling the SE level:

1. Go back to Track Management
2. Click the **Senior Editors** button (or your custom name)

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/senior-editor.png" alt="Senior Editors Button" width="600" />

3. Invite users to serve as Senior Editors

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/invite-senior%20editor.png" alt="Invite Senior Editors" width="600" />

### Accessing SE Assignments

1. Go to your track management page
2. Click **Senior Editor Assignments**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/senior-editor-assignment.png" alt="SE Assignments Page" width="800" />

The SE Assignments page displays:
- All submissions in your track
- Available Senior Editors
- Current assignment status

### Assigning Submissions

1. Select submissions from the list
2. Choose a Senior Editor to assign
3. Confirm the assignment

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/assign-se/se-assignment.png" alt="Assign Submissions to SE" width="600" />

Each submission can be assigned to one Senior Editor. The SE will then distribute submissions to Associate Editors through their console.

### Assignment Settings

Configure assignment limits:

- **Submissions per SE** — Maximum submissions each Senior Editor can handle
- **SEs per submission** — Typically set to 1 for hierarchical workflows

### After Assignment

Once assigned:
- Senior Editors see submissions in their SE Console
- SEs distribute submissions to Associate Editors
- AEs assign reviewers and manage reviews

---

# Enable Author Responses

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/author-responses
Description: Let authors respond to reviews (rebuttal) and run a discussion between authors, reviewers, and chairs

Author responses add a rebuttal step to your review workflow: once you release results, authors can reply to **each review** in a response thread attached to that review's card, and reviewers, associate/senior editors, and chairs can respond in the thread. Reviewers can then update their reviews before you finalize decisions.

## How the Response Window Works

The window is controlled by two things — there is no separate "open" switch:

| Control | Where | Effect |
|---------|-------|--------|
| **Author Responses** toggle | Phase settings | Turns the feature on or off for that phase |
| **Response Deadline** (optional) | Phase settings | When authors' ability to post closes automatically |

Authors can post from the moment the phase's reviews are visible to them (see [Release Results](/docs/track-chairs/release-results)) until the deadline passes. If you don't set a deadline, the discussion stays open until you turn the toggle off. Reviewers and chairs are never bound by the window — they can comment anytime.

<Callout type="info" title="Extending or reopening">
To extend the response period, just move the deadline later — this works even after it has passed. To close early, set the deadline to now or turn the toggle off. Nothing is deleted when the window closes; the thread becomes read-only for authors.
</Callout>

## Enable It on a Phase

1. Navigate to your track and click **Settings** → **Phases**
2. Click **"Phase Settings"** on the phase card to expand it
3. Turn on **"Author Responses"**
4. Optionally set a **Response Deadline** and timezone (defaults to **Anywhere on Earth**)

Both save as soon as you change them — there is no Save button.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/author-responses/enable-author-responses.png" alt="Author Responses turned on in Phase Settings, with an optional Response Deadline and timezone" width="800" />

The collapsed **Phase Settings** summary reports the setting at a glance: **"Author responses until Mar 20, 2027"** when a deadline is set, **"Author responses on"** for an open-ended discussion, or **"Author responses off"**.

## Response Threads

Every review carries its own **Responses** thread, attached to the review's card wherever it renders — authors respond under each of their released reviews, the reviewer sees responses to their own review on their review page, and you see every thread on the management view with real names:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/author-responses/committee-responses.png" alt="A review card on the management view ending with its Responses thread — the author's response, the reviewer's reply, and a committee-only note marked with the amber Hidden from authors badge" width="800" />

A response is visible to whoever can see the review it answers — so on tracks where reviewers can't see each other's reviews, they also don't see each other's response threads. A shared AI review gets its own thread the same way (see [AI Review](/docs/track-chairs/ai-review)), and a general **Discussion** section remains on every page for conversation that isn't about one review.

**Committee-only notes**: reviewers, editors, and chairs can use **"Hide from authors"** when posting — the comment stays in the same thread but is hidden from authors, marked with an amber **"Hidden from authors"** badge. In the general **Discussion** section it is **checked by default** for committee members, so an internal note doesn't reach authors unless someone deliberately clears it; in a response thread under a review it starts unchecked, since that thread exists for talking *to* the authors. The **ⓘ** next to the checkbox spells out exactly who sees the note and how the poster's identity appears to authors under your track's blinding rules.

**Exports include the threads**: the copy/download buttons on the reviews pages append each review's responses to the exported document — the committee export marks hidden notes, the author-facing export never contains them.

## Edits, Deletion, and the Audit Trail

The discussion can feed your decisions, so it keeps a full audit trail — nothing disappears silently:

- **Edits**: everyone can edit their **own** comments (authors only while their response window is open — an edit after the deadline would be a backdoor revision). Edited comments show an **"Edited"** marker; click it to read the earlier versions. Edit history is visible to the committee and to the comment's own poster, never to authors.
- **Deletion**: a comment's poster can delete it, and you can delete any comment on your track (moderation). The comment's text is removed for everyone, but the thread keeps a note showing who removed it — **"removed by its author"** or **"removed by a chair"** — so the exchange stays coherent.
- **Chairs delete, never rewrite**: you cannot edit someone else's comment. If a comment is inappropriate or leaks a reviewer's identity, delete it and ask the poster to repost.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/author-responses/edit-history-dialog.png" alt="Edit History dialog on the management view showing an earlier version of an edited author comment" width="800" />

All posts, edits, and deletions are also recorded in the conference activity log.

## Who Sees What

Anonymity follows your track's review type, the same rules as the reviews themselves:

| Comment by | Authors see | Committee sees |
|-----------|-------------|----------------|
| Author | Their real name | Real name — or **"Authors"** for reviewers on double-blind tracks |
| Reviewer | **"Reviewer #N"** (matches the review numbering) | Real name |
| AE / SE | The track's display name (e.g. "Associate Editor") | Real name |
| Chair | Real name | Real name |

On multi-phase tracks, each round gets its own discussion window, and earlier rounds' threads stay visible as read-only history.

## Typical Rebuttal Workflow

1. Reviews come in → you **release results** for the phase ([Release Results](/docs/track-chairs/release-results))
2. Authors respond to the reviews before the response deadline
3. Reviewers read the responses, reply, and **update their reviews** (score changes are tracked as review revisions)
4. You finalize decisions with the discussion in view

See also: [Configure Track Phases](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-phases) · [Make Decisions](/docs/track-chairs/make-decisions)

---

# Auto Assign Reviewers

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/auto-assign-reviewers
Description: Automatically match submissions with reviewers using Smart Matching

Auto Assign uses Smart Matching to find the best reviewers for each submission. It scores reviewer-submission compatibility using text similarity and keyword overlap, then finds the globally optimal assignment across all submissions simultaneously.

## Getting Started

1. Go to **Submissions → Assignments** for your track
2. Click **"Auto Assign"** in the toolbar

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/auto-assign-reviewers/find-auto-assign.png" alt="Find the Auto Assign button on the Review Assignments page" width="800" />

This opens the auto-assignment page where you configure matching settings.

---

## Settings

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/auto-assign-reviewers/settings-closeup.png" alt="Settings with constraint mode toggle and feasibility indicator" width="800" />

### Target Reviewers per Submission

How many reviewers to assign to each submission. Default: **3**. This is a target — submissions may receive fewer reviewers if there aren't enough eligible reviewers available (due to COI filtering or capacity limits).

### Max Submissions per Reviewer

Upper limit on submissions assigned to a single reviewer. Default: **5**. Use the toggle to choose how strictly this limit is enforced:

| Mode | Behavior |
|------|----------|
| **Soft limit** (default) | Reviewers may exceed the limit by up to 2 submissions if needed to ensure all submissions get assigned |
| **Hard limit** | Strict cap — no reviewer will exceed this number, even if some submissions get fewer reviewers as a result |

**Use Soft limit** when full coverage matters most — you want every submission to get reviewers, even if a few reviewers go slightly over capacity. **Use Hard limit** when reviewer workload is the priority — no one should be overloaded, even if it means some submissions get fewer reviewers than the target.

### Feasibility Indicator

Below the settings, a color-coded banner shows whether your current configuration is feasible:

- **Green** — Capacity is sufficient. All submissions can be assigned the target number of reviewers.
- **Amber** — Capacity is tight. Soft mode will allow overflow to fit, but hard mode may leave gaps.
- **Red** — Insufficient capacity. Some submissions will get fewer reviewers than the target. Consider adding more reviewers or increasing the max submissions per reviewer.

---

## Scoring Method

Choose how text similarity between submissions and reviewer expertise is computed.

| Method | How It Works | Cost | Speed |
|--------|--------------|------|-------|
| **Text Similarity** | BM25 text matching against submission titles and abstracts | Free | Seconds |
| **AI Semantic** | OpenAI embeddings — understands synonyms and related concepts | Credits (based on submission count) | Seconds |

Both methods also use phrase-level keyword matching (comparing submission keywords with reviewer expertise tags) in addition to text similarity.

<Callout type="info" title="How scoring works">
Each reviewer-submission pair gets a score from 0–100: up to 70 points from text similarity (BM25 or AI embeddings) and up to 30 points from keyword overlap. The system then uses network flow optimization (Min-Cost Max-Flow) to find the assignment that maximizes the total score across all submissions — not just one submission at a time.
</Callout>

### When to use AI Semantic

Select AI Semantic when you need the algorithm to understand that related concepts match — for example, "NLP" and "natural language processing", or "deep learning" and "neural networks". Submission titles, abstracts, and reviewer expertise tags are sent to OpenAI for embedding. Use Text Similarity instead if data privacy is a concern.

---

## Strategy

### Fill Gaps Only (Default)

Only assigns reviewers to submissions that don't have enough reviewers yet. Existing assignments are preserved — no existing reviewer-submission pairs are changed.

**Use when:** You've already made some manual assignments and want to fill in the rest.

### Fresh Start

Generates new assignments for all submissions, replacing existing ones. When you apply the suggestions:

- Existing assignments **without** a submitted review are **removed** and replaced with the new suggestions
- Existing assignments **with** a submitted review are **kept** — the system never deletes work that reviewers have already completed

The confirmation dialog shows exactly how many assignments will be removed and how many will be kept before you apply.

**Use when:** Starting over or regenerating all assignments from scratch.

---

## Options

### COI Enforcement

COI is always enforced — reviewers who have conflicts with submission authors are automatically excluded before the matching algorithm runs. Three rules are checked: self-conflict, co-author conflict, and declared conflict.

See [Conflict of Interest Enforcement](/docs/track-chairs/conflicts) for full details on COI rules and how to encourage reviewers to declare their conflicts.

### Balance Workload

When enabled, the algorithm favors distributing submissions evenly across reviewers, even if it means slightly lower expertise matches.

**Use when:** You want to avoid overloading some reviewers while others have few submissions.

---

## Reviewers Without Research Profiles

Reviewers who haven't completed their research profile cannot be matched by expertise. They will be assigned to fill remaining slots after all profiled reviewers are placed.

If you see a warning about reviewers without profiles:

1. Go to the [reviewers page](/docs/track-chairs/invite-reviewers#research-profile-status)
2. Send reminder emails to reviewers without profiles
3. Wait for profiles to be updated, then run auto-assign again

See [Research Profiles](/docs/users/research-profile) for details on what reviewers should include.

---

## Running Auto Assign

1. Adjust **Target reviewers per submission** and **Max submissions per reviewer** if needed
2. Choose a constraint mode (**Soft limit** or **Hard limit**) — check the feasibility indicator to make sure capacity is sufficient
3. Select a scoring method (**Text Similarity** or **AI Semantic**)
4. Choose a strategy (**Fill gaps only** or **Fresh start**)
5. Toggle options (**Enforce COI**, **Balance workload**)
6. Click **"Generate Assignments"**

After generation completes, you'll see a suggestions page where you can:
- Review each proposed assignment
- See match scores and reasoning
- Accept or reject individual suggestions
- Apply accepted assignments in bulk

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/auto-assign-reviewers/suggestions-page.png" alt="The suggestions page with the Manage Assignments link in the top right" width="800" />

Each suggested reviewer has a checkbox — clear any you don't want, or use **"Deselect All"** / **"Select All"** to start from scratch. The **Reviewer Workload Distribution** chart shows how many submissions each reviewer would end up with so you can spot anyone getting overloaded before you commit.

When you're happy with the selection, click **"Apply Selected"**. A confirmation dialog summarizes the impact — for **Fill gaps**, it confirms that existing assignments are preserved; for **Fresh start**, it shows how many existing assignments will be removed and how many with submitted reviews will be kept.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/auto-assign-reviewers/apply-suggestions.png" alt="The Apply Selected bar noting that applying does not notify reviewers" width="800" />

<Callout type="info" title="Applying does not notify reviewers">
Applying assignments only records who is assigned to each submission — **reviewers are not emailed**. You can keep adjusting afterward: add, remove, or reassign reviewers manually, then send notifications when you're ready. Reviewers only hear about their assignments when you explicitly send them from **Notify Reviewers** on the assignments page.
</Callout>

### Adjusting Assignments After Applying

The applied assignments aren't final. To fine-tune them by hand, click **"Manage Assignments"** in the top right of the suggestions page (or go to **Submissions → Assignments** for your track). There you can add or remove reviewers submission by submission, and only send notifications once everything looks right.

---

## Tips for Best Results

- **Ensure reviewers have profiles** — The more complete the research profiles, the better the matching quality
- **Use keywords on submissions** — Submissions with topic keywords get better matches than those with only titles
- **Start with Text Similarity** — It's free and fast, so you can iterate quickly
- **Try AI Semantic for final round** — When you need the highest quality matches and have credits available
- **Check feasibility first** — If the indicator is red, adjust your settings before generating

---

# Camera-Ready — How to Handle the File

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/camera-ready-file-handling
Description: Two patterns for collecting the final PDF when submissions reach Camera Ready, and what each one actually protects.

When a submission reaches your final-version phase (often called **Camera Ready**, sometimes **Final Version**, **Proceedings Version**, or whatever your committee prefers), authors need to upload a new PDF. You have **two patterns** to choose from, and they protect different things.

If you haven't set up the phase itself yet, start with [A Typical Two-Phase Workflow](two-phase-workflow) — this guide is specifically about the file field, not the whole phase setup.

---

## Pattern A — Reuse the submission-file slot

Authors hit the same **Submission File** field and upload their camera-ready PDF over the original.

**What happens:** A new `SubmissionVersion` is created. The previous version — with the original PDF URL — is preserved in the submission's version history.

| | |
|---|---|
| **Setup** | None. Default behavior for every track. |
| **Where the original PDF lives** | Version history on the submission detail page (one click deeper). |
| **Where the camera-ready PDF lives** | Same slot — shown as the "current" file everywhere (exports, proceedings ZIPs, reviewer views). |
| **Good for** | Workshops, internal-only events, small conferences where version history is enough. |
| **Tradeoff** | Authors have to trust that the old file is archived. One stray click on Replace can swap it; we now show a confirmation ("Submission file hasn't changed since version N") when they try to save without replacing, but that's a speedbump, not a lock. |

---

## Pattern B — Add a phase-scoped Camera-Ready field

You add a new **file** field in the submission form, scope it to your Camera Ready phase, and authors upload the new PDF to a separate slot. The original Submission File stays visible.

**Setup:** In the track's **Forms → Submission Form** tab, click **"Add Field"**, pick **File Upload**, and set **Add to Phase** to your camera-ready phase. Name it something unambiguous like `Camera-Ready PDF`.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/camera-ready-file-handling/add-camera-ready-field.png" alt="Configure File Field dialog with Add to Phase dropdown highlighted, showing how to scope a new Camera-Ready PDF field to a specific phase" width="800" />

Any field's help text is shown to authors right under the label — use it to tell them which slot to upload to (e.g. "Upload the final camera-ready PDF here. Your original submission PDF stays on file.").

| | |
|---|---|
| **Setup** | One file field added to the phase. Once submissions exist, the field's schema locks so it can't be deleted. |
| **Where the original PDF lives** | The original **Submission File** slot — shown side-by-side with the camera-ready slot in every phase. |
| **Where the camera-ready PDF lives** | The new field you added. Distinct artifact in exports, proceedings ZIPs, and the submission detail page. |
| **Good for** | Published proceedings, legal/archival requirements, anything where "which file is the submission of record?" needs to be unambiguous. |
| **Tradeoff** | Authors see both slots in the edit form — see the honest caveat below. |

---

## What you can't prevent (read this before choosing Pattern B)

**Pattern B gives you a clean place for the camera-ready PDF. It does not lock the original Submission File.** When an author opens Edit Submission in the camera-ready phase, every field visible to that phase is editable — including the original phase-1 Submission File slot. They could Replace that file too.

What actually protects the original file across both patterns:

- **Version history is permanent.** Every save creates a new `SubmissionVersion` that snapshots the file URL. Old files stay downloadable from the submission detail page regardless of what the author does next.
- **The "unchanged file" soft gate** fires in any post-submission phase (index > 1). If the author saves without picking a new file for any file slot, they see a confirmation dialog before the revision commits.
- **Deadlines you set on the phase** stop edits entirely. Once the camera-ready revision deadline passes, authors can't save new versions at all.

If you need a hard lock on the original slot — truly read-only in later phases — that's not currently a field-level setting. File a request if it's a blocker for your use case.

---

## Which pattern should I pick?

- **Running a workshop or internal review?** Pattern A. No setup, version history is enough.
- **Publishing proceedings, or have a legal/archival need for two distinct artifacts?** Pattern B. Add the field, use the help text to direct authors, and accept the (rare) edge case that an author could also edit the original slot.

Whichever you pick, the version history is the floor — you can always recover any previously uploaded file from the submission detail page.

---

# Check Submission Compliance

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/compliance-check
Description: Automatically verify that submissions meet formatting and content requirements

PaperFox can automatically check all submissions in a track against your formatting and content rules — page limits, margins, font size, anonymization, and more. All checks run programmatically on the PDF files, with no data sent to external services.

## How It Works

1. **Configure rules** — Pick from predefined rule types (Page Limit, Font Size, etc.) and set parameters
2. **Run the check** — PaperFox downloads each submission's PDF and verifies every rule
3. **Review results** — See pass/fail/warn status per submission, with detailed evidence
4. **Notify authors** — Select non-compliant submissions and send notification emails

---

## Supported Check Types

All checks are programmatic — they analyze the PDF structure and text directly.

| Type | What It Checks | Parameters |
|------|---------------|------------|
| **Page Limit** | Number of pages | Max pages, optional "excluding references" |
| **Page Size** | US Letter or A4 | Size selection |
| **Margins** | Minimum margin width | Inches (with 0.15" tolerance) |
| **Font Size** | Dominant body font size | Point size (with 1pt tolerance) |
| **Column Layout** | Single or two-column | Column count |
| **Line Spacing** | Single or double spacing | Spacing type |
| **File Size** | PDF file size | Max MB |
| **Language** | Primary language of text | Language selection |
| **Anonymization** | Author identifying info **must not** appear (double-blind) | Automatic (uses submission author data) |
| **Author Information** | Author names **must** appear (camera-ready) | Automatic (uses submission author data) |

---

## Configuring Rules

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Navigate to your track and click **"Compliance"**
3. Click **"Add Rule"** and select a type from the dropdown
4. Set the parameters (e.g., max 8 pages) and severity (**Must** or **Should**)
5. Click **"Save Rules"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/compliance-check/configure-rules.png" alt="Compliance Check page showing the Rules card with AI extraction, three configured rules (Page Limit, Page Size, Anonymization), and the Run Check section with results below" width="800" />

### Extract Rules with AI

Instead of adding rules manually, paste your call for papers or submission guidelines into the **Extract Rules with AI** box and click **"Extract Rules"**. AI maps the text into the predefined rule types above with pre-filled parameters. Review and adjust them before saving.

### Severity Levels

| Severity | On Violation |
|----------|-------------|
| **Must** | Marked as **Fail** |
| **Should** | Marked as **Warn** |

### Page Limit — Excluding References

Enable the **"Excluding references"** checkbox to count only content pages before the References section. PaperFox detects the References heading in the PDF and counts pages up to that point.

<Callout type="info" title="References detection">
If PaperFox cannot find a "References" heading in the PDF, it falls back to counting all pages and notes this in the evidence.
</Callout>

---

## Anonymization Check

The anonymization check verifies that submissions do not contain author-identifying information — important for double-blind review.

It searches the PDF text for:

| What | Where |
|------|-------|
| **Full author name** (first + last) | Entire document |
| **Email address** | Entire document |

<Callout type="info" title="No external services">
The anonymization check uses keyword matching against the submission's author data. No text is sent to any external AI service.
</Callout>

---

## Author Information Check

The Author Information check is the **inverse** of Anonymization — use it for the camera-ready phase, where authors are expected to add their names back to the submission.

For each author on the submission, PaperFox searches the PDF text for the **full author name** (first + last). The check **passes** when every author's name is found anywhere in the document. It **fails** and lists any missing names so you can flag submissions where someone forgot to de-anonymize before camera-ready.

<Callout type="info" title="Names only — emails don't count">
Author Information checks names, not emails. A camera-ready PDF that only includes contact emails without bylines is flagged as missing the authors.
</Callout>

<Callout type="info" title="Typical setup">
Add an **Anonymization** rule active for your initial Submission phase, then add an **Author Information** rule for the Camera-Ready phase. Use the Phase dropdown when running the check to scope each run to the right phase.
</Callout>

---

## Running a Compliance Check

Once rules are saved, click **"Run Check"** to check submissions against your enabled rules. Every run checks all in-scope submissions from scratch, so you always get up-to-date results — even if you just changed a rule (e.g., updated the page limit).

The check runs in the background. A progress bar shows how many submissions have been processed. When complete, results appear below.

### Phase and PDF Field Selectors (Multi-Phase Tracks)

If your track has more than one phase (e.g., **Submission** and **Camera-Ready**, or a **Revision** phase), two cascading dropdowns appear next to **"Run Check"**:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/compliance-check/phase-pdf-selectors.png" alt="Multi-phase track Run Check action bar with Phase set to Camera-Ready and the PDF dropdown open showing two options: Submission File and Camera-Ready PDF" width="800" />

| Selector | What It Picks |
|----------|---------------|
| **Phase** | Which phase's submission version to check. Defaults to the track's current phase — the furthest phase holding submissions — so once you've moved submissions to Camera-Ready the check targets that phase automatically. The count next to each option is the number of submissions with a version in that phase. |
| **PDF** | Which file field on the form to scan. The list is filtered by the selected phase: fields with no phase tag appear in every phase, phase-tagged fields (e.g., a Camera-Ready PDF) only in their phase. Disabled when there's only one option. |

Single-phase tracks hide the Phase dropdown — there's only one phase, so the choice doesn't apply. The PDF selector is shown but disabled when the form has just one file field.

<Callout type="info" title="Submissions outside the selected phase are skipped">
Only submissions that have a version in the chosen phase are included. For example, if you scope a check to **Camera-Ready** but only 20 of 50 submissions have been moved to that phase, the run checks those 20 — the other 30 are not in the candidate set and don't appear in results.
</Callout>

---

## Reviewing Results

Results are shown in a table with pass/fail/warn status for each submission. If a check fails partway through, any partial results collected before the failure are still displayed. You can:

- **Filter** by status (Pass, Warn, Fail)
- **Click "View"** on any row's status chip to see detailed findings with evidence for each rule
- **Select** non-compliant submissions and click **"Notify Authors"** to email them

Each finding includes:

- **Status**: Pass, Fail, or Warn
- **Message**: What was checked and the result
- **Evidence**: Specific measurements or text found (e.g., "Page count: 10, limit: 8")

### Notifying Authors

Selecting one or more rows and clicking **"Notify Authors"** hands the selection to the standard PaperFox notification composer with the **"Notify Authors of Compliance Issues"** preset pre-selected. The composer pre-fills the subject and body using the [`compliance-issues` template](/docs/chairs/send-notifications), and each recipient's email automatically includes their submission's specific failed rules. Edit the message if needed, preview a recipient, then click **"Send Notification"**.

---

# Configure Track Phases

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-phases
Description: Understanding and managing phases, deadlines, and forms in your track

## What is a Phase?

A phase represents a distinct stage in your track's submission workflow. Each phase can have its own forms, review process, and deadlines. Each submission tracks its current phase independently.

**Key Principles:**
- Every track starts with an **Initial Submission** phase (Phase 1) where new submissions are submitted
- Submissions can be in different phases at the same time
- Chairs have full control over moving submissions between phases
- Phase transitions are explicit and manual, not automatic

**Common phases include:**
- **Initial Submission** (Phase 1) - Authors submit their first draft
- **Revision** - Authors submit revised version based on reviews
- **Camera Ready** - Authors submit final publication-ready version

## Which Phase Pages Open To

Phase-based pages — **Reviews & Decisions**, **Review Assignments** (and auto-assign), **Review Progress**, and **Compliance** — open to your track's **current phase** by default: the furthest phase that currently holds submissions. Once you move a batch of submissions into a Camera Ready or Revision phase, those pages land on that phase automatically, so you don't have to remember to switch after each transition.

The **Phase selector** in each page's header is still there to override the default — pick any phase to work on it directly, and that choice sticks for that page. A track with no submissions yet simply opens to Phase 1.

## The Phases Page

To manage phases, navigate to your track and click **Settings** → **Phases**. Each phase card keeps its configuration behind **Phase Settings**, with a one-line summary of the current values — so you can scan every phase at a glance and expand only the one you need. Each card's footer shows the phase's current state: how many submissions and review assignments it holds, and whether its decisions and reviews have been released to authors yet (release happens via **Release** on the **Reviews & Decisions** page).

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/configure-track-phases/phases-overview.png" alt="Track Phases Management page showing two phases, each with a settings summary line listing deadlines, author editing and author responses, plus links to its forms" width="800" />

### Add a Phase

1. Click **"Add Phase"** at the top of the page
2. Enter a **Phase Name**, and a description if it helps your co-chairs
3. Click **"Create Phase"**

That is all the dialog asks for. Deadlines and author responses are set on the phase card, so you don't have to decide them now — a camera-ready deadline usually depends on when reviews finish. The new phase appears with **Phase Settings** already open, ready for those values whenever you have them.

### Delete a Phase

The trash icon on a phase card deletes it — available only while the phase is untouched (no submissions, review assignments, or reviews; the initial Submission phase can never be deleted). Deleting a phase also removes the form fields you added for it, since they never collected an answer. Fields from earlier phases are unaffected, and later phases keep their fields.

---

## Setting Phase Deadlines

Phase Settings is grouped by who each setting affects — a **Reviewers** section, then an **Authors** section:

| Section | Setting | Controls |
|---------|---------|----------|
| Reviewers | **Review Deadline** | When reviews should be completed |
| Authors | **Author Editing** | Whether authors can edit their submission in this phase at all |
| Authors | **Revision Deadline** | When revisions are due, if editing is open |
| Authors | **Author Responses** (+ optional response deadline) | Replying to reviews after results are released |

The **Revision Deadline** sits under **Author Editing** because it refines it: editing is open — until this date. Turn Author Editing off and the deadline greys out, since a date changes nothing on a phase where nobody can edit.

Author responses are covered in their own guide: **[Enable Author Responses →](/docs/track-chairs/author-responses)**

Each deadline has its own **Enforced** switch below the date (disabled until a date is set):

- **Review Deadline** (enforced, the default): once the deadline passes, reviewers can no longer create or edit reviews for that phase.
- **Revision Deadline** (enforced, the default): once the deadline passes, authors can no longer edit their submissions in that phase.
- **Not enforced**: the deadline is informational — it's still shown to reviewers or authors as guidance, but nothing is blocked when it passes. The phase summary marks these with "(not enforced)".

Track chairs are exempt from the revision deadline and can always edit submissions regardless of deadlines.

### Close Editing Without a Deadline

To stop authors editing in a phase, turn **Author Editing** off. That is the whole setting — no date, no enforcement switch.

Use it when the phase was never about author work: a review-only round, or a phase you've moved submissions into while you decide. Authors are told plainly that the chairs have closed editing, rather than being shown a deadline they supposedly missed.

<Callout type="warning" title="Don't close editing with a past date">
Back-dating the **Revision Deadline** also blocks authors, but it tells them a deadline has passed when none ever existed — and it only works if that deadline's **Enforced** switch is on, which is easy to miss. Use **Author Editing** when you mean "closed", and the Revision Deadline when you mean an actual date.
</Callout>

Track chairs can still edit a submission in a phase with editing closed, exactly as they can past a deadline.

### How to Set a Deadline

1. Click **"Phase Settings"** on the phase card to expand it
2. Enter a date in **Review Deadline** or **Revision Deadline**
3. Pick a timezone (defaults to **Anywhere on Earth**)

Every field saves the moment you change it — there is no Save button, and no dialog to open.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/configure-track-phases/phase-settings-inline.png" alt="Phase Settings expanded, grouped into a Reviewers section with the review deadline and an Authors section holding Author Editing, the revision deadline nested beneath it, and Author Responses" width="800" />

To remove a deadline, click the **×** in its date field. An empty field means no deadline.

The same block is where you rename the phase or edit its description.

### Where Deadlines Are Displayed

| Deadline | Visible To | Where |
|----------|-----------|-------|
| **Review Deadline** | Track chairs | Phase card on the Phases page |
| **Revision Deadline** | Track chairs | Phase card on the Phases page |
| **Revision Deadline** | Authors | Submission detail page sidebar |

Authors see the revision deadline for their submission's current phase, helping them understand when their revision is expected.

---

## Customizing Forms for Each Phase

Each phase can have different submission and review forms to collect appropriate information at each stage.

### Why Different Forms?

**Initial Submission**: Collect core submission details
- Title, abstract, authors, keywords

**Revision Phase**: Add revision-specific fields
- Response to reviewers
- Summary of changes
- Updated manuscript

**Camera Ready**: Include publication requirements
- Copyright form
- Final formatting checklist
- Presentation preferences

### How to Customize Forms

On the phase card, click **"Configure Submission Form"** or **"Configure Review Form"**. Each opens the form builder scoped to that phase — and that is also where you preview the form, so you can check your changes without leaving the page.

- **[Customize Submission Forms →](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-submission-forms)**
- **[Customize Review Forms →](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-review-forms)**

> **Note**: Fields from earlier phases are automatically included in later phases. You only need to add new fields specific to the current phase.

---

## How Submissions Move Between Phases

Track chairs control when submissions advance. Moves are **forward-only**: every phase keeps a permanent record of its reviews and decisions, so a submission never travels back through a phase. To rework a submission, act in its current phase — record a new decision, extend the revision deadline — or move it forward into a revision phase.

### Key Concepts

- Each submission exists in exactly one phase at a time
- Decisions (Accept, Reject, Revision Required) are recorded but **do not automatically move submissions** — the chair moves them manually
- Submissions move **forward only** — correct course by acting in the current phase, not by moving back
- After a submission is moved, authors can immediately submit in the new phase (they see the new revision deadline, if set, on their submission page)

### Step 1 — Open the Phase Transitions Tool

Navigate to your track, then scroll to the **Review Management** section and click **"Reviews & Decisions"**.

On the Reviews & Decisions page, click **"Phase Transitions"** in the toolbar. You'll typically do this after making a round of decisions and being ready to advance submissions to the next stage.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/configure-track-phases/decisions-page.png" alt="Reviews & Decisions page with Phase Transitions button highlighted in the toolbar" width="800" />

### Step 2 — Configure the Move

The **Move Submissions to Next Phase** dialog appears with three controls:

| Field | What it does |
|-------|-------------|
| **Current Phase** | Read-only — the phase the submissions are coming from |
| **Move Submissions To** | Dropdown — select a later phase as the destination (earlier phases are shown disabled) |
| **Filter by Decision** | Narrows the move to submissions with a specific decision; shows a count of matching submissions |

Use the **Filter by Decision** field to target a specific group — for example, set it to "Revision Required" to move only those submissions to your Revision phase, while accepted and rejected submissions stay in Phase 1.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/configure-track-phases/phase-transitions-dialog.png" alt="Move Submissions to Next Phase dialog showing Current Phase, Move Submissions To dropdown, and Filter by Decision with submission count" width="800" />

### Step 3 — Review and Confirm

Click **"Continue"** to see the list of submissions that will be moved, then confirm. The move takes effect immediately.

### Undoing a Move

Fat-fingered a bulk move? Open **"Phase Transitions"** while viewing the phase the submissions landed in. If any of them are still untouched there — no reviewer assignments, reviews, decisions, or discussion — an **Undo a recent move** section appears; **"Undo Move"** sends them back to the phase they came from and restores their status. Once work starts in the new phase, the move is permanent.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/configure-track-phases/undo-move-dialog.png" alt="Phase Transitions dialog viewed from the destination phase, offering to undo a recent move for one untouched submission" width="800" />

### What Happens After Submissions Are Moved

- **Authors** can submit in the new phase right away. If a revision deadline is set on the destination phase, it appears in the sidebar of their submission page.
- **Reviewers** can be assigned fresh reviews for submissions in the new phase.
- A move can be **undone** while the new phase is untouched (see below). Once anyone acts in the new phase — an assignment, review, decision, or comment — the move is permanent.

### Example Workflow

```
Phase 1: Initial Submission
  - Authors submit papers
  - Reviews are collected
  - Chair makes decisions (Accept / Revision Required / Reject)

Chair opens Phase Transitions and:
  → Moves "Revision Required" papers to Phase 2 (Revision)
  → Moves "Accept" papers to Phase 3 (Camera Ready)
  → Rejected papers remain in Phase 1; no further action needed

Phase 2: Revision
  - Authors revise and resubmit (revision deadline visible on their page)
  - Chair assigns new reviews or re-reviews the revised version
  - Chair makes final decisions

Chair can then:
  → Move accepted papers to Phase 3 (Camera Ready)
  → Keep papers needing further rework in Phase 2 — record a new
    decision and extend the revision deadline; decisions are per-phase

Phase 3: Camera Ready
  - Authors upload their final publication-ready version
  - Ready for proceedings
```

> **Tip**: You can run Phase Transitions multiple times. Move one decision group first (e.g. "Revision Required"), then open it again to move another group (e.g. "Accept"). Each run is independent.

---

# Configure Track-level Review Forms

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-review-forms
Description: Guide for track chairs to customize review forms for submission evaluations

Track chairs can customize review forms to match their evaluation criteria and review process. The review form builder provides the same interface as submission forms but focuses on reviewer evaluation fields.

<Callout type="info" title="Conference-level defaults">
Your track's review form inherits default fields set by the conference chair. You can add additional fields on top of these defaults. See [Configure Conference Forms](/docs/chairs/configure-conference-forms) for details on how conference-level forms work.

If your conference has only one track, the conference-level forms may be sufficient — you only need to customize here if you want to add track-specific fields beyond the defaults.
</Callout>

## Accessing the Review Form Builder

1. Log in to your PaperFox account
2. Go to your conference dashboard
3. Navigate to your assigned track
4. Under **Track Settings**, click **"Track Forms"**
5. Select the **"Review Form"** tab

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/manage-track-review.png" alt="Track Settings - Track Forms highlighted" width="800" />

## Form Builder

The form builder shows two sections:

- **Inherited from Conference** — Read-only fields defined at the conference level (Overall Evaluation, Reviewer Confidence, etc.). Each field displays a colored type icon for quick identification.
- **Track Review Fields** — Fields specific to this track. Use **"Add Field"** to create new fields, drag to reorder, or click the edit icon to modify.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/review-form-builder.png" alt="Review Form Builder" width="800" />

## Review Deadlines

Configure review timing and deadlines for your track:

- **Review Assignment**: Set when reviewers are assigned to submissions
- **Review Deadline**: Final deadline for completing reviews
- **Review Reminders**: Automatic reminders sent to reviewers before deadline

## Core Review Fields

Review forms include essential fields that cannot be deleted but can be edited:

- **Overall Evaluation**: 5-point scale rating (Strong Reject to Strong Accept)
- **Reviewer Confidence**: Confidence level in the review (1-5 scale)
- **Comments for Authors**: Detailed feedback visible to authors
- **Confidential Comments**: Private comments for review committee only

## What Authors See

When authors view their reviews after the chair releases the phase's results, the system automatically filters what's shown:

| Element | Authors see it? |
|---------|-----------------|
| **Overall Evaluation** (score) | No — always hidden |
| **Reviewer Confidence** | No — always hidden |
| **Comments for Authors** | Yes |
| **Confidential Comments** | No — committee only |
| Custom fields | Depends on the field's visibility setting (see below) |
| Reviewer name | Only when the track's review type is **Open**; hidden in Single-Blind and Double-Blind |
| Review timestamps | No — hidden |

<Callout type="info" title="Score and confidence are always confidential to authors">
Even though **Overall Evaluation** and **Reviewer Confidence** are core fields, authors never see them — there's no setting to expose them. They're shown to chairs and track chairs, and to the submission's other reviewers when the track's **Review Visibility to Other Reviewers** setting reveals co-reviews (see the track's Review Settings). Design custom rating-style fields with this in mind: if you want a numeric rating that authors *can* see, add it as a custom field with visibility set to **Visible to Authors**.
</Callout>

## Adding Custom Fields

1. Click **"Add Field"** button
2. Select field type (text, textarea, select, file, etc.)
3. Configure label, description, and validation rules
4. Set visibility: visible to authors or confidential

## Phase-Specific Questions

On tracks with more than one review phase, each track question belongs to a phase, and reviewers only get the questions their phase asks. Single-phase tracks have no phase to choose, so this section doesn't apply — the phase selector and the **Phase** option are hidden entirely.

1. Use the phase selector next to **"Add Field"** to switch phases
2. Click **"Add Field"** and pick the **Phase** the question belongs to
3. Each question shows a **Phase** badge; questions carried in from an earlier phase are also badged **Inherited** — edit them from any phase, but reorder them from the phase they belong to

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/review-form-phases.png" alt="Track Review Fields on a two-phase track, showing the phase selector set to Phase 2 with a Phase 1 question badged Inherited above a Phase 2 question" width="800" />

A question tagged to a phase is hidden from reviewers before that phase and appears from that phase onward. Later phases keep the earlier phases' questions:

| Reviewer assigned to | Questions on their form |
|---|---|
| Phase 1 | Conference fields + Phase 1 track questions |
| Phase 2 | Conference fields + Phase 1 + Phase 2 track questions |

Conference-level fields aren't phase-specific — they appear in every phase.

<Callout type="info" title="Reviewers keep answering the same questions across phases">
Phases add questions, they never replace them. That's deliberate: a question keeps the same identity in every phase, so a rating you collect in Phase 1 and Phase 2 is the same question in your exports rather than two unrelated columns. If you want a question asked *only* in a later round, add it to that phase — earlier-phase reviewers won't see it.
</Callout>

<Callout type="warning" title="Adding a question mid-phase reaches reviewers immediately">
Reviewers already working in that phase pick up the new question the next time they open their review form, and a **Required** question will block them from submitting until they answer it. Add required questions for a phase before you assign its reviewers.
</Callout>

## Field Visibility (Custom Fields)

Custom fields you add have two visibility options:
- **Visible to Authors**: Authors will see this field's content alongside Comments for Authors
- **Confidential**: Only the review committee sees the field

This setting only applies to custom fields. Core fields follow the rules in [What Authors See](#what-authors-see) above.

## Managing Fields

- **Edit**: Click the edit icon to modify field properties
- **Delete**: Remove non-core fields using the delete icon
- **Reorder**: Drag and drop fields to change their order

## Previewing the Form

Click the **"Preview"** button next to the tab bar to see exactly how the review form appears to reviewers. The preview renders the real form — you can interact with all fields, open dropdowns, and test rating scales. No data will be saved.

The preview includes both conference-level inherited fields and your track-specific fields, showing the complete form reviewers will see.

---

# Configure Track-level Submission Forms

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-submission-forms
Description: Guide for track chairs to customize submission forms using the form builder

As a track chair, you can customize your track's submission form to collect the specific information needed for your review process. The form builder allows you to add, edit, and organize fields across different submission phases.

<Callout type="info" title="Conference-level defaults">
Your track's submission form inherits default fields set by the conference chair. You can add additional fields on top of these defaults. See [Configure Conference Forms](/docs/chairs/configure-conference-forms) for details on how conference-level forms work.

If your conference has only one track, the conference-level forms may be sufficient — you only need to customize here if you want to add track-specific fields beyond the defaults.
</Callout>

## Accessing the Form Builder

1. Log in to your PaperFox account
2. Go to your conference dashboard
3. Navigate to your assigned track
4. Under **Track Settings**, click **"Track Forms"**
5. The **Submission Form** tab is selected by default

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/manage-track.png" alt="Track Settings - Track Forms highlighted" width="800" />

## Form Builder

The form builder shows two sections:

- **Inherited from Conference** — Read-only fields defined at the conference level (Title, Authors, Abstract, etc.). Each field displays a colored type icon for quick identification.
- **Track Submission Fields** — Fields specific to this track. Use **"Add Field"** to create new fields, drag to reorder, or click the edit icon to modify.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/submission-form-builder.png" alt="Submission Form Builder" width="800" />


## Adding Fields

1. Click **"Add Field"** button
2. Select field type (text, textarea, select, file, etc.)
3. Configure label, description, and validation rules

### File Upload Fields

File fields have an **Accepted File Types** setting: choose which formats authors can upload — **PDF** (the default), **Word**, **PowerPoint**, or **ZIP**. At least one format must stay selected.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/add-field-file-types.png" alt="Add Field dialog with Accepted File Types for a Presentation Slides field" width="800" />

Authors see the allowed formats on the upload area (for example, "PDF or PowerPoint only"), and files in other formats are rejected before upload. This is useful for phase-specific fields — for example, a **Presentation Slides** field accepting PowerPoint in a later phase, or a camera-ready field accepting ZIP archives.

You can also change the accepted types on an existing file field later — click its edit icon and adjust the checkboxes.

### Pre-selected Options

**Single Choice** and **Multiple Choice** fields can start with an option already chosen — useful for opt-out questions ("uncheck to opt out of AI feedback") or a Yes/No question where most submissions answer the same way. Check the box beside an option to pre-select it; Single Choice fields allow one, Multiple Choice allows any number.

Pre-selection applies to new submissions only, so you can turn it on at any time without changing answers authors have already given. See [Pre-selecting Options](/docs/chairs/configure-conference-forms#pre-selecting-options) for the full walkthrough.

## Who Sees the Answers

Reviewers assigned to a submission read **every field on this form** — the conference-inherited ones and the fields you add here alike. The only exception is **Authors**, which is hidden on Double-Blind tracks.

The track's review type does not change this. It controls whether authors and reviewers see each other's *identities*, not which questions a reviewer may read. See [Set the Review Type](/docs/track-chairs/set-review-type#what-review-type-does-not-control).

<Callout type="warning" title="Keep chair-only questions off this form">
Anything you add here goes to your reviewers. Don't use the submission form for information meant only for organizers — student status, suggested or excluded reviewers, funding sources. On a Double-Blind track a "suggested reviewers" field names real people to the very reviewers you are trying to blind. Collect that information outside the submission form.
</Callout>

## Managing Fields

- **Edit**: Click the edit icon to modify field properties
- **Delete**: Remove non-core fields using the delete icon
- **Reorder**: Drag and drop fields to change their order

Core fields (Title, Authors, Abstract, Keywords) cannot be deleted, but you can edit them.

## Previewing the Form

Click the **"Preview"** button next to the tab bar to see exactly how the submission form appears to authors. The preview renders the real form — you can interact with all fields, open dropdowns, and test options. No data will be saved.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/preview-button.png" alt="Preview button highlighted on track forms page" width="800" />

The preview includes both conference-level inherited fields and your track-specific fields, showing the complete form authors will see.

---

# Conflict of Interest Enforcement

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/conflicts
Description: How COI rules protect review integrity across all assignment paths

PaperFox automatically checks for conflicts of interest (COI) whenever you assign reviewers to submissions. You do not need to manually check — the system blocks hard conflicts outright and flags softer ones with a warning so you can decide.

## Three Hard Rules (Block)

Every reviewer-submission pair is checked against three hard rules. If any matches, the assignment is **blocked**:

| Rule | What It Checks | Source |
|------|---------------|--------|
| **Self-conflict** | Reviewer is listed as an author on the submission | Automatic — matches reviewer's name/email against the submission's author list |
| **Co-author conflict** | Reviewer co-authored another submission with one of the authors in the last 3 years | Automatic — detected from PaperFox submissions |
| **Declared conflict** | Reviewer manually declared a conflict with one of the authors | Reviewer's COI list in their settings |

These three match on **name and email** — see [Matching Logic](#matching-logic) below.

## One Soft Rule (Warning)

| Rule | What It Checks | Behavior |
|------|---------------|----------|
| **Same institution** | Reviewer and one of the authors share an institution (by affiliation) | **Warning, not a block** — the assignment is allowed, but you're notified so you can reassign if you consider it a conflict |

Same-institution is a *warning* because affiliation overlap isn't always a true conflict (large universities, shared umbrella organizations) and policies vary by venue. PaperFox surfaces it and leaves the call to you. It matches on **affiliation** — see [Matching Logic](#matching-logic).

## Where COI Is Checked

COI is checked on every assignment path:

- **[Auto Assign](/docs/track-chairs/auto-assign-reviewers)** — hard-conflicted reviewers are excluded before the matching algorithm runs and never appear in suggestions. Same-institution reviewers still appear, flagged with a warning on the suggestion.
- **[Manual assignment](/docs/track-chairs/assign-reviewers)** — drag-and-drop and bulk save reject hard conflicts with an error. A same-institution assignment saves successfully and shows a warning toast.
- **AE/SE assignment** — the same rules apply when assigning Associate Editors or Senior Editors to submissions.

## Encouraging Reviewers to Declare Conflicts

The self-conflict, co-author, and same-institution rules are automatic, but **declared conflicts** depend on reviewers maintaining their COI list. Encourage your reviewers to:

1. Go to **Settings → Conflicts** in their account
2. Add advisors, close collaborators, and co-authors from outside PaperFox
3. Review their system-detected co-author list for accuracy

You can use the [Notification Composer](/docs/chairs/send-notifications) to send a reminder to all reviewers in your track.

<Callout type="info" title="Reviewer COI guide">
Share the [Managing Conflicts of Interest](/docs/users/conflicts) guide with your reviewers. It explains how to declare conflicts, how system-detected co-authors work, and how matching logic works.
</Callout>

## Matching Logic

The self-conflict, co-author, and declared rules use **name and email matching**:

- **Name match** — the conflict name appears as a substring of the author's full name (case-insensitive). For example, "Smith" matches "John Smith".
- **Email match** — the conflict email exactly equals the author's email (case-insensitive).

The **same-institution** warning matches on affiliation instead:

- **ROR ID match** — when both the reviewer's and the author's affiliation are matched to the same [ROR](https://ror.org) organization, they are treated as the same institution (reliable across name variants like "MIT" vs "Massachusetts Institute of Technology").
- **Affiliation name match** — otherwise, the two affiliation strings must be equal after normalizing case, whitespace, and punctuation. This is deliberately strict: it will **not** treat "MIT" and "MIT Media Lab" as the same institution unless they share a ROR ID. A missed match is safer than a noisy false warning.

For full details, see [How Matching Works](/docs/users/conflicts#how-matching-works) in the reviewer guide.

---

# Detect Duplicate Submissions

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/duplicate-detection
Description: How PaperFox automatically detects and flags potential duplicate submissions in your track

PaperFox helps prevent duplicate submissions with two layers of detection: a **real-time warning** when authors submit, and a **filter for track chairs** to review flagged duplicates.

## How It Works

Duplicate detection compares submission titles using a similarity algorithm. Two titles are flagged as potential duplicates when they are **90% or more similar** — accounting for minor differences in capitalization, spacing, and typos.

| Layer | When | Who Sees It |
|-------|------|-------------|
| **Submission form warning** | While the author types the title | Authors |
| **Potential Duplicates filter** | On demand, from the submissions list | Track chairs |

---

## Author-Facing Warning

When an author types a title that closely matches an existing submission in the track, a warning appears below the title field in real time:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/duplicate-detection/duplicate-warning.png" alt="Duplicate title warning shown below the title field on the submission form" width="800" />

The warning advises the author to use **Edit Submission** if they meant to update an existing submission. If the submission is genuinely different, they can proceed — a confirmation dialog will ask them to confirm before submitting.

<Callout type="info" title="Non-blocking">
The duplicate warning does not prevent submission. Authors can still submit after confirming. This avoids blocking legitimate submissions with similar titles.
</Callout>

---

## Finding Duplicates as a Track Chair

To review potential duplicates in your track:

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Navigate to your track and click **"All Submissions"**
3. Select **"Potential Duplicates"** from the status filter dropdown

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/duplicate-detection/duplicates-filtered.png" alt="Submissions list filtered by Potential Duplicates showing two matching submissions with badges" width="800" />

The list shows only submissions that have a near-identical title to another submission in the track. Each flagged submission displays a **Potential Duplicate** badge — click it to see which other submission(s) it matches.

<Callout type="warning" title="Processing time">
Duplicate detection compares all submission titles pairwise, so it may take a few seconds for tracks with many submissions. A loading spinner appears while results are being calculated.
</Callout>

---

## What to Do with Duplicates

Once you identify duplicates, you can take action from the **Actions** dropdown on each submission:

| Scenario | Recommended Action |
|----------|-------------------|
| Same submission submitted twice by mistake | **Withdraw** the duplicate, keep the latest version |
| Test or accidental submission | **Delete** the submission entirely |
| Legitimately similar but different submissions | No action needed — the titles just happen to be similar |

See [Withdraw or Delete Submissions](/docs/track-chairs/withdraw-and-delete-submissions) for details on these actions.

---

# Enable Sub-Reviewers

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/enable-sub-reviewers
Description: Allow reviewers to delegate their review assignments to sub-reviewers

Sub-reviewers allow PC members to invite external reviewers to complete reviews on their behalf. When enabled, reviewers can delegate their assignments to colleagues who then go through the standard accept/review workflow.

## Enable Sub-Reviewers on a Track

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Click on the track you want to configure
3. In the **Review Management** section, click **"Review Settings"** to expand the settings
4. Toggle **"Allow Sub-Reviewers"** on

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/enable-sub-reviewers/toggle.png" alt="Allow Sub-Reviewers toggle in track settings" width="800" />

The toggle takes effect immediately. Reviewers on this track will now see an **"Invite Sub-Reviewer"** option when viewing their assignments.

## How It Works

When a reviewer invites a sub-reviewer:

| Step | What Happens |
|------|-------------|
| **Invite** | Reviewer enters sub-reviewer's email on the assignment page |
| **Notification** | Sub-reviewer receives an email and sees a pending assignment in **My Assignments** |
| **Accept/Decline** | Sub-reviewer accepts or declines like any other assignment |
| **Review** | Sub-reviewer writes and submits the review through the standard review form |
| **Visibility** | Original reviewer can view the submitted sub-review (read-only) |

## Key Rules

- **One level only** — Sub-reviewers cannot delegate further
- **One sub-reviewer per assignment** — A reviewer can only invite one sub-reviewer at a time
- **Cancellable** — The reviewer can cancel the delegation before the sub-reviewer starts writing; the sub-assignment then shows as **Cancelled** (distinct from a decline by the sub-reviewer) and the same person can be re-invited later
- **Track-level setting** — Each track can independently enable or disable sub-reviewers

## Chair Visibility

Sub-reviewer reviews are clearly marked in the system:

- The **submission reviews page** shows a **"Sub-reviewer"** badge next to reviews from sub-reviewers, along with who invited them
- The **reviewer list** shows sub-reviewer source badges
- **Review progress tracking** shows the original reviewer — they are responsible for ensuring the sub-review is completed on time

## Disabling Sub-Reviewers

You can disable the feature at any time by toggling **"Allow Sub-Reviewers"** off. When disabled:

- **New invitations** are blocked — reviewers can no longer invite sub-reviewers
- **Existing sub-reviews** remain intact — submitted reviews are preserved and accessible
- **In-progress delegations** continue to function — sub-reviewers who already accepted can still complete their reviews
- The original reviewer can still view any existing sub-reviews in their **My Reviews** page

---

# Export and Download Submissions

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/export-submissions
Description: Export submission data as CSV/JSON and download all submitted files as a ZIP archive.

Track chairs can export submission metadata and download uploaded files in bulk from the **Track Submissions** page.

## Export Submission Data

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, click on your conference, then open the track you manage
2. Under **Submission Management**, click **"Submissions"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/export-submissions/track-submissions-link.png" alt="Track management page with Submissions link highlighted" width="800" />

3. Click the **"Export"** button and choose a format:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/export-submissions/export-dropdown.png" alt="Track Submissions page with Export dropdown open showing CSV and JSON options" width="800" />

- **CSV** — opens in Excel, Google Sheets, etc.
- **JSON** — for programmatic use

The exported file is named `{conference}-{track}-submissions-{date}.csv` (or `.json`).

### CSV columns

| Column | Description |
|--------|-------------|
| Submission ID | Submission slug (e.g., `dsw2027-1`) |
| Title | Submission title |
| Abstract | Full abstract text |
| Status | Current status (e.g., Submitted, Under Review) |
| Decision | Accept, Reject, etc. |
| Decision Date | When the decision was made |
| Decision By | Name of the decision maker |
| Submitted By | Author who submitted |
| Submitted Date | Date and time of submission |
| Current Phase | Active track phase |
| Total Assignments | Number of reviewer assignments |
| Accepted Assignments | Assignments accepted by reviewers |
| Completed Reviews | Number of finished reviews |
| Author N Name/Email/Affiliation/Country | Repeating columns for each author |

## Download Submitted Files

1. Click **"Download Files"** on the Track Submissions page
2. A confirmation dialog shows the number of submissions, files, and estimated download size

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/export-submissions/download-dialog.png" alt="Download confirmation dialog showing submission count, file count, and estimated size" width="800" />

3. Click **"Download ZIP"** to start the download

<Callout type="warning" title="Large downloads">
For large files (100 MB+), the dialog shows a warning to wait for the download to fully complete before opening. You can verify by checking that the downloaded file size matches the estimate.
</Callout>

The ZIP file is named `{conference}-{track}-submission-files-{date}.zip` and organized by submission:

```
dsw2027-main-submission-files-2026-03-17.zip
├── dsw2027-1/
│   ├── dsw2027-1-info.txt      # Submission metadata summary
│   ├── dsw2027-1-info.csv      # Metadata in CSV format
│   └── paper.pdf               # Uploaded file(s)
├── dsw2027-2/
│   ├── dsw2027-2-info.txt
│   ├── dsw2027-2-info.csv
│   └── manuscript.pdf
├── ...
└── _download-errors.txt        # Only present if any files failed to download
```

Each submission folder contains:
- **Info files** (`.txt` and `.csv`) with title, authors, status, decision, abstract, and keywords
- **All uploaded submission files** (PDFs, etc.)

If any individual file fails to download from storage, the rest of the ZIP still completes and errors are logged in `_download-errors.txt`.

---

# Invite Reviewers

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/invite-reviewers
Description: Guide for track chairs to invite and manage reviewers for submission evaluations

## Accessing Reviewer Management

Navigate to your track's reviewer management page:

1. From your **Dashboard**, select the conference and click **"Manage Track"**
2. Click **"Reviewers"** in the track navigation menu

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-reviewer/track-reviewers.png" alt="Track Reviewers Page" width="800" />

## Inviting Reviewers

### Method 1: Add Individual Reviewer

Use this to invite a single reviewer:

1. Click **"Add Reviewer"**, then choose **"Add a reviewer"** from the menu

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-reviewer/add-reviewer.png" alt="Add Individual Reviewer" width="800" />

2. Search by name, email, or affiliation
3. **For existing users:** Select from search results and click **"Invite"**
4. **For new users:** Enter their email address - they'll receive an invitation to create an account

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-reviewer/invite-one-reviewer.png" alt="Search and Select Reviewer" width="800" />

### Method 2: Bulk Invite

For inviting multiple reviewers at once:

1. Click **"Add Reviewer"**, then choose **"Bulk add reviewers"** from the menu

2. Choose your input method from the two tabs:

#### Upload / Manual

   **File Upload:**
   - Drag and drop a CSV or Excel file containing email addresses
   - The system automatically extracts all valid email addresses from any column

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-reviewer/bulk-invite.png" alt="Bulk Invite Reviewers" width="800" />

   **Manual Entry:**
   - Click **"or enter emails manually"**
   - Type or paste email addresses, one per line

#### From Authors

Invite submission authors directly as reviewers — useful when authors in your track have relevant expertise.

1. Click the **"From Authors"** tab
2. The system lists all authors from non-withdrawn submissions in the track, showing their name, email, and affiliation
3. Use the dropdown to filter by **All Authors** or **Corresponding Authors Only**
4. Use the search box to find specific authors by name, email, or affiliation
5. Authors who are already reviewers or have pending invitations are shown as disabled with a badge
6. Select authors using the checkboxes, or click **"Select all available"** to select everyone who can be invited
7. Click **"Continue with N Authors"** to proceed to the preview

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-reviewer/from-authors-tab.png" alt="Invite reviewers from submission authors" width="800" />

#### Sending Invitations

3. Review the extracted emails in the preview

4. Click **"Send Invitations"** to send all invites

New users will enter their name when they accept the invitation.

## The Reviewer List

The reviewer list is organized into three tabs that track each invitation's progress:

- **Active** — Reviewers who have accepted and joined the track
- **Pending** — Invitations sent but not yet responded to
- **Declined** — Invitations that were declined

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-reviewer/reviewers-default-columns.png" alt="Reviewer list with default columns" width="800" />

### Customizing Columns

The Active tab shows **Name**, **Email**, **Affiliation**, **Last Access**, and **Actions** by default. Three additional columns can be toggled on via the **Columns** dropdown next to the Search input:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-reviewer/reviewers-columns-dropdown.png" alt="Columns dropdown showing Status, Source, and Research Profile toggles" width="800" />

- **Status** — Shows **Active** (green) when a reviewer's profile is complete, or **Incomplete Profile** (amber) when they've accepted but haven't logged in to fill out their name, affiliation, and other profile fields. Reviewers with incomplete profiles cannot be assigned submissions. The amber notification banner at the top of the Active tab surfaces this same information.
- **Source** — Shows how each reviewer was added to the track (see next section)
- **Research Profile** — Shows whether each reviewer has completed their AI-discovered research profile (see [Research Profiles & Submission Matching](#research-profiles--submission-matching))

Your column choices are remembered per role (reviewers, associate editors, senior editors), so each list keeps its own preferences across sessions.

### Reviewer Source

When the **Source** column is enabled, it shows how each reviewer was added to the track — useful for auditing your reviewer pool and distinguishing delegated sub-reviewers from your core committee.

| Source | When it applies |
|--------|----------------|
| **Committee** | Added directly by a track or conference chair via **Add Reviewer** or the Upload / Manual bulk-invite flow. This is the default for most reviewers. |
| **Author** | Invited through the [**From Authors**](#from-authors) tab in Bulk Invite — these reviewers are submission authors from your track who were promoted into the reviewer pool. |
| **Delegation** | Added as a sub-reviewer when an assigned reviewer [delegated one of their submissions](/docs/reviewers/delegate-review). Only appears when the track has [sub-reviewers enabled](/docs/track-chairs/enable-sub-reviewers). |

Click the **Source** column header to sort reviewers by source. You can also export the full reviewer list (including Source) as CSV or JSON via the **Export** button.

---

## Managing Reviewers & Invitations

Each row in the reviewer list has an action button in the **Actions** column. Available actions depend on the tab:

| Tab | Action | What it does |
|-----|--------|--------------|
| **Active** | Remove | Removes the reviewer from the track (revokes their access) |
| **Pending** | Resend | Sends the invitation email again |
| **Pending** | Cancel | Withdraws the pending invitation |
| **Declined** | Re-invite | Sends a new invitation after a prior decline |

### Removing Active Reviewers

When you click **Remove** on an active reviewer, what happens depends on their review activity:

| Review Activity | Can Remove? | What Happens |
|-----------------|-------------|--------------|
| No assignments or reviews | Yes | Removed immediately |
| Only **Pending** or **Accepted** assignments (no started reviews) | Yes | A warning dialog lists the assignments that will be deleted — click **"Remove Anyway"** |
| Any **started or submitted** review | No | Blocked — started and submitted reviews are part of the permanent record and cannot be deleted |

<Callout type="warning" title="Reviews are permanent">
  A reviewer who has started or submitted any review cannot be removed. To stop them from doing further work, cancel their pending assignments individually from the assignment list. See [Remove Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/remove-reviewers) for the full flow.
</Callout>

---

## Research Profiles & Submission Matching

When you invite a reviewer, PaperFox automatically runs **AI Profile Discovery** — it searches the web for their publications and extracts expertise keywords. These keywords are used by [Auto Assign Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/auto-assign-reviewers) to match reviewers with relevant submissions.

Each reviewer's profile combines three types of keywords:
- **System Keywords** — Auto-extracted from submissions they've submitted in PaperFox
- **AI-Discovered Tags** — Found via web search of their recent publications
- **User Expertise Tags** — Added manually by the reviewer

<Callout type="info" title="Encourage reviewers to verify">
  After AI discovery runs, reviewers receive an email asking them to verify their profile. Remind reviewers to review their keywords and add any missing expertise areas — better profiles lead to better submission-reviewer matches.
</Callout>

### Checking Profile Status

Enable the **Research Profile** column via the **Columns** dropdown (see [Customizing Columns](#customizing-columns)) to see whether each reviewer has completed their profile.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/reviewers/profile-status-column.png" alt="Reviewer list showing research profile status" width="800" />

Profile icons indicate:
- **Green check** — Reviewer has a complete profile with expertise tags
- **Gray icon** — Reviewer hasn't completed their profile yet

Click the profile icon to view details or send a reminder.

### Viewing Reviewer Profiles

Click a reviewer's profile icon to see their expertise tags, research links, and publications summary.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/reviewers/profile-viewer-dialog.png" alt="Reviewer profile viewer showing expertise tags" width="800" />

### Sending Profile Reminders

When reviewers have incomplete profiles or missing research profiles, notification banners appear at the top of the Active tab:

- **Amber banner** — Shows the count of reviewers with incomplete basic profiles (haven't logged in to set their name/affiliation). Click **"Send Reminders"** to open the notification composer with the **Complete Profile Reminder** template pre-selected.
- **Blue banner** — Shows the count of reviewers without research profiles. Click **"Send Reminders"** to open the notification composer with the **Research Profile Reminder** template pre-selected.

Both buttons open the [notification composer](/docs/chairs/send-notifications) where you can preview and customize the email before sending.

You can also send individual reminders by clicking a reviewer's profile icon:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/reviewers/profile-reminder-dialog.png" alt="Send profile reminder dialog" width="800" />

- **Remind This Reviewer** — Send an email to just this reviewer
- **Remind All** — Send emails to all reviewers without profiles

## Customizing the Invitation Email

The invitation email opens with a system body explaining the role and a pair of Accept / Decline buttons. Conference chairs can add a personal **intro** (after the greeting) and **signature** (before the buttons) so the email reads in their voice rather than as a generic system notice. Each track can override the conference default with its own intro and signature.

See [Customize Committee Emails](/docs/chairs/customize-committee-emails) for the conference-level default and the per-track override.

---

# Invite Track Chairs

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/invite-track-chairs
Description: Add other track chairs to help manage your track

As a track chair, you can invite other colleagues to help manage your track. Co-track chairs have equal access to track management functions.

## Accessing Track Chair Management

1. **Navigate to Your Track:**
   - Go to your conference dashboard
   - Click on your assigned track name

2. **Access Chair Management:**
   - In the Track Management section, click **"Manage Track"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-trackchair/manage-track.png" alt="Manage Track Interface" width="600" />

   - In Track Management page, click **"Track Chairs"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-trackchair/edit-trackchair.png" alt="Track Chairs Interface" width="600" />



## Adding Track Chairs


1.	Click the "Invite Track Chair" button.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-trackchair/invite-trackchair.png" alt="Invite Track Chair Interface" width="600" />

2.	Search for the user by typing their name or email address in the search box.
3.	Select the correct user from the search results.
	-	If the person is not an existing PaperFox user, they will receive an invitation email. Upon accepting, they will be automatically registered and added as a Track Chair.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-trackchair/search-user.png" alt="Search Invitee Interface" width="800" />
4.	Confirm by clicking “Add.”

Once confirmed, the user immediately gains Track Chair access.

## Move a Track Chair to Another Track

If you invited your track chairs before creating your tracks, they were all added to your initial track. You can reassign any active chair to a different track — with no new invitation, no email, and no re-acceptance.

1. On the **Track Chairs** page, find the chair you want to reassign.
2. In the **Actions** column, click the **Move to another track** icon.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-trackchair/move-chair-action.png" alt="Move to another track action in a track chair row" width="800" />

3. In the dialog, choose the destination track under **Move to**.
4. Click **"Move Chair"**.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-trackchair/move-chair-dialog.png" alt="Move track chair dialog with a destination track selected" width="800" />

The chair is removed from the current track and added to the selected one right away.

<Callout type="info" title="No email is sent">
Moving a chair reassigns them instantly — they keep their access and don't need to accept anything again.
</Callout>

**Good to know:**
- The **Move** icon only appears when the conference has more than one track.
- You need to manage both the current and destination track to move a chair between them. Conference chairs can move a chair to any track.

## Track Chair Permissions

**Co-Track Chair Capabilities:**
- **Track Management**: Full access to track settings and configuration
- **Submission Oversight**: View and manage all track submissions
- **Reviewer Management**: Invite and manage track reviewers
- **Review Assignment**: Assign submissions to reviewers
- **Decision Making**: Make final accept/reject decisions
- **Form Configuration**: Set up submission and review forms

**Important Notes:**
- All track chairs have equal permissions for the track
- Track chairs cannot access other tracks (unless separately assigned)
- Track chairs cannot invite conference chairs
- Limited to track-specific operations only

## Managing Invitations

**View invitation status:**
- **Pending**: Invitation sent, awaiting response
- **Accepted**: Person joined as track chair
- **Declined**: Invitation was declined

**Invitation actions:**
- **Resend**: Send invitation again if not responded
- **Cancel**: Cancel pending invitation
- **Move**: Reassign an active chair to another track (see [Move a Track Chair to Another Track](#move-a-track-chair-to-another-track))
- **Remove**: Remove existing track chair

## Invitation Process for Recipients

**What invited users receive:**
1. Email invitation with track details
2. Link to accept or decline invitation
3. Instructions to create PaperFox account (if needed)
4. Access to track management upon acceptance

**Invitation timeline:**
- Invitees can accept or decline anytime — there is no automatic expiry
- Immediate access upon acceptance
- Email confirmation sent to both parties

---

# Make Decisions on Submissions

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/make-decisions
Description: How to accept, reject, or request revisions on submission submissions in your track

The **Reviews & Decisions** page is where track chairs review submission progress and make acceptance decisions. Navigate to your track management page and click **"Reviews & Decisions"** under **Review Management**.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/make-decisions/decisions-page.png" alt="Reviews & Decisions page showing statistics cards, filters, and submission list with Reviews & Decision links" width="800" />

The page shows:

- **Phase selector** (multi-phase tracks only) — Top-right of the header; switches the entire view between review phases (e.g., Phase 1: Submission, Phase 2: Camera Ready). The page opens to the track's current phase — the furthest phase holding submissions — so use this only to look back at an earlier phase. Single-phase tracks don't show a selector.
- **Summary cards** — Total Submissions, **Review Progress**, and **Decisions Made**. The last two lead with a percentage and show the exact count beneath it; click either card to open its breakdown, where every row links to the queue filtered to exactly those submissions.
- **Filters and actions row** — Submission-status, review-status, and **Decision** filters on the left; **"Phase Transitions"**, **"Progress Matrix"**, **"Notify Authors"**, and **"Export"** actions on the right
- **Submission list** — Each row shows title, authors, date, review progress, and a decision badge. Review progress badges read **"No Reviews Yet"**, **"Reviews In Progress"**, **"Ready for Decision"**, or the decision name once one is recorded.

### Reading the summary cards

**Review Progress** measures reviews, and nothing else. A submission counts as complete only when every reviewer assigned to it has submitted — deciding a submission early doesn't make its missing reviews arrive. Its breakdown splits the submissions that *have* reviewers into **Reviews complete**, **Reviews in progress**, and **No reviews yet**. Submissions with no reviewers assigned are listed separately beneath, since assigning reviewers is a different job from chasing reviews.

**Decisions Made** counts submissions you've decided, and its breakdown shows the mix across your conference's decision types.

Both cards describe the selected phase and leave withdrawn submissions out entirely — they're already hidden from the list below.

---

## Review & Decide on a Submission

1. On the **Reviews & Decisions** page, click **"Reviews & Decision"** on the submission row
2. This opens the combined reviews and decision page — reviews are on the left, with the **Review Summary** and **Decision** cards in the right sidebar

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/make-decisions/reviews-decision-page.png" alt="Combined reviews and decision page with reviews on the left and the Review Summary and Decision cards in the sidebar on the right" width="800" />

The **Reviews** header offers **Copy** and **Download** actions that export every submitted review — scores, comments, and reviewer identities as you see them — as a single Markdown or plain-text document.

At the top of the **Decision** sidebar is a **decision timeline**. On a multi-phase track it shows one row per phase the submission has reached — each with the decision recorded in that phase (who decided, when, and any notes), or **"Awaiting decision"** for a phase that hasn't been decided yet. Decisions are tracked **per phase**, so a submission you've advanced to a later phase reads as *Awaiting decision* for the new phase until you decide it, while the earlier phase's decision stays visible above it. On a single-phase track the timeline is just the one decision, with no phase labels.

3. Read through the reviewer scores, comments, and confidential notes on the left
4. In the **Decision** sidebar on the right, select a decision from the dropdown. The dropdown lists your conference's decision types — the six built-ins below, plus any custom verdicts the conference chair has added under [Customize Decision Types](/docs/chairs/customize-decision-types):

| Built-in Decision | Effect |
|----------|--------|
| **Accept** | Submission accepted, submission status changes to Accepted |
| **Conditional Accept** | Accepted with minor requirements, status changes to Accepted |
| **Major Revision** | Substantial revisions needed, status changes to In Revision |
| **Minor Revision** | Minor revisions needed, status changes to In Revision |
| **Reject** | Submission rejected, submission status changes to Rejected |
| **Desk Reject** | Rejected without full review, status changes to Rejected |

5. Optionally fill in two independent notes fields:
   - **Notes for Authors** — included in the decision notification email and visible to authors on their submission page
   - **Notes for Chairs** — marked with an amber **INTERNAL · NOT SENT TO AUTHORS** pill; visible only to chairs and editors (AE/SE), never sent to authors. Use for AE/SE coordination, override rationale, or any context you want recorded but kept off the author email
6. Click **"Save Decision"**

Once saved, the decision appears in the card as a record — the badge, who decided and when, and both notes under matching **Notes for Authors** / **Notes for Chairs** labels (the internal note is marked in amber). Decision emails are sent separately with **"Notify Authors"** on the Reviews & Decisions page.

<Callout type="info" title="Who can make decisions?">
Conference chairs, track chairs, and senior editors can all make decisions on submissions within their track.
</Callout>

<Callout type="warning" title="Internal notes are chair-only">
**Notes for Chairs** are visible to conference chairs, track chairs, associate editors, and senior editors — never to authors and never to regular reviewers. They appear inline beneath their phase's decision in the timeline, marked in amber so they're easy to spot. The decision notification email never includes them.
</Callout>

---

## When Authors See Decisions & Reviews

Recording a decision is private. By default, authors don't see the decision — or the reviews — until you **release** that phase's results, a separate and explicit step. Recording, updating, or clearing a decision never reaches authors on its own.

Exactly when decisions and reviews become visible is controlled by two per-track settings, and releasing is one click per phase (or an automatic toggle when you send decision emails).

See [Release Decisions & Reviews to Authors](/docs/track-chairs/release-results) for the visibility settings, the Release button on the Decisions page, the toggle on decision-letter emails, multi-phase behavior, and hiding a released phase.

---

## Change a Decision

If the **current phase** already has a decision, the card shows the recorded decision with the edit form collapsed behind a **"Change Decision"** button.

1. Click **"Change Decision"** — the form expands, pre-filled with the current values
2. Select a new decision from the dropdown and update either notes field if needed
3. Click **"Update Decision"** — or **"Cancel"** to collapse the form without changes

To clear the current phase's decision entirely, select **"Clear Decision"** from the dropdown.

Changing or clearing a decision only affects the **current phase** — decisions recorded in earlier phases stay in the timeline untouched. The full timeline shows every phase's decision (who decided, when, and any notes), so nothing is lost when you update the current one.

---

## Review Summary

Above the Decision card, the sidebar shows a **Review Summary** card with:

- **Completed** and **Pending** review counts
- **Average Score** and **Average Confidence** across all submitted reviews
- A **View Submission** link to see the full submission details

---

## Multi-Phase Reviews

For tracks with multiple phases, the reviews page shows additional context:

- **Phase badge on each review** — Each review card shows which phase it belongs to (e.g., "Initial Submission" or "Camera Ready"), so you can distinguish reviews from different rounds
- **Phase context banner** — When navigating from the Decisions page with a specific phase selected, a banner at the top shows which phase you're viewing in context of
- **Back navigation preserves phase** — Clicking "Back to Decisions" returns you to the same phase you came from
- **Per-phase decisions** — Each phase gets its own decision. When you move a submission to a later phase with **Phase Transitions**, it returns to *under review* for the new phase and shows **"Awaiting decision"** until you decide again. The earlier phase's decision isn't lost or carried forward as the current one — it stays in the timeline as that phase's outcome

The Reviews & Decisions page always shows reviews from **all phases** — it does not filter them. The phase badges help you identify which round each review is from.

---

## Bulk Decisions

When most submissions should receive the same decision, use **bulk decisions** to apply a decision to multiple submissions at once, then adjust individually as needed.

The bulk action toolbar is always visible at the top of the submission list, with a **Select all** checkbox, a **Bulk decision** dropdown, and an **Apply** button.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/make-decisions/bulk-default.png" alt="Decisions page with the bulk action toolbar showing Select all checkbox and disabled controls" width="800" />

### Apply a Bulk Decision

1. Select submissions using the individual checkboxes, or click the **Select all** checkbox to select all submissions on the current page
2. Choose a decision from the **Bulk decision** dropdown — two notes textareas appear once a decision is selected:
   - **Notes for Authors** — applied to all selected submissions and included in their decision emails
   - **Notes for Chairs** — marked with the amber **INTERNAL · NOT SENT TO AUTHORS** pill; applied to all selected submissions but visible only to chairs and editors

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/make-decisions/bulk-decision-notes.png" alt="Bulk decision toolbar with both author-facing and chair-only notes textareas after selecting a decision" width="800" />

3. Click **"Apply"**

If any selected submissions already have a decision, a confirmation dialog appears showing a summary of which decisions will be overwritten. Click **"Apply to All"** to proceed or **"Cancel"** to go back.

<Callout type="warning" title="Existing notes are overwritten">
When you apply a bulk decision to submissions that already have a decision, both notes fields are replaced with the bulk values (or cleared if left empty). Previous decisions and notes are preserved in the decision history.
</Callout>

---

## Notify Authors of Decisions

After making decisions, click **"Notify"** on the Reviews & Decisions page to open the notification composer pre-configured for your track's authors. See [Send Notifications](/docs/chairs/send-notifications) for details.

<Callout type="info" title="Review file attachments are flagged in the email">
If a reviewer uploaded a file (e.g. an annotated PDF) using a review-form file field marked **visible to authors**, the decision email automatically includes a note telling the author how many reviews include attachments and prompting them to sign in to download. You don't need to mention it manually.
</Callout>

---

# Manage Submission Deadline

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/manage-submission-deadline
Description: Configure submission deadlines, late submission windows, and control when authors can submit submissions

1. Log in to your PaperFox account and go to your dashboard
2. Click the conference you want to manage
3. Navigate to your track management page

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/invite-trackchair/manage-track.png" alt="Track Management Page" width="800" />

4. In the **Submission Management** section, click **"Submission Settings"** to expand the settings — the collapsed row shows a one-line summary of the current status and deadline

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/submission-deadline.png" alt="Submission Deadline Settings" width="800" />

## Enable or Disable Submissions

Use the **Accept Submissions** toggle to control whether authors can submit submissions to your track:

- Toggle **ON** - Authors can access the submission form and submit submissions
- Toggle **OFF** - The submission form becomes unavailable to authors

Changes save automatically when you toggle the switch.

You can also click **"Open submission page"** to preview the submission form as authors see it (opens in a new tab).

## Set Submission Deadline

Configure when submissions close for your track:

1. Ensure **Accept Submissions** is toggled ON
2. Enter a date in the **Submission Deadline** field or click the calendar icon to pick a date

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/submission-date.png" alt="Submission Date Picker" width="800" />

3. Choose your **Timezone** from the dropdown menu
   - Default timezone is **AOE (Anywhere on Earth)**
   - Other options include UTC, EST, PST, GMT, and more

All settings save automatically as you make changes.

**To remove a deadline:** Click the **X** button inside the date field to clear it. This keeps submissions open indefinitely (until you manually disable them).

## Late Submission Window

You can optionally allow late submissions after the deadline. This keeps the system open for a grace period — any submissions made after the deadline but before the late cutoff are accepted but marked as **Late**.

The **Late Submission Until** field is always visible next to the submission deadline. It is disabled until you set a submission deadline first.

1. Set a **Submission Deadline** first (the late submission field becomes enabled once a deadline is set)
2. In the **Late Submission Until** field, enter the date when the system should fully close
3. The late deadline shares the same timezone as the submission deadline

**To remove the late window:** Click the **X** button inside the **Late Submission Until** date field to clear it.

**How it works:**

| Time Period | System Behavior |
|---|---|
| Before deadline | Submissions accepted normally |
| Between deadline and late cutoff | Submissions accepted, marked as **Late** |
| After late cutoff | Submissions closed |

**What authors see:**
- Authors are shown a warning banner on the submission page: *"The submission deadline has passed. You may still submit, but your submission will be marked as late."*
- The public conference page only displays the regular deadline — the late cutoff is not shown to authors

**What chairs see:**
- The track's **Submission Settings** show **"Accepting late submissions"** while the late window is active
- Late submissions display a **Late** badge in the submissions list

## Submission Status

The system automatically updates the submission status based on your settings:

- **Authors can submit to this track** - Submissions are enabled and the deadline has not passed
- **Accepting late submissions** - The deadline has passed but the late submission window is still open
- **Submissions closed - deadline has passed** - The deadline (and late cutoff, if set) has passed

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/form-configuration/submission-closed.png" alt="Submission Closed Status" width="800" />

Once a deadline passes (and no late window is configured), the submission form automatically closes even if the toggle remains ON. To extend the submission period, you can either edit the deadline or set a late submission window.

<Callout type="info" title="The deadline controls new submissions, not editing existing ones">
Passing the deadline stops *new* submissions from being created, but authors can still edit submissions they already submitted (until review begins). To freeze editing on a date, set a **Revision Deadline** on the phase — it's enforced by default. See [Submission Edit Rules](/docs/track-chairs/submission-edit-rules).
</Callout>

## Late Submission Link

Sometimes you need to let one *specific* author submit after your track has closed — without reopening the deadline for everyone. The **Late Submission Link** is a private link you share with that author: anyone signed in who opens it can submit to this track, even when submissions are otherwise closed.

This is different from the **Late Submission Window** above. The late window is a time-based grace period that applies to *everyone* until a cutoff date. The late link is a manual override you hand to individuals, and it works even when the track is fully closed — deadline passed **and** Accept Submissions off.

1. Under **Submission Settings**, turn on the **Late Submission Link** toggle
2. A private link appears — click **"Copy"**, then send it to the author who needs to submit

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/manage-submission-deadline/late-submission-link.png" alt="Late Submission Link toggle with a copyable private URL" width="800" />

**Revoke or rotate a link:** Click **"Regenerate"** to mint a new link and immediately invalidate the one you shared earlier. Turn the toggle **OFF** to disable the link entirely once the late window is over.

**What authors see:** An author who opens the link gets the submission form with an amber banner — *"The submission deadline has passed. You're submitting through a late-submission link from the organizers. Your submission will be marked as late."* — and their submission still gets the **Late** badge in your submissions list.

<Callout type="warning" title="The link only bypasses the deadline">
Anyone signed in who has the link can submit to this track, so share it only with the authors who need it and regenerate it if it leaks. The link never bypasses your conference's submission limit or payment requirements — those still apply.
</Callout>

## Notifications

Configure email notifications for new submissions:

**Notify on New Submission** - When enabled, all track chairs receive an email notification whenever an author submits a submission to your track. This toggle sits inside the track's **Submission Settings**.

---

# Release Decisions & Reviews to Authors

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/release-results
Description: Configure when authors see decisions and reviews, then release results per phase

PaperFox keeps a submission's outcome private while you work, then releases it to authors on your signal. Two things control this:

1. **Two per-track settings** decide *what waits for release* — when authors see **decisions**, and when they see **reviews**.
2. **One "Release" button** per phase is the moment those results reach that phase's authors.

You configure the settings once per track, then release each phase when you're ready. Recording a decision is always private work until then — you can deliberate, change, or clear it without anything reaching the author.

<Callout type="info" title="Release, publish, and share">
Three different words in PaperFox, on purpose. **Release** sends a phase's decisions and reviews to its authors (this page). **Publish** makes something public to the world — your program, website, or public registrant list. **Share** hands one specific document to a specific audience — a paper's AI review to its authors or to one reviewer — and takes effect immediately, independent of release.
</Callout>

<Callout type="info" title="Who can release results?">
Conference chairs, track chairs, and senior editors can configure visibility settings and release or hide results for any phase in their track.
</Callout>

---

## Choose What Authors See

Go to your track management page (**Conferences → your conference → your track**) and find the **Review Management** section. Click **"Review Settings"** to expand the settings — the collapsed row shows a one-line summary of the current values. Two dropdowns sit under **Review Type** — both save automatically when you pick an option.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/release-results/visibility-settings.png" alt="Review Management section with the Decision Visibility and Review Visibility dropdowns highlighted" width="600" />

**Decision Visibility to Authors** — when authors see the accept/reject/revision decision:

| Option | Authors see the decision… |
|--------|---------------------------|
| **When Released** (default) | Once you release the phase's results |
| **Immediately When Recorded** | The moment you enter it |

**Review Visibility to Authors** — when authors see the reviewer scores, comments, and files:

| Option | Authors see the reviews… |
|--------|--------------------------|
| **When Released, After Decision** (default) | After you release, once their submission also has a decision |
| **When Released** | As soon as you release — no decision required |
| **Immediately When Submitted** | The moment each reviewer submits — no release step |

The two settings are independent. A common combination beyond the defaults: set **Review Visibility** to *Immediately When Submitted* while leaving **Decision Visibility** at *When Released* — reviews stream to authors as they come in, but the decision stays private until you announce it.

---

## Release from the Decisions Page

Open the **Reviews & Decisions** page for your track. A banner sits at the top, above the statistics cards.

When the phase hasn't been released, the banner is amber:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/release-results/banner-not-published.png" alt="Reviews & Decisions page with the amber 'Results not released to authors' banner and the Release Results button highlighted" width="800" />

1. Click the **Release** button on the right
2. Confirm in the dialog

The button names exactly what a click will reveal, based on your two settings — **"Release Results"** when both decisions and reviews are waiting, or **"Release Decisions"** / **"Release Reviews"** when only one is. Once released, the banner turns green and shows who released and when:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/release-results/banner-published.png" alt="Green 'Results released to authors' banner showing the chair name, release date, and a Hide from Authors button" width="800" />

<Callout type="info" title="No release step needed?">
If you set both **Decision Visibility** and **Review Visibility** to their "Immediately" options, nothing waits on release — the banner becomes a plain note instead of a button, because everything reaches authors as it's recorded or submitted.
</Callout>

---

## Release While Sending Decision Emails

When you send a decision letter (Acceptance, Major Revision, Rejection, etc.) from the **Notify** menu, a confirm dialog appears with a **"Release this phase's results with this email"** toggle, defaulted ON.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/release-results/decision-send-modal.png" alt="Send decision letter dialog with the results toggle highlighted" width="600" />

- Leave the toggle on so the phase is released atomically with the send — authors get the email and can see their results together.
- Uncheck it to send the email only and release manually later from the Decisions page.

The toggle only appears for decision-letter templates. A generic blast or a non-decision template never releases results.

---

## Hide a Released Phase

If you released by mistake, click **"Hide from Authors"** in the green banner. The phase goes back to unreleased, and authors who haven't opened their pages yet stop seeing results.

<Callout type="warning" title="Hiding isn't a full undo">
Authors who already opened their reviews page have already seen the content. Hiding only affects authors who haven't viewed them yet — use it to catch a mistake quickly, not as a routine "preview, then release" workflow.
</Callout>

---

## Multi-Phase Tracks

Release is per phase. Releasing **Phase 1: Submission** doesn't touch **Phase 2: Camera Ready** or any later phase. Switch phases using the **Phase** selector at the top-right of the Reviews & Decisions page — each phase has its own banner and its own release state.

This lets you run a private second-round review without exposing it to authors until you're ready.

---

## What Authors See

Until a phase is released (and, in the default review setting, until their submission also has a decision), authors see their submission as **Under Review** with no decision or review content — regardless of what you've recorded privately. After release, they see their decision, full review scores and comments, and any reviewer-attached files marked visible to authors, according to the two settings above.

<Callout type="info" title="Chair preview of the author view">
When a chair visits the author reviews page at `/submissions/{slug}/reviews`, PaperFox shows the **author preview** — gated exactly as the author would see it, with a yellow banner reminding you that scores and reviewer identities are hidden. Use the **Management view** link on the banner to switch back to the unrestricted chair view.
</Callout>

<Callout type="info" title="Management views are never gated">
Track chairs, conference chairs, senior editors, associate editors, and the reviewers themselves always see decisions and completed reviews on the Reviews & Decisions page as soon as they come in. Releasing only affects the author-facing pages.
</Callout>

---

## See Also

- [Make Decisions on Submissions](/docs/track-chairs/make-decisions) — record and update decisions
- [Send Notifications](/docs/chairs/send-notifications) — full guide to the notification composer

---

# Remove Reviewers

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/remove-reviewers
Description: How to remove reviewers from a track, including reviewers with active assignments or completed reviews.

## Removing a Reviewer

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, click your conference, then navigate to the track
2. Click **"Reviewers"** in the track management menu
3. Find the reviewer you want to remove and click the trash icon in the **Actions** column

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/remove-reviewer/remove-button.png" alt="Reviewer list with remove button highlighted" width="800" />

## What Happens When You Remove

The behavior depends on the reviewer's activity in the track:

| Scenario | What Happens |
|----------|-------------|
| **No assignments or reviews** | Removed instantly with a success notification |
| **Pending or accepted assignments only** | A warning dialog lists the active assignments that will be deleted — click **"Remove Anyway"** to proceed |
| **Started or submitted reviews** | Removal is blocked — those reviews are part of the conference's permanent record and cannot be deleted |

## Reviewers with Started or Submitted Reviews

Once a reviewer has started or submitted even one review, they can no longer be removed from the track. A dialog explains why:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/remove-reviewer/warning-dialog.png" alt="Dialog explaining a reviewer with an engaged review cannot be removed" width="800" />

To stop such a reviewer from doing further work, cancel their pending assignments individually from the assignment list. The reviewer themselves stays on the track.

<Callout type="warning" title="Reviews are permanent">
  Reviews that have been started or submitted cannot be deleted, so a reviewer who has engaged with any assignment cannot be removed. Reviewers with only pending or accepted assignments (no started reviews) can still be removed — doing so permanently deletes those assignments and cannot be undone.
</Callout>

---

# Collect Author Feedback on Reviews

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/review-feedback
Description: Let authors rate released reviews as helpful or not helpful — visible to chairs only, never to reviewers

Authors read every review; chairs rarely hear what they thought of them. **Review feedback** lets authors rate each released review — **helpful** or **not helpful**, with optional reason tags on a downvote — giving you a private quality signal for your reviewer pool.

Three privacy rules make honest ratings possible:

| Who | Sees author ratings? |
|-----|----------------------|
| **Chairs & track chairs** | Yes — aggregated in Reviewer Analytics |
| **Reviewers** | **Never** — not the votes, not the reasons, not that feedback exists |
| **Other authors** | Never |

The rating row on the author's page says so explicitly — *"Your rating is shared with the chairs only — the reviewer never sees it"* — so authors can be candid without fearing reviewer retaliation.

---

## Turn It On

Review feedback is **off by default** — enable it per track:

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, click your conference, then open your track
2. Under **Review Management**, expand **"Review Settings"**
3. Turn on **"Allow Author Feedback on Reviews"** — it saves immediately

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-feedback/enable-toggle.png" alt="The Review Settings section of the track page with the Allow Author Feedback on Reviews switch highlighted and turned on" width="800" />

Once on, every **released** review on the author's reviews page gains a **"Was this review helpful?"** row with thumbs up/down. The same release rules as review visibility apply — authors can only rate reviews they can already see. Turning the switch off removes the rating rows again (existing votes are kept).

On a downvote, authors can add reason tags: **Inaccurate**, **Too generic**, **Not actionable**, or **Other**. Votes can be changed or retracted at any time.

---

## Read the Feedback

Open **Analytics → Reviewer Analytics** on your track (or the conference) and scroll past the reviewer rankings to the author-feedback tiles:

- **Helpful Rate and Total Votes** — every percentage shows its raw counts beside it; rates from only a few votes swing with every vote, so treat them as anecdotes, not scores
- **Participation** — how many submitted reviews received at least one vote
- **Downvote Reasons** — the tags authors chose, most common first
- **By Reviewer** — votes, helpful counts, and helpful rate per reviewer

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-feedback/reviewer-analytics-feedback.png" alt="Author feedback tiles in Reviewer Analytics — helpful rate, total votes, participation and feedback-enabled counts above the downvote reasons and the per-reviewer table" width="800" />

<Callout type="info" title="A coaching signal, not a scoreboard">
The per-reviewer breakdown is a private signal for chairs — with one vote per author per review, most reviewers accumulate only a handful of votes. Use it to spot patterns worth a conversation, not to rank reviewers.
</Callout>

The **Feedback Enabled** tile shows how many tracks in scope have the switch on — if the block is empty, that's usually why.

---

## AI Reviews Have Their Own Feedback

Shared **AI reviews** get the same helpful/not-helpful voting — on by default, with an optional per-issue rating you can switch on separately — plus a dedicated analytics view. See [Author Feedback on AI Reviews](/docs/track-chairs/ai-review#author-feedback-on-ai-reviews).

---

# Review Progress Matrix

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/review-progress
Description: Track review completion across your track — by submission or by reviewer — and reactivate declined assignments

The Review Progress Matrix gives you a complete view of how reviews are progressing across your track. Switch between two views — **By Submission** (a matrix of every submission and its reviewer slots) and **By Reviewer** (assignments grouped by response status) — and search, filter, export, or send reminders from either one.

## Accessing the Matrix

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Navigate to your track and click **"Review Assignments"**
3. Click **"Review Progress"** at the top of the assignments page

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-progress/progress-matrix.png" alt="Review Progress Matrix in the By Submission view — submissions as rows, reviewer slots as columns" width="800" />

The page opens on the **By Submission** view. You can also reach it from your track page's **Review Management** card via the **"Review Progress"** button, from the **"Progress Matrix"** button on the [Reviews & Decisions](/docs/track-chairs/make-decisions) page, or from the Review Status card on your [Track Dashboard](/docs/track-chairs/track-dashboard).

## Two Views: By Submission and By Reviewer

Use the **By Submission / By Reviewer** toggle above the table to switch views. Both share the same stat cards, search, export, and reminders — and, on multi-phase tracks, the same phase selector.

- **By Submission** — a matrix where each row is a submission and each column is a reviewer slot, color-coded by status. Best for spotting submissions that are short on reviews.
- **By Reviewer** — the same assignments grouped into **Pending**, **Accepted**, **Completed**, and **Declined** tabs, one card per assignment. Best for tracking who has responded and acting on individual invitations.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-progress/by-reviewer.png" alt="By Reviewer view with Pending, Accepted, Completed, and Declined tabs" width="800" />

## Searching

The **Search by submission or reviewer** box filters either view. Type a few letters of a submission title or a reviewer's name and the list narrows to matching assignments — useful for jumping straight to one submission or checking a single reviewer's workload.

## Understanding the Matrix (By Submission)

### Status Badges

Each cell shows the assigned reviewer's name and a color-coded status badge. A compact **Cell key** legend sits inside the matrix so you can glance at it without scrolling:

| Badge | Color | Meaning |
|-------|-------|---------|
| **✓ Completed** | Green | Reviewer has submitted their review |
| **Pending Acceptance** | Yellow | Reviewer hasn't accepted the assignment yet |
| **Not Started** | Orange | Reviewer accepted but hasn't submitted |
| **Declined** | Gray | Reviewer declined the assignment |
| **—** | — | No reviewer assigned to this slot |

Declined slots are hidden by default. Turn on **Show declined** (top-right of the matrix) to reveal them.

### Stats Cards

Four cards above the table summarize overall progress (a fifth **Declined** card appears only when declined assignments exist):

- **Total** — Every review expected in this phase (one per submission × required reviewers). Declined slots still count here.
- **Completed** — Reviews submitted, shown as both a number and a percentage of active reviews.
- **Pending Acceptance** — Invited, awaiting reviewer response.
- **Not Started** — Accepted, no review submitted yet.
- **Declined** — Needs reassignment.

### Phase Selector and Filter

On tracks with more than one review phase, a **Phase selector** appears in the top-right of the page header and switches between phases (e.g., Phase 1: Submission, Phase 2: Revision). The matrix, tabs, and stat cards all update to reflect the selected phase. The page opens to the track's current phase — the furthest phase holding submissions — so once reviews move to a later phase the progress view follows automatically. Single-phase tracks don't show the selector; the whole page is already scoped to their one phase.

In the By Submission view, a **Review status** dropdown filters the matrix:

- **No Reviews Yet** — submissions where no reviews have been completed
- **Reviews In Progress** — some completed, some still outstanding
- **Reviews Complete** — every active slot has a completed review
- **Has Declined** — at least one reviewer declined (needs reassignment)

The headline stat cards stay scoped to the full phase even when a filter or search is applied, so the big numbers don't shift as you narrow the list below.

## Reactivating a Declined Assignment

When a reviewer declines by mistake, reset their invitation back to **Pending** so they can accept or decline again — no need to re-invite from scratch. You can do this from either view.

**By Reviewer** — open the **Declined** tab and click **"Reset to Pending"** on the reviewer's card.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-progress/reset-declined.png" alt="Declined tab showing a Reset to Pending button on a declined assignment card" width="800" />

**By Submission** — turn on **Show declined** (top-right of the matrix), then click the reset (↻) icon on the declined cell.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-progress/reset-declined-matrix.png" alt="By Submission matrix with Show declined on and the reset icon highlighted on a declined cell" width="800" />

Confirm the reset and the invitation returns to that reviewer immediately. To hand the slot to a different reviewer instead, use [Manually Assign Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/assign-reviewers).

## Exporting Progress Data

Click **"Export"** to download the data as CSV or JSON for offline analysis. The export matches the view you're in:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-progress/export-dropdown.png" alt="Export dropdown showing CSV and JSON options" width="800" />

- **By Submission** — one row per assignment slot: submission slug and title, reviewer name/email/affiliation, progress status (matching the matrix badges), per-submission reviews completed/required, and a submission-complete flag. Unassigned slots are included, making under-assigned submissions easy to filter for.
- **By Reviewer** — one row per assignment with reviewer and review-status detail.

## Sending Reminders

Click **"Send Reminder"** to email reviewers who need a nudge:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/review-progress/send-reminder.png" alt="Send Reminder dropdown with pending and not started options" width="800" />

- **Remind Pending Reviewers** — Notifies reviewers who haven't accepted their assignment yet
- **Remind Not Started Reviewers** — Notifies reviewers who accepted but haven't submitted their review

Each option shows the count of unique reviewers who will receive the notification. Clicking an option opens the Notification Composer with the appropriate template pre-filled.

---

See also: [Manually Assign Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/assign-reviewers) for managing individual reviewer assignments.

---

# Set the Review Type

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/set-review-type
Description: Choose whether authors and reviewers can see each other — Double-Blind, Single-Blind, or Open Review.

Each track has a **review type** that controls whether authors and reviewers can see each other's identities. It defaults to **Double-Blind**. You can change it per track at any time — for example, switch to **Open Review** when you want authors and reviewers to collaborate openly throughout the process.

## Change the Review Type

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar and open your conference.
2. Click **"Manage Track"** on the track you want to change.
3. In the **Review Management** section, click **"Review Settings"** to expand the settings.
4. Open the **Review Type** dropdown and choose an option.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/set-review-type/review-type-options.png" alt="Review Settings expanded with the Review Type dropdown highlighted, set to Double-Blind Review" width="800" />

The change saves automatically — there's no separate Save button.

<Callout type="info" title="Who can change this">
Conference chairs and the chairs of the track can set the review type. It applies to that **single track**; set it per track if your conference has more than one.
</Callout>

## What Each Type Means

| Review type | Authors see reviewers? | Reviewers see authors? |
|-------------|------------------------|------------------------|
| **Double-Blind** (default) | No | No |
| **Single-Blind** | No | Yes |
| **Open Review** | Yes | Yes |

Under **Open Review**, authors see their assigned reviewers on the submission detail page once a reviewer **accepts** the assignment — before any review is submitted. Once reviews are released to authors, each reviewer's **name and affiliation** appear next to their review on the author's feedback page.

## What Review Type Does *Not* Control

Review type decides **who each side can see** — never **what a reviewer can read**. On all three types, reviewers see every answer on the submission form except the **Authors** field, which Double-Blind removes.

So a question you add to the submission form — a data availability statement, a methods summary, a reproducibility checklist — reaches your reviewers on a Double-Blind track exactly as it does on an Open one.

<Callout type="warning" title="Don't collect chair-only information on the submission form">
Because reviewers read every submission answer, the submission form is the wrong place for questions meant only for organizers — student status, suggested or excluded reviewers, funding sources. Reviewers will see those answers, and on a Double-Blind track a "suggested reviewers" field names real people, which undoes the blinding. Collect that information outside the submission form.
</Callout>

<Callout type="warning" title="Changing mid-review">
Review type controls visibility in real time. If you switch to Open Review after reviewers are already assigned, their identities become visible to authors immediately — and switching back hides them again. Pick the model before assignments go out when you can.
</Callout>

## See Also

- [Configure Review Forms](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-review-forms#what-authors-see) — how reviewer identity and each review field appear to authors across review types.
- [Release Decisions & Reviews to Authors](/docs/track-chairs/release-results) — the two visibility settings that sit beside Review Type, and when authors actually see decisions and reviews.
- [Share Reviews Between Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/share-reviews-between-reviewers) — whether reviewers can read each other's submitted reviews; review type only controls whether they see each other's *names* there.

---

# Share Reviews Between Reviewers

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/share-reviews-between-reviewers
Description: Let reviewers see each other's submitted reviews — never, after submitting their own, or immediately.

By default, a reviewer sees only their own review. The **Review Visibility to Other Reviewers** setting lets a track share submitted reviews between the reviewers of the same submission — the workflow many committees know from other systems, where a reviewer sees the other reviews once their own is in.

## Change the Setting

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar and open your conference.
2. Click **"Manage Track"** on the track you want to change.
3. In the **Review Management** section, click **"Review Settings"** to expand the settings.
4. Open the **Review Visibility to Other Reviewers** dropdown and choose an option.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/share-reviews-between-reviewers/review-visibility-to-reviewers-options.png" alt="Review Visibility to Other Reviewers dropdown showing Never, After Submitting Their Own Review, and Immediately When Submitted" width="800" />

The change saves automatically — there's no separate Save button.

## What Each Option Means

| Option | When a reviewer sees the other reviews |
|--------|----------------------------------------|
| **Never** (default) | They don't — each reviewer sees only their own review |
| **After Submitting Their Own Review** | Once their own review for that submission is submitted |
| **Immediately When Submitted** | As soon as any co-reviewer submits, even before writing their own |

**After Submitting Their Own Review** is the standard choice for committees that discuss papers: it prevents a reviewer from being influenced by colleagues' opinions before forming their own.

When enabled, the other reviewers' submitted reviews appear in an **Other Reviews** card on each reviewer's review page:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/share-reviews-between-reviewers/other-reviews-card.png" alt="Other Reviews card on the reviewer's review page showing a co-reviewer's submitted review labeled Reviewer #2" width="600" />

Before a reviewer unlocks the card (under **After Submitting Their Own Review**), it shows a locked notice explaining that other reviews become visible after they submit their own — so reviewers always know the feature exists.

## What Stays Hidden

- **Reviewer names.** On Double-Blind and Single-Blind tracks, co-reviews are labeled **"Reviewer #1"**, **"Reviewer #2"**, and so on — reviewers never learn each other's identities. Names appear only when the track's [review type](/docs/track-chairs/set-review-type) is **Open Review**.
- **Confidential Comments for Chairs.** The confidential-comments field is never shared with other reviewers, regardless of this setting.
- **Later phases.** On multi-phase tracks, a reviewer only sees co-reviews up to their own assigned phase, and the "after own review" unlock applies per phase — submitting a Phase 1 review doesn't reveal Phase 2 reviews.

<Callout type="info" title="This setting is about reviewers — authors have their own">
When authors see reviews is governed separately by **Review Visibility to Authors** in the same Review Settings panel — see [Release Decisions & Reviews to Authors](/docs/track-chairs/release-results). The two settings don't affect each other.
</Callout>

<Callout type="info" title="Delegated reviews count">
If a reviewer [delegated their review to a sub-reviewer](/docs/track-chairs/enable-sub-reviewers), the completed sub-review counts as their own submitted review — both the delegator and the sub-reviewer unlock the other reviews once the sub-review is in.
</Callout>

## See Also

- [Set the Review Type](/docs/track-chairs/set-review-type) — controls whether reviewer *identities* are visible; this setting controls review *content* between reviewers.
- [Configure Review Forms](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-review-forms) — per-field visibility for authors, and which fields co-reviewers see.
- [Release Decisions & Reviews to Authors](/docs/track-chairs/release-results) — the author-facing visibility settings beside this one.

---

# Submission Edit Rules

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/submission-edit-rules
Description: Understand when authors can and cannot edit their submissions, and how to control editing after acceptance

PaperFox automatically locks and unlocks a submission for editing based on its state in the review workflow. This page explains every rule, plus the settings chairs can use to customize behavior after the revision deadline and after acceptance.

## Who Can Edit

| Role | When They Can Edit |
|------|-------------------|
| **Submitting author** | Whenever the submission is unlocked (see rules below) — this is the person who created the submission |
| **Co-authors** | Never — only the submitting author has edit access |
| **Track chair** | Always, regardless of state |
| **Conference chair / creator** | Always, regardless of state |

Co-authors who need a change must ask the submitting author or a track chair to make it for them.

## Edit a Submission as a Chair

Chairs can edit any submission on their track at any time, including after the revision deadline has passed, after a decision, and while reviews are in progress. This is how you help an author who missed the deadline — you fix their submission without reopening editing for everyone who submitted on time.

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Click on the track, then click **"Submissions"**
3. Click the submission you want to edit
4. In the right sidebar under **Submission Status**, click **"Edit Submission"**

When the authors themselves cannot edit the submission, an amber note above the button tells you exactly why.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/submission-edit-rules/chair-edit-button.png" alt="Submission detail page showing an amber note reading Authors cannot edit this submission, with the Edit Submission button highlighted below it" width="800" />

The edit form repeats the warning at the top, naming your role and every rule your edit is stepping over.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/submission-edit-rules/chair-edit-warning.png" alt="Edit form with an amber banner reading You are editing this submission as a Conference Chair, listing Editing is paused while reviewers are reading this version" width="800" />

Make your changes and click **"Save Revision"**. Three things happen automatically:

- The revision is recorded under **your** name in the submission's **Version History** and in the activity log, alongside the specific rules you overrode.
- **"Notify all authors about this revision"** is checked by default, so the authors receive an email describing what changed. Uncheck it if you'd rather tell them yourself.
- On multi-phase tracks, the phase status badge (on the submission detail card, the submissions list, and the decisions page) shows **"Edited by chair"** — so your edit is never mistaken for the author's revision or for silence. If the author later submits their own revision, the badge switches to **"Revised by author"**.

<Callout type="warning" title="Editing during active review">
Chairs can also edit while reviewers are actively reviewing the submission. The reviewers will see your new version, not the one they started on. Read the amber banner before saving — if it lists **"Editing is paused while reviewers are reading this version."**, your edit will swap the submission out from under the reviewers.
</Callout>

<Callout type="info" title="This is not the same as submitting on behalf of an author">
[Submit on Behalf](/docs/track-chairs/submit-on-behalf) creates a **new** submission for an author. Use it when someone missed the *submission* deadline and has no submission in the system yet. To fix a submission that already exists, use the chair edit described above — submitting on behalf would create a duplicate with a new submission number and no review history.
</Callout>

## When the Submission Is Locked

A submission is locked for authors (but still editable by chairs) in any of these cases:

| Condition | Effect | Recoverable? |
|-----------|--------|--------------|
| **Submission is withdrawn** | Locked | Only by restoring from withdrawal |
| **Decision: Reject** | Locked permanently | No |
| **Decision: Desk Reject** | Locked permanently | No |
| **Decision: Accept** (default) | Locked | Yes — chair can enable post-accept editing per track |
| **A reviewer has accepted an assignment** in the current phase, *and* a version has already been submitted for that phase | Locked during active review | Unlocks automatically after a decision (revision or accept with setting on) — see [Revision phases](#reviews-in-flight-vs-revision-phases) |
| **The current phase's revision deadline has passed** and that deadline is **Enforced** (the default) | Locked | Yes — a chair can edit the submission directly, extend the deadline, or switch the deadline to not enforced on the Phases page |
| **Author Editing is off** for the current phase | Locked | Yes — turn **Author Editing** back on for that phase |

### Reviews in Flight vs. Revision Phases

The "a reviewer accepted an assignment" lock exists to stop the submission changing underneath someone who is mid-review. It therefore only applies once there is a new submission for that phase — which is not automatic. When you move a track into a revision phase, PaperFox carries the previous version forward so reviewers always have something to open, but that carried-forward copy is not the author's revision. Until the author submits, reviewers assigned in the new phase are reading the *previous* phase's text.

| Situation | Can the author edit? |
|-----------|----------------------|
| Single-phase track — the author submitted, a reviewer accepted the assignment | **No** — locked while the review is in flight |
| Revision phase — the author has submitted their revision, reviewers are reading it | **No** — locked, same as any other phase |
| Revision phase — the author has *not* submitted yet, but a reviewer already accepted an assignment | **Yes** — the phase is waiting on the author, so editing stays open |

The lock re-arms as soon as the author submits their revision: from that point the submission is frozen for the rest of the phase, exactly as in the first two rows.

<Callout type="info" title="Assign reviewers whenever you like">
Because of the third row, you can assign reviewers for a revision phase before the authors have finished revising — the assignments sit there and the authors are not blocked. Reviewers see a notice on the review page telling them whether a revision has actually landed for their round, so nobody reviews an unchanged submission by accident.
</Callout>

## When the Submission Is Editable

A submission is editable by the submitting author when **none** of the above conditions apply. In practice this means:

- **Before the submission deadline** — authors can freely edit their submission
- **After the submission deadline, before any reviewer accepts an assignment** — still editable. The submission deadline controls when *new* submissions can be created, not when existing ones are frozen; only a phase's **revision deadline** locks editing
- **In a revision phase the author hasn't submitted into yet** — editable even if reviewers have accepted assignments, because there is no revision for them to be reading yet
- **After a Major Revision or Minor Revision decision** — editing reopens so authors can revise and resubmit, until the phase's revision deadline passes (if one is set and enforced)
- **After an Accept decision** — only if the track has **Allow Editing After Acceptance** turned on (see below)

## Author Editing (Phase Setting)

Each phase has an **Author Editing** switch (**Settings** → **Phases** → **Phase Settings**, under **Authors**). It is **on** by default. Turn it off and authors cannot edit their submission in that phase — regardless of deadlines, decisions, or whether reviews are in progress. They're told the chairs have closed editing, which is exactly what happened.

This is the setting to use when a phase isn't for author work at all. The revision deadline answers a different question — *when* editing closes — and only makes sense while editing is open.

<Callout type="warning" title="A back-dated deadline is not the same thing">
Setting the **Revision Deadline** to a past date also blocks authors, but it tells them a deadline passed when none ever existed, and it silently does nothing unless that deadline's **Enforced** switch is also on. Reach for **Author Editing** when you mean "closed".
</Callout>

As with every other rule on this page, chairs are unaffected — you can still edit a submission in a phase with editing closed, and the amber banner lists **"The chairs have closed editing for this phase."** among the rules you're overriding.

## Revision Deadline Enforcement (Phase Setting)

Each phase's **Revision Deadline** carries its own **Enforced** switch, right below the date on the Phases page (**Settings** → **Phases** → **Phase Settings**). With it **on** (the default), authors can no longer edit their submission once the deadline passes. Switch it **off** to make the deadline informational: authors still see the date on their submission page as guidance, but a late revision is quietly accepted — no support email, no chair intervention.

Because enforcement is per phase, each revision phase on a multi-track workflow locks on its own schedule — and one phase can be strict while another stays soft. See [Configure Track Phases](/docs/track-chairs/configure-track-phases) for where the switch lives.

Chairs are never affected either way — you can still edit any submission after the deadline (that's how you help an author who has a legitimate reason to change something), and the amber banner on the edit form lists the passed deadline among the rules you're overriding.

### When to Soften a Deadline

Keep the deadline **Enforced** if your venue treats it as a hard freeze — the version on file at the deadline is the version reviewers see. Switch it off when the date is a target rather than a cutoff:

- **Rolling or lenient revision windows** — you'd rather accept a revision two days late than exchange emails about it
- **Small venues with hands-on chairs** — the deadline sets expectations; the chair decides case by case
- **Early planning** — you want authors to see the expected date before you're ready to commit to enforcement

<Callout type="info" title="This is separate from Accept Submissions">
The revision deadline governs *editing existing* submissions; the **Accept Submissions** toggle and the submission deadline govern *creating new* ones. You can close new submissions while still allowing edits — the controls are independent.
</Callout>

## Allow Editing After Acceptance (Track Setting)

By default, authors of accepted submissions can keep editing — this is what most venues want, since acceptance is usually followed by a camera-ready or corrections phase. Turn **Allow Editing After Acceptance** *off* if your venue treats acceptance as final and you don't want any further changes.

### Enable on a Track

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Click on the track you want to configure
3. In the **Review Management** section, click **"Review Settings"** to expand the settings
4. Find **"Allow Editing After Acceptance"** and toggle it on or off

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/submission-edit-rules/toggle.png" alt="Allow Editing After Acceptance toggle in the Review Management card" width="800" />

The setting takes effect immediately for every submission on this track. Rejections and revision decisions are unaffected — rejections stay locked, revisions stay editable. Only the **Accept** case is controlled by this toggle.

### When to Enable It

Turn this on if your venue has any of these workflows:

- **Camera-ready submissions** — authors upload the final version after acceptance
- **Post-acceptance corrections** — authors need to fix typos, update affiliations, or adjust metadata before publication
- **Shepherding** — a chair or shepherd asks authors to make specific changes after acceptance

If your venue treats acceptance as final, leave it **off**.

<Callout type="info" title="Author list changes after acceptance">
When this setting is on, authors can also add or remove co-authors from an accepted submission. Every edit is captured as a new submission version with the full author list snapshot, and a `SUBMISSION_REVISE` entry is written to the activity log (who revised, what authors were added or removed), so any change is fully auditable. If you need author-list changes to go through chair approval instead, turn the setting off and make the edits yourself as a track chair — you can always edit any submission regardless of this toggle.
</Callout>

## Quick Reference: Decision Types

| Decision | Editable by Author? | Notes |
|----------|---------------------|-------|
| No decision yet | Yes (until a reviewer accepts) | The "reviewer accepted" trigger locks the submission mid-review — but only once a version exists for the current phase |
| **Major Revision** | Yes | Until the phase's revision deadline passes, unless that deadline is switched to not enforced |
| **Minor Revision** | Yes | Until the phase's revision deadline passes, unless that deadline is switched to not enforced |
| **Accept** | Only with setting on | Controlled by **Allow Editing After Acceptance** |
| **Reject** | No | Permanent lock |
| **Desk Reject** | No | Permanent lock |

## Default Behavior

- **Author Editing** — on by default for every phase, so a new phase never locks authors out by surprise.
- **Revision deadline enforcement** — on by default for every deadline. A phase with no revision deadline never locks editing on a date; setting one locks authors out when it passes, unless you switch that deadline to not enforced.
- **Allow Editing After Acceptance** — on by default. This matches the workflow of most academic venues, which run a camera-ready or corrections phase after acceptance. Turn it off per track if your venue treats acceptance as final.

These settings only ever restrict *authors* — chairs can still edit any submission on their track at any time.

---

# Submit on Behalf of Authors

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/submit-on-behalf
Description: How conference chairs and track chairs can submit submissions on behalf of authors

As a conference chair or track chair, you can submit submissions on behalf of authors who may need assistance — for example, authors who missed the deadline or are having technical difficulties.

<Callout type="info" title="Fixing a submission that already exists?">
This page covers creating a **new** submission for an author. To change a submission that has already been submitted — including after the revision deadline has passed — see [Submission Edit Rules](/docs/track-chairs/submission-edit-rules). Submitting on behalf would create a duplicate with a new submission number and no review history.
</Callout>

## Accessing the Submission Form

Navigate to your track management page and click **"Open submission form"** to go directly to the submission form for your track.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/submit-on-behalf/submission-form-link.png" alt="Track management page showing Open submission form link highlighted" width="800" />

## Two Submission Modes

When you visit the submission page for a track you manage, a blue info box appears at the top of the form with two options:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/submit-on-behalf/coauthor-mode.png" alt="Chair submit toggle showing two options: Submit as an author/co-author (selected) and Submit on behalf of another author" width="800" />

| Mode | When to Use | You in Author List? | Submission Owner |
|------|------------|---------------------|-------------|
| **Submit as an author/co-author** | You are one of the submission's authors | Yes (required) | You |
| **Submit on behalf of another author** | You are helping someone else submit | No (not allowed) | Designated author |

---

## Submit as an Author/Co-author (Default)

This is the default mode. Use it when you are one of the submission's authors.

1. Navigate to the track's submission page
2. The **"Submit as an author/co-author"** option is selected by default
3. Fill in the form as usual — you **must** add yourself to the author list
4. Click **"Make a Submission"**

The submission is created with you as the owner and appears in your **My Submissions** page.

---

## Submit on Behalf of Another Author

Use this mode when submitting a submission for someone else. You will **not** be listed as an author.

1. Navigate to the track's submission page
2. Select **"Submit on behalf of another author"**
3. Fill in the submission details (title, abstract, keywords, file)
4. Add the actual authors — do **not** add yourself
5. Designate the **Submission Owner** by checking the **"Submission owner"** checkbox on the appropriate author

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/submit-on-behalf/paper-owner.png" alt="Author card showing Submission owner checkbox with Owner badge highlighted" width="800" />

6. Click **"Make a Submission"**

<Callout type="info" title="Submission ownership">
The designated submission owner becomes the submission's creator. The submission appears in **their** My Submissions page, not yours. If the owner doesn't have a PaperFox account yet, one is automatically created for them.
</Callout>

---

## Who Can Use This Feature

Both **conference chairs** and **track chairs** see the submission toggle on tracks they manage. Regular authors do not see it.

| Role | Sees Toggle? | Can Submit on Behalf? |
|------|-------------|----------------------|
| Conference Chair | Yes (all tracks) | Yes |
| Track Chair | Yes (their tracks) | Yes |
| Regular Author | No | No |

---

# Track Chair Workflow

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/track-chair-workflow
Description: Complete step-by-step workflow for track chairs managing conference tracks

This guide outlines the essential workflow for track chairs from initial setup through review management and decision making.

## Quick Task List

1. [Invite co-track chairs](#1-invite-co-track-chairs)
2. [Configure phases](#2-set-up-phases)
3. [Customize submission and review forms](#3-customize-forms)
4. [Set submission deadlines](#4-configure-submission-settings)
5. [Invite reviewers](#5-invite-reviewers)
6. [Assign submissions to reviewers](#6-assign-submissions)
7. [Send review notifications](#6-assign-submissions)
8. [Make and communicate decisions](#7-make-decisions--release-results)
9. [Move submissions to next phase](#8-manage-phase-transitions)

## Track Management Workflow

Follow these steps to successfully manage your conference track:

### 1. Invite Co-Track Chairs
After being appointed as track chair, invite others to help manage the track.
- **[Invite Track Chairs](invite-track-chairs)** - Invite additional track chairs to collaborate

### 2. Set Up Phases

- **[Configure Track Phases](configure-track-phases)** - Understanding and managing phases in your track

### 3. Customize Forms
Design submission and review forms for each phase.
- **[Configure Track-level Submission Forms](configure-track-submission-forms)** - Configure fields for author submissions
- **[Configure Track-level Review Forms](configure-track-review-forms)** - Set up evaluation criteria for reviewers

### 4. Configure Submission Settings
Set deadlines and control submission access.
- **Submission Deadlines** - Set submission opening and closing dates
- **Access Control** - Open or close submissions as needed

### 5. Invite Reviewers
Build your reviewer pool for the track.
- **[Invite Reviewers](invite-reviewers)** - Send invitations to potential reviewers

### 6. Assign Submissions
Distribute submissions to reviewers for evaluation.
- **[Manually Assign Reviewers](assign-reviewers)** - Assign reviewers to submissions
- **Notify Reviewers** - Alert reviewers about their assignments

### 7. Make Decisions & Release Results
Evaluate reviews and make acceptance decisions — recorded privately until you release them.
- **Decision Making** - Accept, reject, or request revisions
- **[Release Results](release-results)** - Release decisions and reviews to authors with one click per phase (two per-track settings control exactly what a release reveals)
- **Author Notifications** - Notify authors of decisions with next steps

### 8. Manage Phase Transitions
Move accepted submissions to the next phase if needed.
- **Phase Progression** - Transition submissions between phases
- **Repeat Workflow** - Continue the process for subsequent phases

---

# Track Dashboard

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/track-dashboard
Description: View track-level statistics, review and decision status, and recent activity at a glance

The Track Dashboard gives track chairs a centralized overview of their track — who's on the committee, how the reviewing is going, what's been decided, and what's due next.

## Accessing the Dashboard

1. Go to **Conferences** in the sidebar, then click on your conference
2. Navigate to your track
3. Under **Track Settings**, click **"Track Dashboard"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/track-dashboard/track-management.png" alt="Track Management page with Track Dashboard button highlighted" width="800" />

## Two Bands: the Track, and One Phase of It

The dashboard answers two different questions, so it's split into two bands.

The **track band** at the top — Track Chairs, Submissions, Review Assignments, Reviewers, and Associate Editors — describes the track as a whole. These numbers don't change as work moves through phases. Each card links to its management page.

**Review Assignments** counts reviewer *assignments*, not reviews that have arrived: every phase, including invitations a reviewer declined. Each review slot counts once — a sub-reviewer counts under the reviewer who delegated to them, and a cancelled delegation not at all, since the original reviewer takes the submission back. When some assignments sit on withdrawn submissions, the card notes how many.

**Reviewers** counts your whole reviewer committee. If some of them accepted the invitation but never finished setting up their account, the card notes how many — they can't sign in or be assigned submissions until they do, and they appear greyed out on the assignments page with the same note. This is account setup, not the separate [Research Profile](/docs/users/research-profile).

Everything below the divider describes **one phase**. Submissions sit in exactly one phase at a time, and assignments, reviews, and decisions all belong to a phase — so these numbers only mean something once you say which phase you mean.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/track-dashboard/dashboard-overview.png" alt="Track Dashboard showing the track band, the phase heading with its selector, and the Review Status and Decision Status cards" width="800" />

On multi-phase tracks a **phase selector** sits to the right of the phase heading. The dashboard opens on your track's current phase — the furthest one holding submissions — so use the selector to look back at an earlier phase. **Single-phase tracks show no phase heading and no selector**; the cards simply describe the one phase.

<Callout type="info" title="Withdrawn submissions">
The **Submissions** card counts every submission the track received and notes how many were withdrawn. Their review assignments are still assignments, so they count in the Review Status chart and in **Total Assignments**, and the **Review Assignments** card notes how many of yours sit on withdrawn submissions. They drop out of **Reviews expected** — nobody is waiting on a review for a withdrawn submission — so the completion bar can still reach 100%. **Decision Status** leaves withdrawn submissions out of its chart entirely and notes them beneath.
</Callout>

### Alerts

When the review workflow needs attention, alerts appear above both bands. They span **every** phase, so an alert about phase 2 is never hidden by looking at phase 1:

- **Submissions without a reviewer** — in phases that have a review deadline, with the days remaining
- **Overdue reviews** — reviews still outstanding after the review deadline has passed
- **Ready to release** — every live submission has its reviews in, but results haven't been released to authors yet

Each alert links to the page where you can act on it. When everything is on track, no alerts are shown.

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/track-dashboard/alerts.png" alt="Track Dashboard showing a warning alert about unassigned submissions above the track band and phase cards" width="800" />

### Review Status

How the reviewing is going in this phase. The chart breaks invitations down by what the **reviewer** did with them — **Reviewer accepted**, **Invitation pending**, **Reviewer declined** — so nothing here reads as a decision on the submission. A handover in progress shows as **Delegated to sub-reviewer**, counted once. If the reviewer later cancels that handover, the submission goes back to them and they show as accepted again — a cancelled delegation is never a slice of its own, or the same review slot would count twice.

Beneath the chart, three numbers read as a funnel — each one is the line above it, minus something the chart already shows:

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/track-dashboard/review-status.png" alt="Review Status card showing the invitation breakdown above Total Assignments, Reviews expected, and Reviews in" width="600" />

- **Total Assignments** — every assignment in this phase; the chart's own total
- **Reviews expected** — the ones a review can still arrive from: pending, accepted, and delegated, on a submission that's still live. Declined assignments and any sitting on withdrawn submissions drop out, which is why this number is lower
- **Reviews in** — how many of those have actually been submitted

Click the ℹ️ beside **Reviews expected** for the breakdown on your own numbers. When your track's visibility settings gate results behind release, the release status appears here too — whether decisions and reviews have reached authors yet.

Use **"Assignments"** to manage reviewer assignments, or **"Progress Matrix"** for the per-submission review matrix.

### Decision Status

What happened to this phase's submissions. The chart covers every submission, not just the decided ones: one slice per decision type your conference uses, plus **Not yet decided** for the rest. Click any row to open the decisions page filtered to exactly those submissions.

Conferences with many custom decision types see the largest four, with a **"Show N more"** toggle for the rest. Withdrawn submissions are noted beneath the chart rather than counted in it.

Use **"Decisions"** to open the Reviews & Decisions page.

### Recent Submissions and Upcoming Deadlines

At the bottom, you'll find the five most recent submissions with their status badges, and upcoming review, revision, and author-response deadlines with urgency indicators.

## Switching Tracks

If you manage more than one track, a **track switcher** dropdown appears in the page header. Use it to jump between your tracks without going back to the conference dashboard. The switcher only lists tracks where you hold a track chair, associate editor, or senior editor role — never tracks you don't manage.

The switcher is hidden when you only manage a single track.

## Track-Level Author and Reviewer Analytics

Each track has its own analytics views, scoped to submissions in that track only. Open them with the **"Author Analytics"** and **"Reviewer Analytics"** buttons in the dashboard header:

- **Author Analytics** — country, affiliation, and co-authorship breakdown for your track
- **Reviewer Analytics** — review length distribution and reviewer rankings for your track

Conference chairs see all tracks; track chairs see only the data for tracks they manage.

---

See also: [Review Progress Matrix](/docs/track-chairs/review-progress) for a detailed per-submission view of review completion, and [Make Decisions on Submissions](/docs/track-chairs/make-decisions) for the decision workflow.

---

# Submission + Camera-Ready Workflow

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/two-phase-workflow
Description: Complete guide for track chairs to set up and manage a two-phase submission workflow with initial review and camera-ready collection

This guide walks you through setting up a typical two-phase workflow: **Initial Submission** followed by **Camera Ready** collection for accepted submissions.

## Understanding the Mental Model

Before diving into the setup, it's important to understand how PaperFox handles multi-phase workflows:

### Key Concept: Submissions Are Versioned with Phases

**You don't need new submissions for revisions or camera-ready uploads.** Each submission in PaperFox maintains a complete version history with phase-specific fields:

- **Version 0**: Initial submission (Phase 1 fields)
- **Version 1**: First revision, e.g., camera-ready (Phase 2 fields become available)
- **Version 2, 3, ...**: Additional revisions if needed

When authors update their submission for camera-ready, they simply edit their existing submission. The system automatically creates a new version while preserving the complete audit trail. Each phase can have additional fields (like Camera-Ready PDF, Response to Reviews) that only appear when the submission moves to that phase.

### What This Means for Track Chairs

1. **Close submissions after the deadline** - This prevents new submissions from being submitted, but existing submissions can still be updated
2. **Authors update, not resubmit** - Accepted authors edit their existing submission to upload camera-ready files
3. **Full audit trail** - You can view any previous version of a submission at any time
4. **No duplicate submission IDs** - The same submission ID (e.g., `icai2027-42`) is used throughout the entire workflow

### Phases Control What Authors See

Phases control which form fields are visible to authors at each stage:

- **Phase 1 (Submission)**: Shows fields like Title, Abstract, Authors, Submission PDF
- **Phase 2 (Camera Ready)**: Shows additional fields like Camera-Ready PDF, Response to Reviews, Copyright Form

See [Configure Track Phases](configure-track-phases) and [Configure Track-level Submission Forms](configure-track-submission-forms) for details.

---

## Step-by-Step Setup

### Step 1: Create the Camera Ready Phase

By default, your track has one phase called "Submission". Add a second phase for camera-ready collection:

1. Navigate to your track's **Settings** → **Phases**
2. Click **"Add Phase"**
3. Name it `Camera Ready` and save

You should now see two phases: Submission (Phase 1) and Camera Ready (Phase 2). See [Configure Track Phases](configure-track-phases) for details.

### Step 2: Add Camera Ready Form Fields

Add fields that will appear only in Phase 2. Common camera-ready fields include:

- **Camera-Ready PDF** (File Upload) - Final submission incorporating reviewer feedback
- **Response to Reviews** (Textarea) - How author addressed reviewer comments
- **Copyright Agreement** (Checkbox) - Copyright transfer confirmation

When adding each field, select **"Camera Ready"** as the Phase. See [Configure Track-level Submission Forms](configure-track-submission-forms) for details.

<Callout type="info" title="Separate Camera-Ready PDF field, or reuse the original Submission File?">
  Whether to add a dedicated Camera-Ready PDF field (above) or just let authors replace the original Submission File is a meaningful design choice — it changes where the original PDF lives and what's protected. See [Camera-Ready — How to Handle the File](camera-ready-file-handling) for the two patterns side by side and when to pick each.
</Callout>

### Step 3: Run the Review Process (Phase 1)

With your phases configured, proceed with the standard review workflow:

1. **Open submissions** and collect submissions
2. **Close submissions** after the deadline (prevents new submissions but allows updates)
3. **[Invite reviewers](invite-reviewers)** and **[assign submissions](assign-reviewers)**
4. Collect reviews and monitor progress

### Step 4: Make Decisions

Once reviews are complete, make acceptance decisions from the **Decisions** page:

1. Go to your track's **Decisions** page
2. For each submission, click **"Reviews & Decision"**
3. Read through the reviews on the left, then choose a decision in the right sidebar:
   - **Accept**: Submission accepted for publication
   - **Conditional Accept**: Accepted with minor conditions
   - **Major Revision**: Significant changes required
   - **Minor Revision**: Small changes required
   - **Reject**: Submission not accepted
   - **Desk Reject**: Rejected without review
4. Optionally check **"Notify authors of this decision"** to email authors immediately

See [Make Decisions](make-decisions) for full details.

### Step 5: Move Submissions to Camera Ready Phase

After making decisions, use **Phase Transitions** to move submissions in bulk:

1. Go to the **Reviews & Decisions** page for your track
2. Click **"Phase Transitions"** button in the top-right
3. Select target phase: **"Camera Ready"**
4. Filter by decision types (Accept, Conditional Accept are pre-selected)
5. Review the count of submissions to be moved
6. Click **Continue** → **Confirm**

Submissions are moved to Phase 2. Authors will now see the Camera Ready form fields when editing their submission.

<Callout type="info" title="Decisions are per-phase">
Moving a submission to Phase 2 returns it to *under review* for the new phase — its Phase 1 decision is **not** carried forward. On the submission's decision timeline the Phase 1 decision stays recorded (e.g., "Submission · Accept"), while Phase 2 reads **"Awaiting decision"** until you make a Camera Ready decision (or leave it as-is if your venue doesn't record a second verdict). This keeps each phase's outcome distinct and stops a prior decision from masquerading as the current one.
</Callout>

### Step 5b: Re-Assign Reviewers (If Phase 2 Has Reviews)

If your second phase involves another round of reviews (common for a Revision phase; unusual for camera-ready collection), you'll want the same reviewers who already know each submission:

1. Go to **Review Assignments** — now that submissions are in your second phase, the page opens there automatically (the phase selector is available if you need to switch back)
2. Click **"Copy Reviewers"** — every submission gets pending assignments for its own previous-phase reviewers in one action
3. Click **"Notify Reviewers"** when you're ready to email them

See [Manually Assign Reviewers](assign-reviewers) for details, including the "Reviewed in [phase]" badges that mark previous-phase reviewers.

### Step 6: Notify Authors

Send notifications to inform authors of decisions and next steps. Filter recipients by **Decision: "Accepted"** or **Phase: "Camera Ready"**.

Key points to include in your acceptance notification:
- Congratulate authors on acceptance
- Explain how to update their submission (edit existing, don't create new)
- List the camera-ready fields they need to complete
- Emphasize that updating preserves their original version
- Include the deadline

See [Send Notifications](/docs/chairs/send-notifications) for details on composing and sending notifications.

### Step 7: Monitor Camera Ready Submissions

Track progress of camera-ready uploads from multiple places:

**Track Dashboard** — The **Submissions by Phase** card shows a quick overview: how many submissions are in each phase, how many have been revised, and how many are still awaiting revision.

**Decisions Page** — Once submissions are in Camera Ready, the page opens to that phase by default (use the phase selector to look back at the Submission phase). Each submission shows a badge:
- **Revised by author** (green) — the author has submitted their updated version
- **Edited by chair** (blue) — a chair edited the submission on the author's behalf, but the author hasn't submitted anything themselves
- **No revision yet** (amber) — nobody has submitted a new version in this phase

**Submissions Page** — Use the **Phase** filter dropdown (appears for multi-phase tracks) to view only Camera Ready submissions. Each row shows the phase name badge and update status, and the status filter can isolate **Revised by author**, **Edited by chair**, or **No revision yet** submissions.

**Submission Detail** — The **Submission Status** sidebar card shows the current phase name and revision status for quick reference.

---

## Key Points to Remember

| Aspect | How It Works |
|--------|--------------|
| **New submissions after deadline** | Blocked when submissions are closed |
| **Updates to existing submissions** | Always allowed (creates new version) |
| **Version history** | Full audit trail preserved |
| **Phase-specific fields** | Configure in [Submission Forms](configure-track-submission-forms) |
| **Moving between phases** | Bulk action from Decisions page via Phase Transitions |
| **Reviews in Phase 2** | Optional - use **Copy Reviewers** to carry Phase 1 reviewers over |
| **Revision tracking** | "Revised by author" / "Edited by chair" / "No revision yet" badges on Decisions and Submissions pages |
| **Phase overview** | Track dashboard shows per-phase submission counts with revision status |
| **Decision history** | Each decision records which phase it was made in |

---

## Frequently Asked Questions

**Q: Can authors still see their reviews after I move them to Phase 2?**
A: Yes — all review information is preserved across the phase move. Whether authors can see it follows the phase's release state and the track's visibility settings, just as before (see [Release Decisions & Reviews to Authors](release-results)).

**Q: What if an author accidentally submits a new submission instead of updating?**
A: Close submissions after the initial deadline to prevent this. When submissions are closed, authors can only update existing submissions, not create new ones.

**Q: A reviewer submitted their Phase 2 review before the author revised. Is the author now locked out?**
A: No. Editing only locks once a version has been submitted *for the current phase* — the copy PaperFox carries forward at the phase move doesn't count, because it's the Phase 1 submission. So a reviewer who accepts (or even completes) an assignment early does not block the revision the phase is waiting for. Once the author submits, the submission freezes for the rest of the phase as usual. Full rules: [Submission Edit Rules](submission-edit-rules#reviews-in-flight-vs-revision-phases).

**Q: Can I add more phases (e.g., Revision → Camera Ready)?**
A: Yes, you can add as many phases as needed. See [Configure Track Phases](configure-track-phases).

**Q: Do I need to set up reviewers for Phase 2?**
A: Not typically. Camera-ready collection usually doesn't require peer review. However, you can configure reviews for any phase if needed — use **Copy Reviewers** on the assignments page to re-assign each submission's Phase 1 reviewers in one action.

**Q: Can Phase 1 reviewers see the revised (Phase 2) version of a submission?**
A: Only if you assign them in Phase 2. Reviewer visibility is phase-scoped: an assignment only ever shows the submission as it existed in that assignment's phase, so a reviewer assigned only in Phase 1 never sees later revisions. Copying a reviewer into Phase 2 gives them a new assignment that shows the revised version.

**Q: Can I move submissions back to a previous phase?**
A: No — moves are forward-only, because each phase keeps a permanent record of its reviews and decisions. If you moved submissions by mistake, you can **undo** the move while the new phase is still untouched. For genuine rework, act in the submission's current phase instead. See [Configure Track Phases](configure-track-phases).

---

# Withdraw or Delete Submissions

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/track-chairs/withdraw-and-delete-submissions
Description: Approve author withdrawal requests, withdraw submissions directly, or permanently delete them

There are three ways a submission leaves the review pipeline:

| Action | Triggered By | Effect | Reversible? |
|--------|--------------|--------|-------------|
| **Author withdrawal request** | Author requests, chair approves | Marks as withdrawn after chair approval | Yes — a chair can reinstate |
| **Direct withdrawal** | Track or conference chair | Marks as withdrawn immediately | Yes — a chair can reinstate |
| **Delete** | Track or conference chair | Permanently removes all data | No — permanent |

<Callout type="info" title="Which should I use?">
**Author withdrawal requests** are the standard path — let the author own the decision and approve it from the inbox. **Direct withdrawal** is for cases where the chair acts unilaterally (e.g., desk-withdrawing a duplicate or a submission out of scope). Both can be undone — see [Reinstate a Withdrawn Submission](#reinstate-a-withdrawn-submission). **Delete** is the only irreversible action; use it solely to completely remove a submission and all its data, such as cleaning up [duplicate submissions](/docs/track-chairs/duplicate-detection).
</Callout>

---

## Review Author Withdrawal Requests

When an author submits a withdrawal request, both conference chairs and track chairs are notified by email. Approve or decline from the **Withdrawal Requests** inbox.

1. From the track page, under **Submission Management**, click **"Withdrawal Requests"**
2. Pending requests appear in the **Pending** tab with the author's name, reason, and submission title

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/withdraw-and-delete-submissions/inbox-pending.png" alt="Withdrawal Requests inbox showing one pending request with Decline and Approve buttons" width="800" />

3. Click **"Approve"** or **"Decline"** on the row
4. Optionally add a note — the author sees this on their submission page and in the email
5. Click **"Approve"** (or **"Decline"**) in the confirmation dialog

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/withdraw-and-delete-submissions/decision-dialog.png" alt="Approve withdrawal dialog with a Note to author field and an amber irreversible-action warning" width="800" />

After the decision:
- **Approved** — the submission status changes to **WITHDRAWN**, and authors plus all chairs are notified.
- **Declined** — the submission stays under review. The author sees the decline + your note on their submission page; they cannot re-request through PaperFox.

<Callout type="info" title="Dashboard reminder">
The main **Dashboard** shows a **Pending Withdrawal Requests** banner with a one-click **Review** link to each track's inbox whenever you have requests waiting. The banner only appears when count > 0, so an empty inbox stays out of your way.
</Callout>

---

## Withdraw a Submission Directly

When a chair decides to withdraw a submission without an author request — for example, an out-of-scope submission or a duplicate — use the **Actions** dropdown on the Track Submissions page.

1. From the track page, under **Submission Management**, click **"Submissions"**
2. Find the submission and click the **"Actions"** dropdown
3. Click **"Withdraw Submission"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/withdraw-and-delete-submissions/actions-dropdown.png" alt="Actions dropdown on the Track Submissions page showing Withdraw Submission and Delete Submission" width="800" />

4. Optionally enter a reason for the withdrawal
5. Click **"Withdraw Submission"** to confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/withdraw-and-delete-submissions/withdraw-dialog.png" alt="Withdraw Submission dialog with reason field" width="800" />

<Callout type="info" title="Conference chairs">
Conference chairs see an additional **"Move to Another Track"** option in this dropdown for relocating a submission across tracks.
</Callout>

After a direct withdrawal:
- The submission status changes to **WITHDRAWN**
- All authors, conference chairs, and track chairs are notified
- A record appears in the **Withdrawal Requests** inbox under **Approved**, attributed to you

---

## Reinstate a Withdrawn Submission

If a submission was withdrawn by mistake — or the author asks to continue after all — a track or conference chair can reverse the withdrawal. The submission returns to exactly the status it held before it was withdrawn (for example, an accepted submission goes back to **ACCEPTED**, not the start of the process).

<Callout type="info" title="Withdrawn submissions are hidden by default">
The Track Submissions list hides withdrawn submissions from the default **All Statuses** view so they don't clutter your active queue. To find one, open the status filter and choose **"Withdrawn"** — the count next to it tells you how many there are.
</Callout>

1. From the track page, under **Submission Management**, click **"Submissions"**
2. Open the status filter and select **"Withdrawn"** to show the withdrawn submissions
3. Find the withdrawn submission and click its **"Actions"** dropdown
4. Click **"Reinstate Submission"**

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/withdraw-and-delete-submissions/reinstate-action.png" alt="Track Submissions filtered to Withdrawn, with the Actions dropdown open on a withdrawn submission showing the Reinstate Submission option" width="800" />

4. Optionally add a note explaining why
5. Click **"Reinstate Submission"** to confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/withdraw-and-delete-submissions/reinstate-dialog.png" alt="Reinstate Submission dialog explaining the prior status will be restored, with an optional note field" width="800" />

After reinstating:
- The submission returns to its **previous status** and is back in the review pipeline
- All authors, conference chairs, and track chairs are notified
- The earlier withdrawal record is cleared from the **Withdrawal Requests** inbox

<Callout type="info" title="Deletion can't be reinstated">
Reinstating only undoes a **withdrawal**. A submission that was **deleted** is gone permanently — there is nothing to reinstate.
</Callout>

---

## Delete a Submission

Deleting permanently removes a submission and **all** associated data. Available to track chairs and conference chairs.

1. Click **"Delete Submission"** from the Actions dropdown
2. Review the Danger Zone warning carefully
3. Click **"Delete Submission"** to confirm

<img src="/docs/assets/trackchair/withdraw-and-delete-submissions/delete-dialog.png" alt="Delete Submission confirmation dialog with Danger Zone warning" width="800" />

<Callout type="warning" title="Permanent deletion">
Deleting a submission permanently removes all reviews, review assignments, program items, and revision history. This action cannot be undone.
</Callout>

After deletion:
- The submission and all related data are permanently removed
- You are redirected back to the Track Submissions list

---

# Your review assignments

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/reference/assignments/get

{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}

export default function Layout(props) {
  const { APIPage, OpenAPIPage } = props.components ?? {};
  // "APIPage" is the old name from v10, this allows both for backward compatibility
  const Comp = OpenAPIPage ?? APIPage;
  return (
    <>
      {props.children}
      <Comp document="paperfox" operations={[{"path":"/assignments","method":"get"}]} showDescription />
    </>
  );
}

---

# List conferences you have a role in

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/reference/conferences/get

{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}

export default function Layout(props) {
  const { APIPage, OpenAPIPage } = props.components ?? {};
  // "APIPage" is the old name from v10, this allows both for backward compatibility
  const Comp = OpenAPIPage ?? APIPage;
  return (
    <>
      {props.children}
      <Comp document="paperfox" operations={[{"path":"/conferences","method":"get"}]} showDescription />
    </>
  );
}

---

# Current key identity and roles

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/reference/me/get

{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}

export default function Layout(props) {
  const { APIPage, OpenAPIPage } = props.components ?? {};
  // "APIPage" is the old name from v10, this allows both for backward compatibility
  const Comp = OpenAPIPage ?? APIPage;
  return (
    <>
      {props.children}
      <Comp document="paperfox" operations={[{"path":"/me","method":"get"}]} showDescription />
    </>
  );
}

---

# List registrations (conference chairs only)

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/reference/registrations/get

{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}

export default function Layout(props) {
  const { APIPage, OpenAPIPage } = props.components ?? {};
  // "APIPage" is the old name from v10, this allows both for backward compatibility
  const Comp = OpenAPIPage ?? APIPage;
  return (
    <>
      {props.children}
      <Comp document="paperfox" operations={[{"path":"/registrations","method":"get"}]} showDescription />
    </>
  );
}

---

# List submissions in a conference

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/reference/submissions/get

{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}

export default function Layout(props) {
  const { APIPage, OpenAPIPage } = props.components ?? {};
  // "APIPage" is the old name from v10, this allows both for backward compatibility
  const Comp = OpenAPIPage ?? APIPage;
  return (
    <>
      {props.children}
      <Comp document="paperfox" operations={[{"path":"/submissions","method":"get"}]} showDescription />
    </>
  );
}

---

# Conference detail with tracks and phases

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/reference/conferences/conference-slug/get

{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}

export default function Layout(props) {
  const { APIPage, OpenAPIPage } = props.components ?? {};
  // "APIPage" is the old name from v10, this allows both for backward compatibility
  const Comp = OpenAPIPage ?? APIPage;
  return (
    <>
      {props.children}
      <Comp document="paperfox" operations={[{"path":"/conferences/{conference-slug}","method":"get"}]} showDescription />
    </>
  );
}

---

# Submission detail

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/reference/submissions/submission-slug/get

{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}

export default function Layout(props) {
  const { APIPage, OpenAPIPage } = props.components ?? {};
  // "APIPage" is the old name from v10, this allows both for backward compatibility
  const Comp = OpenAPIPage ?? APIPage;
  return (
    <>
      {props.children}
      <Comp document="paperfox" operations={[{"path":"/submissions/{submission-slug}","method":"get"}]} showDescription />
    </>
  );
}

---

# Full review content (chairs only)

URL: https://paperfox.ai/docs/api/reference/submissions/submission-slug/reviews/get

{/* This file was generated by Fumadocs. Do not edit this file directly. Any changes should be made by running the generation command again. */}

export default function Layout(props) {
  const { APIPage, OpenAPIPage } = props.components ?? {};
  // "APIPage" is the old name from v10, this allows both for backward compatibility
  const Comp = OpenAPIPage ?? APIPage;
  return (
    <>
      {props.children}
      <Comp document="paperfox" operations={[{"path":"/submissions/{submission-slug}/reviews","method":"get"}]} showDescription />
    </>
  );
}

---

# Blog Posts

# The Answer Is in the Docs. Somewhere.

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/ask-ai-docs
Date: 2026-07-16
Category: Product
Tags: AI, Documentation, RAG, Agentic AI

Nobody reads documentation for fun. You open the docs because you're trying to get something done — extend the deadline for just one track, let a reviewer hand a paper to their postdoc, email every author who hasn't registered yet — or because you're wondering whether PaperFox can even do the thing. Either way, you want the answer *now*.

Our docs have those answers. The problem was finding them.

## The Problem: You Have a Question, Search Wants Keywords

Our docs aren't small — nearly a hundred pages, neatly organized by role and feature. That structure is great if you already know your way around. Most people don't. They arrive with one question, shaped like their situation: *"how do I let a reviewer hand a paper to their postdoc?"*

A search box matches words, not meaning — and the page you need is called **Delegating Reviews to Sub-Reviewers**. You need the page to learn what PaperFox calls the thing, but you need the name to find the page. Every docs site has this trap.

## The Fix: Ask in Your Words, Get an Answer with Receipts

Every page of the [PaperFox docs](https://paperfox.ai/docs) now has an **Ask AI** button in the corner. Click it, ask your question the way you'd ask a colleague, and Foxy — PaperFox's AI assistant — answers in seconds: concrete steps, in order, with links to the exact doc pages the answer came from.

<img src="/blog/ask-ai-docs/ask-foxy-answer.png" alt="Ask Foxy panel answering a question about assigning reviewers, with steps and linked doc pages" style={{width: "420px", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem auto", display: "block"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Ask in plain language — Foxy answers with steps and cites the pages it used</em></p>

Those links are the point. AI assistants can be confidently wrong, so Foxy is built to show its receipts: every answer cites the pages it relied on, one click away.

A few practical notes:

- **Sign in to use it.** The button is on every docs page; asking requires a free PaperFox account.
- **It's free.** There are generous fair-use limits to keep things fast for everyone, but no charge — helping you find answers is what the docs are for.
- **Verify the important stuff.** Foxy is grounded in the docs, but it's still an AI. For anything consequential, click the cited page.

## For the Curious: How It Works

*This part is for the technically inclined — feel free to stop here and go ask Foxy something.*

The standard recipe for "chat with your documents" is called **RAG** — retrieval-augmented generation: fetch the relevant documents first, then let the AI answer from them, so the answer is grounded in your content instead of its memory.

Classic RAG pre-processes everything: documents are split into chunks, each chunk becomes an **embedding** (a list of numbers capturing its meaning) stored in a vector database, and each question retrieves the closest chunks before the model ever sees it. Retrieval happens once, up front, by fixed rules.

Ask Foxy uses **agentic RAG** instead: *the model does its own searching*. We give it one tool — a plain keyword search over the doc pages — and it uses it the way a person would: write a query, read the results, rewrite and retry if they come back thin. That retry loop is what makes a simple keyword search feel smart.

Why not classic RAG here? Scale. At under a hundred pages, a keyword index rebuilt on every deploy is enough — no vector database, no embedding costs, no sync pipeline to go stale.

## Try It

Head to [paperfox.ai/docs](https://paperfox.ai/docs), sign in, and click **Ask AI** in the corner. Ask the question you'd normally email us — and check Foxy's receipts.

<img src="/blog/ask-ai-docs/ask-foxy-docs.png" alt="PaperFox docs with the Ask Foxy panel docked on the right, answering a question about assigning reviewers" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Foxy answers alongside the docs — sources one click away</em></p>

---

# Fixing (and Preventing) the Affiliation Data Mess

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/fixing-affiliation-mess
Date: 2026-01-13
Category: Product
Tags: AI, Data Quality, ROR

"MIT", "MIT Sloan", "Sloan School of Management", "Massachusetts Institute of Technology" — these all refer to the same institution, but free-text affiliation fields create endless variations. This messy data causes real problems for conference management.

## The Hidden Cost of Inconsistent Affiliations

When affiliations are entered as free text, the same institution can appear dozens of different ways:

- "CMU", "Carnegie Mellon", "Carnegie Mellon University"
- "NUS", "National University of Singapore", "NUS Business School"
- "LSE", "London School of Economics", "London School of Economics and Political Science"

This inconsistency ripples through the system:

**Conflict of Interest Detection** — If two authors list "Stanford" and "Stanford University", are they from the same institution? Automated COI checks may miss the connection, potentially assigning reviewers to papers from their own colleagues.

**Reviewer Discovery** — When chairs search for reviewers by institution, they may miss qualified candidates simply because the affiliation was entered differently.

**Analytics & Reporting** — Conference statistics on institutional representation become unreliable. Is "UC Berkeley" the same as "University of California, Berkeley"? The data can't tell you.

**Author Profiles** — The same researcher might appear with different affiliations across submissions, making it harder to track contributions and build accurate author profiles.

## Our Solution: AI-Assisted Affiliation Matching

We built a system that links user-entered affiliations to the [Research Organization Registry (ROR)](https://ror.org) — a community-led, open registry of research organizations worldwide. ROR provides unique, persistent identifiers for institutions, solving the consistency problem at its root.

Here's how it works:

### 1. Smart Matching with Country Context

When a user enters their affiliation, we now ask for their country first. This simple UX change dramatically improves matching accuracy.

Consider "CMU" — searching globally returns matches from multiple countries. But when we know the user selected "United States", Carnegie Mellon University rises to the top immediately. Same information from the user, just collected in a smarter order.

### 2. AI Verification with Human Oversight

For unmatched affiliations, we use AI-assisted matching:

1. **ROR API Search** — We query the ROR registry with the user's affiliation text, filtered by their country when available
2. **AI Verification** — GPT-5 with web search verifies the match and identifies the correct institution level (e.g., "MIT Sloan School of Management" should map to "Massachusetts Institute of Technology")
3. **Human Review** — An admin reviews each match before approval, ensuring additional accuracy

### 3. Privacy by Design

We're careful about what data we use when using OpenAI API:

- **Only public information** — Name, affiliation text, country
- **Email domain hints** — Just the part after @ (e.g., "stanford.edu" helps confirm Stanford University)
- **No private data** — No private data in the system is used

When a match is approved, users receive a friendly email explaining what changed and why, with a link to their ROR record. They can update their affiliation anytime if something doesn't look right.

<img src="/blog/fixing-affiliation-mess/admin-interface.jpg" alt="Admin affiliation matching interface" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Internal admin interface with testing data</em></p>

---

## Related Docs

- [Account Settings](/docs/users/account-settings) — Update your affiliation and other profile settings
- [COI Check](/docs/track-chairs/coi-check) — How PaperFox detects and manages COI

---

# Talk to Your Conferences from Claude, ChatGPT, and More

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/mcp-server
Date: 2026-03-13
Category: Product
Tags: MCP, AI, Claude, ChatGPT

The chat window is becoming the new OS. The next big shift in UI/UX is conversational — describe what you need and the AI handles the rest. [MCP (Model Context Protocol)](https://modelcontextprotocol.io/) is the open standard making this possible, and PaperFox now supports it.

## Ask Instead of Click

PaperFox's web app is still the best place for complex workflows. But many day-to-day tasks are simple lookups — and for those, a conversation is faster:

- *"How many papers for DSW 2027?"* — Submission counts, status breakdown, and acceptance rates.
- *"How are reviews going for ICMR 2027?"* — Completion rates, pending assignments, overdue reviewers.
- *"Show me dsw2027-1"* — Full submission record: title, abstract, authors, review status.
- *"What's the ICAI 2027 program?"* — Published schedule with sessions, speakers, and papers.

Same data, same permissions — just a different way to get to it.

<img src="/blog/mcp-server/mcp-stats.jpg" alt="Asking ChatGPT for conference submission stats via MCP" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "1rem"}}><em>Checking submission stats from ChatGPT — one question, instant answer</em></p>

<img src="/blog/mcp-server/mcp-keynote.jpg" alt="Asking ChatGPT about keynote details via MCP" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Looking up keynote details — the AI calls the right tools automatically</em></p>

## What's Available Today

PaperFox MCP supports a growing set of tools for reading and managing conference data:

**For chairs**: Conference statistics, track-level stats, review progress monitoring, and submission lookups — the queries chairs ask most often, now available in a single sentence.

**For authors**: List your submissions and check paper status.

**For everyone**: Browse conference programs, discover sessions and speakers, and explore conference information.

All actions respect your existing PaperFox permissions. A reviewer can't access chair-only stats, even if the AI tries. Authentication uses OAuth 2.1 — no API keys to manage, and your password is never shared with the AI.

## Early Access — Try It and Tell Us What You Think

MCP support in PaperFox is **experimental**. We're actively developing new tools and improving the experience.
Planned additions include:

- **Review tools**: Submit reviews, update scores
- **Decision tools**: Record accept/reject decisions
- **Notification tools**: Send emails to authors and reviewers
- **Program tools**: Add sessions and schedule talks

The goal is simple: if you can do it on PaperFox, you should be able to do it from your AI assistant.

We'd love your feedback. Try connecting your AI assistant, run a few prompts, and let us know what works, what doesn't, and what tools you'd like to see next. Drop us a note on our [Community Forum](/community/forum) or email us at [support@paperfox.ai](mailto:support@paperfox.ai).

---

## Get Started

See our [MCP documentation](/docs/mcp) for setup instructions for Claude Desktop, ChatGPT, Cursor, and other clients.

---

# One Researcher, Many Inboxes

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/multi-email
Date: 2026-05-26
Category: Product
Tags: Identity, Accounts, Invitations, Conference Operations

Most academics have more than one email address — an official institutional one and a personal one. And people move institutions, picking up a new official address while the old one still works. After a few years, the same person has several live addresses and no single canonical one.

That's fine for a human — you know they're all you. It's a problem for software that decides "is this the same person?" by comparing email strings.

## The Problem: Many Emails, Many Accounts

Conference chairs invite by email, using whichever address they happen to have — often not the one you actually check. That causes two problems:

**The invitation goes to an inbox you don't read.** A review assignment lands in an old address, you never see it, and the chair reassigns the paper. You've been dropped silently — no error, no bounce.

**A second account gets created.** You signed up under `jdoe@oldschool.edu`. A chair invites `j.doe@newschool.edu`. PaperFox can't tell they're the same person, so a second, separate account spins up — a ghost of you, with no submissions or profile.

The knock-on effects are worse: conflict-of-interest checks miss your papers, registration reports flag your own paper as unregistered, and reviewer-load counters split your work across two profiles. Every "is this the same person?" check votes *no*.

## The Fix: Many Emails, One Account

PaperFox lets one account hold any number of verified addresses. Any of them can sign you in, and any invitation sent to any of them lands on the same account.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/account-settings/emails-page.png" alt="Email Addresses settings page with one primary and one verified secondary linked to the same account" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

Adding an address takes one form field and one click:

1. Go to **Settings → Emails**, type the new address, click **Add Email**.
2. Open the verification link from that inbox.
3. The badge flips to **Verified** — the address can now sign you in and catch invitations.

<img src="/docs/assets/user/email-addresses/emails-pending.png" alt="Email Addresses page showing a newly added address in Pending state awaiting verification" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

Sign in with the same password and any of your verified emails. The sidebar always shows your **primary** address, no matter which one you used.

That primary is where notifications go — review reminders, decision letters, password resets. Secondary addresses sign you in and route invitations, but PaperFox never double-emails you. Stop checking an inbox? Switch primary; the old address stays linked so anything in flight still finds you.

## How to Merge Two Accounts Into One

If a chair once invited an address you hadn't linked yet, there may already be two of you. The fix is on the same settings page.

Add the other account's address like any new email. PaperFox sees it belongs to a separate account and offers **Claim from your other account**:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/email-addresses/merge-conflict-cta.png" alt="Email Addresses page showing the email-already-in-use dialog with a Claim from your other account button" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

A verification email goes to that address. Clicking it proves you control both inboxes and opens a preview of exactly what will move — submissions, reviews, memberships, registrations, invitations, and history:

<img src="/docs/assets/user/email-addresses/merge-preview.png" alt="Merge confirmation page showing which account is being absorbed and what records will move" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

Confirm, and the other account is absorbed. You keep the surviving account's password and profile; the other's address becomes a verified secondary; everything historical follows you over.

## Your History Stays Intact

Merging links the accounts — it doesn't rewrite the past. Your old submissions and reviews keep the exact affiliation and email you used at the time, because those are snapshots, captured when you submitted or reviewed and never edited afterward. A 2019 paper still shows your old-school address on the byline; merging just means that paper now lives under your single account. Changing your primary email works the same way: it routes future mail, but it never touches the record of what you sent from where.

## Try It

If you've ever missed an invitation because a chair used the wrong email, or spotted two PaperFox accounts with your name on them, open **Settings → Emails**, add every address you use professionally, and verify each one.

---

## Related

- [Managing Your Email Addresses](/docs/users/email-addresses) — Step-by-step docs for adding, verifying, and merging

---

# PaperFox at ICIS 2025: Powering AIS Workshop Programs

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/paperfox-goes-global-icis
Date: 2025-12-25
Category: News
Tags: AIS, ICIS, Conference Programs

The International Conference on Information Systems (ICIS) is the flagship annual conference of the Association for Information Systems (AIS), the leading global professional association for information systems scholars. ICIS 2025 takes place in Nashville, bringing together thousands of researchers, educators, and practitioners from around the world.

Several AIS-affiliated workshops at ICIS 2025 used PaperFox.ai to build and publish their conference programs:

- [**Workshop on Information Systems and Economics (WISE)**](https://www.paperfox.ai/conference/wise2025/program) – a premier forum for research on information systems through the lens of economics.
- [**Workshop on Information Technologies and Systems (WITS)**](https://www.paperfox.ai/conference/wits2025/program) – a quantitatively oriented conference traditionally held in conjunction with ICIS.
- [**Workshop on E-Business (WeB)**](https://www.paperfox.ai/conference/web2025/program) – a long-running workshop focused on e-business and digital commerce.
- [**SIGBIT Workshop on Blockchain Ecosystems and Artificial Intelligence**](https://www.paperfox.ai/conference/sigbit2025/program) – organized by AIS SIGBIT, focusing on blockchain ecosystems and AI.

Attendees can explore these programs on the go using the PaperFox mobile app or browse them directly through our mobile-friendly web version.

We thank the workshop chairs for trusting PaperFox.ai and giving us the opportunity to serve their communities.

---

# Official Launch of PaperFox.ai

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/official-launch
Date: 2025-12-01
Category: Announcement
Tags: Launch, Product News

After months of working closely with several conferences during our beta, we're excited to officially launch PaperFox.ai.

Managing submissions, reviews, programs, registration, and websites across multiple systems has long been a challenge for conference organizers. As an academic who has organized conferences of many different sizes, I've experienced these pain points firsthand. Many existing systems have supported the community for years, but we often hear from organizers that they are looking for a more unified, easier-to-use solution with better UI/UX and improved workflows.

With the rapid advancement of AI, this is the perfect moment to build the next generation of academic conference management systems to address these challenges. This vision led us to create PaperFox.ai — an all-in-one, AI-powered platform that brings every part of the conference workflows together in one place. Our goal is simple: reduce administrative burden and provide a smoother, more intuitive experience for chairs, authors, reviewers, and participants.

This official launch is only the beginning. We remain committed to improving and refining PaperFox in close collaboration with the academic community.

Warm regards,

**Harry Wang**

*Founder & CEO, PaperFox.ai*

[LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/harryjwang/) · [Website](https://harrywang.me) · [Email](mailto:harry@paperfox.ai)

---

# Introducing the Program Builder & Mobile App

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/program-builder
Date: 2025-12-10
Category: Product
Tags: Program Builder, Mobile App

We've been working hard on making conference programs easier—for both organizers and attendees. Traditional programs built in Word or Excel are hard to update, difficult to search, and frustrating to use on mobile.

We think there's a better way and here's how PaperFox helps:

## For Organizers

- Drag-and-drop program builder for conferences of any size, with flexible session types and parallel tracks
- Link accepted papers directly from submissions
- Modern editor with support for Markdown and media files
- Export to professionally designed Word documents

<img src="/blog/program-builder/program-builder.png" alt="Program Builder interface" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Intuitive drag-and-drop interface for building conference programs</em></p>

<img src="/blog/program-builder/export-program.png" alt="Export to Word document" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Export your program to professionally designed Word documents</em></p>

## For Attendees

- Clean, modern, mobile-friendly online program
- Bookmark sessions and papers
- AI Program Assistant for natural-language questions beyond traditional search
- Native iOS and Android apps to browse the full program

<img src="/blog/program-builder/chat-with-program.png" alt="AI Program Assistant" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Chat with the AI Program Assistant to find sessions and get personalized recommendations</em></p>

## Coming Soon: Build Your Program with AI

- AI generates the full draft program from submissions and constraints
- Chairs finalize the schedule by chatting with AI—faster, simpler, smarter

What features would help your next conference? [Let us know!](/community/forum)

---

## Related Docs

- [Program Management](/docs/chairs/program-management) — Build and publish your conference schedule
- [Chat with Program](/docs/chairs/chat-with-program) — Enable AI-powered program assistant for attendees
- [Using the Mobile App](/docs/users/using-mobile-app) — Browse programs on iOS and Android

---

# Which Papers Have No Registered Author?

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/registration-coverage
Date: 2026-05-10
Category: Product
Tags: Registration, Fuzzy Matching, AI, Conference Operations

Every conference has the same rule: at least one author of each accepted paper must register, or the paper drops from the program. Answering the simple question — *which papers don't have a registered author yet?* — may take hours of manual cross-referencing, and the answer is still wrong.

## Problem 1: Authors and Registrants Often Live in Different Systems

The **author list** comes out of the submission system. The **registrant list** comes out of the payment platform. They're filled out months apart, by the same people in different moods, and they don't auto-sync.

## Problem 2: Cross-Referencing by Hand is Tedious and Error-Prone

Take a 300-paper conference with 800 registrants. That's roughly 900 author rows to scan against an 800-row registrant list — hours of focused work. And even when a chair is paying attention, the same person shows up looking like a different person:

| On the paper | In the registrant list | Same person? |
|---|---|---|
| Diana Park · `dp4521@nyu.edu` · *New York University* | Diana Park · `diana.park@stern.nyu.edu` · *NYU Stern* | Yes |
| Daniel Costa · `dcosta@gmail.com` · *NOVA School of Business and Economics* | Daniel A. Costa · `daniel.costa@novasbe.pt` · *Nova SBE* | Yes |
| James Carter · `jcarter@purdue.edu` · *Purdue University West Lafayette* | Jim Carter · `jcarter01@gmail.com` · *Purdue University* | Yes |
| Tony Lin · `tony@utdallas.edu` · *UT Dallas* | Jianhui (Tony) Lin · `jlin@utdallas.edu` · *University of Texas at Dallas* | Yes |

The failure modes are bad either way: chase someone who already paid (trust erodes), or skip someone who didn't (paper drops from the program).

PaperFox solves both problems.

## Solution 1: One System

Two ways to bring registration data into PaperFox alongside your submissions.

**(a) Run registration on PaperFox.** Configure registration types, point attendees at the registration page, and PaperFox handles Stripe payments, badges, and confirmations end-to-end. The registrant list and the author list share a database — no second system, no reconciliation. Simple workflow, simple [transparent and competitive pricing](/pricing).

**(b) Import data from your existing registration platform.** If registration runs through another system — Eventbrite, your university's registration system, a custom form, anything that can export a CSV — bulk-import it into PaperFox. The smart importer dedupes by email, so you can keep re-uploading as new registrations come in. Those rows land as **External Registrants** alongside native ones.

<img src="/blog/registration-coverage/import-preview.png" alt="Bulk-import preview dialog showing CSV rows, with per-row status indicators for matching PaperFox accounts, existing external entries, and existing internal registrations" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

## Solution 2: Auto-Match

Three layers, in order:

1. **Exact email match.** Author's email matches a registrant email → paper is covered. Handles the easy 70–80% with no chair input.
2. **Find potential matches.** For everyone else, the chair runs a matcher against the registrant list. Two engines, pick one per run.
3. **Chair confirms.** Every suggestion appears inline on the **Author Registration Coverage** report with two buttons — **Confirm match** or **Not a match**. Every decision is reversible from a dedicated **Matching Decisions** page.

<img src="/blog/registration-coverage/report.png" alt="Author Registration Coverage report with the Find Potential Matches card on top — Algorithm Match selected, AI Match available — and the papers-needing-registration list below" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

### Algorithm Match (the default)

Free, runs entirely inside PaperFox. Name similarity is Jaro-Winkler on tokenized names (so "Tony Lin" matches "Jianhui (Tony) Lin"); identity hints are institutional email domain (`nyu.edu` ↔ `stern.nyu.edu` counts as a partial match because they share the `nyu` base), ROR id, or distinctive affiliation tokens after stripping stopwords ("Nova" matches between "NOVA School of Business" and "Nova SBE"). Consumer domains like gmail and outlook are denylisted — sharing those means nothing. The matcher tunes toward false positives because dismissing a wrong suggestion is one click; missing a real registration sends a needless reminder.

Under this system, the four cases above resolve as:

| Case | Score |
|---|---|
| Diana Park @ `nyu.edu` ↔ `stern.nyu.edu` | **96%** (subdomain hierarchy) |
| Daniel Costa ↔ Daniel A. Costa | **83%** (middle initial + "nova" token) |
| James Carter ↔ Jim Carter | **78%** (nickname + "purdue" token) |
| Tony Lin ↔ Jianhui (Tony) Lin | **~95%** (parenthetical preferred name) |

All four surface as **"potential match"** for one-click chair confirmation.

### AI Match (for the hard cases)

The algorithm is fast and free but it only knows about the signals it was taught. Some cases need judgment: transliterated names from different scripts, affiliations spelled in another language, a Western nickname paired with a different given name on the registrant side, departmental rebranding the affiliation tokens don't catch. Those cases either score too low to surface, or the algorithm picks the wrong candidate among several near-misses.

AI Match runs the same shortlist past OpenAI for each undecided author and asks: same person, or different? Suggestions come back with a one-line **explanation** — *"First and last names match, affiliation identical, and emails share the same domain with a middle initial on registrant"* — so chairs see *why* before clicking Confirm.

<img src="/blog/registration-coverage/potential-match.png" alt="An AI Match suggestion expanded under a paper row: 95% confidence, AI match badge, the suggested registrant, and a short explanation of why the model thinks they're the same person" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

### Privacy: explicit opt-in

AI Match sends author and registrant names, emails, and affiliations to OpenAI. For conferences where that's a no-go, **Algorithm Match never leaves PaperFox** — and it's the default. AI Match prompts for confirmation before the first run, so nothing is sent until a chair clicks through.

<img src="/blog/registration-coverage/ai-confirm.png" alt="Enable AI Matching confirmation dialog warning that names, emails, and affiliations will be sent to OpenAI, with Cancel and Enable AI Matching buttons" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

## Before and After

| | Manual | PaperFox |
|---|---|---|
| Two disconnected systems | Export both, open in Excel | Native + bulk-import in one DB |
| Hard-to-spot matches (different email, different spelling) | Often missed | Ranked suggestions with confidence |
| Audit & reversal | "Wait, did I already check this one?" | Every confirm/dismiss reversible |

<img src="/blog/registration-coverage/matching-decisions.png" alt="Matching Decisions page listing confirmed matches and dismissed suggestions, each with a Revoke or Restore action" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

---

## Related Docs

- [Author Registration Coverage](/docs/chairs/registration-coverage) — How to use the report end-to-end
- [Import External Registrants](/docs/chairs/import-external-registrants) — Pulling in registrants from outside PaperFox
- [Fixing the Affiliation Data Mess](/blog/fixing-affiliation-mess) — Companion piece on cleaning up the source data

---

# AI Research Profile Discovery: Building Reviewer Expertise Profiles Automatically

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/research-profiles
Date: 2026-02-15
Category: Product
Tags: AI, Research Profiles, Peer Review

A reviewer's expertise is scattered everywhere — Google Scholar pages, ORCID profiles, personal websites, CVs buried in email threads, and the chair's memory of who mentioned "deep learning" at last year's dinner. No single place brings it all together.

Conference chairs end up Googling reviewer names one by one, skimming publication lists, and making their best guess. This doesn't scale past 30 reviewers.

## The Problem with Traditional Expertise Profiling

Most conference management systems ask reviewers to select topics from a predefined list — "Machine Learning", "NLP", "Computer Vision", and so on. This approach has three problems:

**Lists go stale.** Research moves fast. A topic list written two years ago doesn't capture emerging areas like "foundation models" or "AI agents."

**Granularity is wrong.** Broad categories like "Machine Learning" tell you nothing useful. A reviewer who works on reinforcement learning for robotics is very different from one who works on federated learning in healthcare. But a list with 500 micro-topics is unusable.

**Self-reporting is incomplete.** Reviewers rush through profile setup. They pick 3-4 topics and move on, even if they're qualified to review papers in 15 different areas. The system only knows what reviewers bother to tell it.

## How AI Profile Discovery Works

When a reviewer is invited to a conference on PaperFox, AI Profile Discovery kicks in automatically. It runs a web search using the reviewer's name, email, affiliation, and country to find their publications across Google Scholar, ORCID, Semantic Scholar, and academic websites. From those papers, it extracts expertise keywords and builds a research profile — no manual data entry required.

The AI extracts both broad research areas ("information systems", "health informatics") and specific topics ("technology adoption", "electronic health records"). This mix captures expertise at every level of granularity — exactly what static topic lists get wrong.

The whole process takes 30-60 seconds. Reviewers get an email asking them to verify the results, and they can re-run discovery anytime to pick up new publications.

## Three Types of Keywords

Each reviewer's profile combines three independent sources of expertise keywords, each color-coded so you can tell where they came from at a glance.

### System Keywords — Automatic from Submissions

When a researcher submits a paper in PaperFox, the submission form includes a keywords field. Those keywords are automatically linked to every co-author's research profile as **system keywords**.

<img src="/blog/research-profiles/keyword-types.jpg" alt="System Keywords and User Expertise Tags on the research profile page" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>System Keywords (purple) from submitted papers, and User Expertise Tags (green) added manually by the reviewer</em></p>

These are read-only and always in sync. If a paper is revised and keywords change, the profile updates automatically. No action required from anyone.

System keywords are the highest-confidence signal because they come directly from actual research output — not self-assessment, not AI guessing.

### AI-Discovered Tags — From Publication History

These are the tags extracted by AI Profile Discovery from the reviewer's published work across the web.

<img src="/blog/research-profiles/ai-tags.jpg" alt="AI-Discovered Tags section showing expertise keywords" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>AI-Discovered Tags (blue) extracted from recent publications via web search</em></p>

They're replaced each time discovery re-runs, so they stay current with the reviewer's latest work. Reviewers can remove irrelevant tags — removed ones won't reappear until the next run.

### User Expertise Tags — Added by Reviewers

Reviewers can add their own keywords to fill gaps. Maybe they have deep expertise in a topic they haven't published on yet. Maybe they're moving into a new research area. Maybe the AI missed something.

The key difference from traditional topic lists: reviewers type free-text keywords instead of picking from a fixed menu. "Explainable AI for clinical decision support" is a valid tag. So is "XAI." There's no predefined list to go stale.

## Compared to Traditional Systems

In most conference management systems, reviewer expertise is a manual process — chairs configure topic lists for reviewers to select from, or simply ask reviewers to enter their own keywords. Either way, the system only knows what reviewers bother to tell it. This works for small conferences where chairs know their reviewers personally.

At scale, it breaks down. Reviewers don't fill out profiles carefully. Topic lists don't evolve with the field. Chairs can't personally vet 100+ reviewers. The result is incomplete expertise data and hours of manual work.

PaperFox starts from the opposite end: build the expertise profile automatically from real data, then let humans refine it. Less work for reviewers, better data for chairs, and profiles that improve as more papers flow through the system.

---

## Related Docs

- [Research Profile](/docs/users/research-profile) — Manage your research profile and expertise keywords
- [Invite Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/invite-reviewers) — Invite reviewers and monitor their profile status
- [Auto Assign Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/auto-assign-reviewers) — Automatically match papers to reviewers

---

# Smart Matching: How to Assign Reviewers to Papers Automatically

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/smart-matching
Date: 2026-04-04
Category: Product
Tags: AI, Reviewer Assignment, Peer Review

Every conference chair knows the pain: 300 submissions, 80 reviewers, 3 reviewers per paper. That's 900 assignments to get right. And it's harder than it looks — reviewers have overlapping expertise, uneven workloads, conflicts of interest, and limited capacity. Assigning the best reviewer to one paper can leave another paper with no qualified options. The real problem isn't finding good matches for individual papers, it's optimizing across all papers and all reviewers simultaneously, subject to all those constraints at once.

## How Smart Matching Works

Smart Matching solves this in three stages: score every possible reviewer-paper pair, filter out conflicts of interest, then find the globally optimal assignment.

### Stage 1: Scoring

Every eligible reviewer is scored against every paper. The score (0-100) combines two signals:

**Text similarity (up to 70 points)** compares the paper's title and abstract against the reviewer's expertise profile. Two methods are available:

- **BM25** — a proven text retrieval algorithm used by search engines and systems like OpenReview's TPMS. Free, runs in seconds.
- **AI Semantic** — uses OpenAI embeddings to understand that "NLP" and "natural language processing" mean the same thing, or that "deep learning" relates to "neural networks." Catches matches that pure text matching misses. Paper titles, abstracts, and reviewer tags are sent to OpenAI for embedding — use BM25 instead if data privacy is a concern.

**Keyword overlap (up to 30 points)** directly compares the paper's keywords against the reviewer's expertise tags — including [system keywords, AI-discovered tags, and user-added tags](/blog/research-profiles). Exact phrase matches score highest, with stemmed word-level fallback for partial overlaps (e.g., "computing" matches "computational").

### Stage 2: Conflict Filtering

Conflicts of interest are enforced before any assignment is made. Reviewers who are co-authors of a paper's authors (checked against the last 3 years of co-authorship data) or who have declared conflicts are excluded — the algorithm cannot override this.

### Stage 3: Global Optimization

This is where Smart Matching differs from manual assignment. Instead of assigning one paper at a time, it solves for all assignments simultaneously using Min-Cost Max-Flow — a network optimization algorithm used by major conference systems like OpenReview (NeurIPS, ICML). The algorithm finds the assignment that **maximizes total match quality across the entire conference**, making the right trade-offs automatically when two papers compete for the same reviewer.

For typical conference sizes (50-500 papers, 20-200 reviewers), this completes in milliseconds.

## Flexibility for Real Conferences

Academic conferences aren't clean optimization problems. Chairs need control over workload limits, whether to fill gaps or start fresh, and how to balance match quality against even workload distribution. Smart Matching supports all of these — see [Auto Assign Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/auto-assign-reviewers) for the full set of options.

## The Best of Both Worlds

Smart Matching isn't meant to replace human judgment — it handles the 90% that's tedious so chairs can focus on the 10% that requires expertise. Let the algorithm generate assignments, review the suggestions, swap out any that don't feel right, then apply. Or make your key assignments by hand first, then run "Fill gaps" to handle the rest. The chair stays in control while the algorithm does the heavy lifting.

## Before and After

| | Manual | Smart Matching |
|---|---|---|
| **300 papers, 80 reviewers** | Days of spreadsheet work | Seconds |
| **Optimization scope** | One paper at a time | All papers simultaneously |
| **Conflict checking** | Hope you remember | Automatic, every pair |
| **Workload balance** | Eyeball it | Algorithmic |
| **Iterate and adjust** | Start over | Re-run with different settings |

---

## Related Docs

- [Auto Assign Reviewers](/docs/track-chairs/auto-assign-reviewers) — Step-by-step guide to running Smart Matching
- [Smart Matching Algorithm](/docs/engineering/smart-matching-algorithm) — Technical deep-dive into scoring and optimization
- [AI Research Profile Discovery](/blog/research-profiles) — How reviewer expertise profiles are built
- [Conflict of Interest Enforcement](/docs/track-chairs/conflicts) — COI rules and detection

---

# Automated Submission Compliance Checking

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/submission-compliance-check
Date: 2026-03-01
Category: Product
Tags: Compliance, PDF Analysis, Automation

Every academic conference has formatting requirements — page limits, font sizes, margin widths, column layouts, anonymization rules. And every conference chair knows the pain of checking whether hundreds of submissions actually follow them.

## The Problem with Manual Checking

Most conferences still check compliance by hand — a volunteer opens each PDF, eyeballs the page count, and hopes the margins look right. With 300 submissions and 10 rules each, that's 3,000 checks and ~25 hours of tedious work.

- **Inconsistent** — different volunteers apply different standards
- **Error-prone** — subtle violations like 0.9-inch margins (when 1 inch is required) are nearly impossible to spot visually
- **Delays reviews** — non-compliant papers discovered mid-review waste reviewer time
- **Anonymization is hard** — double-blind conferences require reading every paper for buried author names, emails, and institutional references

## How PaperFox Handles It

We built an automated compliance checker that runs entirely programmatic checks — no AI involved, just precise PDF analysis. Track chairs define their formatting requirements once, then check all submissions with a single click.

### Define Requirements

The guidelines editor lets chairs configure exactly what to check. Choose from structured requirement types — each with specific parameters:

- **Page limit** — set a maximum, optionally excluding references
- **Page size** — US Letter or A4
- **Margins** — minimum in inches
- **Font size** — required point size
- **Column layout** — single or two-column
- **Line spacing** — single or double
- **File size** — maximum in MB
- **Language** — English or other languages
- **Anonymization** — checks for author names and emails in the PDF text

Each requirement can be marked as MUST (hard fail) or SHOULD (warning), so chairs can distinguish between deal-breakers and soft preferences.

### AI-Powered Rule Extraction

Don't want to set up rules manually? Upload your conference's call-for-papers PDF and let AI do it. PaperFox uses AI to read the document, extract formatting requirements, and pre-fill the rules with the correct types and parameters. You review and adjust before saving — AI does the tedious parsing, you keep control.

<img src="/blog/submission-compliance-check/ai-extract.jpg" alt="Upload PDF or paste text to extract requirements with AI" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Upload a call-for-papers PDF or paste text to auto-extract formatting rules</em></p>

### Run the Check and Review Results

One click checks all submissions in the track. PaperFox extracts text and layout data from each PDF and checks every requirement against actual document properties. A track with 300 submissions typically completes in under a minute.

<img src="/blog/submission-compliance-check/compliance-overview.jpg" alt="Compliance check overview showing page limit rule, run button, and results summary with 263 pass, 0 warnings, 19 failures" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>282 submissions checked against a page limit rule — results in seconds</em></p>

Results show each submission's status — pass, fail, or warning — with evidence like "Page count (9) exceeds limit of 8." Filter by status to find non-compliant submissions, then notify authors directly from the results page with specific findings so they know exactly what to fix.

<img src="/blog/submission-compliance-check/compliance-details-fail.jpg" alt="Compliance details showing page limit and page size violations" style={{width: "380px", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem auto", display: "block"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "1rem"}}><em>Page count and paper size violations flagged automatically</em></p>

<img src="/blog/submission-compliance-check/compliance-details-page-limit.jpg" alt="Compliance details showing anonymization failure with author emails detected" style={{width: "380px", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem auto", display: "block"}} />
<p style={{textAlign: "center", fontSize: "0.875rem", color: "#6b7280", marginTop: "-1.5rem", marginBottom: "2rem"}}><em>Anonymization check catches author emails in the paper</em></p>


## Before and After

| | Manual | PaperFox |
|---|---|---|
| **Time for 300 papers** | ~25 hours | ~1 minute |
| **Consistency** | Varies by volunteer | Same rules, every time |
| **Anonymization check** | Read every paper | Automatic name/email search |
| **Author notification** | Draft individual emails | One-click batch notify |
| **Re-check after revision** | Start over | Re-run with one click |

---

## Related Docs

- [Compliance Check](/docs/track-chairs/compliance-check) — Set up and run submission compliance checks
- [Submission Guidelines](/docs/track-chairs/submission-guidelines) — Configure formatting requirements for your track

---

# Launch Your Conference Website in Minutes

URL: https://paperfox.ai/blog/website-editor
Date: 2025-12-22
Category: Product
Tags: Website Editor, Conference Management

You may not need WordPress or Wix for your conference website. Those tools are powerful, but often overkill for academic conferences—too many features with steep learning curves. What most conferences actually need is a simple, clean website that's easy to update.

PaperFox's built-in website editor gives you exactly that. Create pages, customize your design, and connect submissions, program, forum, and registration with a few clicks. Launch your site the same day you [set up your conference](/docs/chairs/request-conference-site).

## Key Capabilities

- **Custom pages** — Build pages for calls for papers, committees, venue, sponsors, and more
- **Drag-and-drop navigation** — Reorder pages, create submenus, control visibility
- **Rich text editor** — Headers, lists, images, links, and file uploads
- **Banner customization** — 22 color themes, custom images, flexible sizing, and image-only mode
- **Navigation bar** — Upload a logo, choose above or overlaid position, go full-width
- **Custom domain** — Use your own conference URL (e.g., icai2025.org)
- **Live preview** — See exactly how changes look before publishing

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/public-page-config.png" alt="Public Page Configuration" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

## Banner & Navigation

The Landing Page Customization panel controls everything visitors see above the fold.

### Banner

Choose a **Size** (Compact, Standard, or Full Screen), pick from **22 color themes**, and optionally upload a photo. After uploading, a **Reposition** button lets you drag a focus bar to choose which part of the image stays in frame as the banner resizes across screen sizes.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/landing-page-customization.png" alt="Landing Page Customization" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

**New: Use Image As-Is (4:1, No Overlay Text).** When you upload a banner image, a toggle appears that locks the banner to a 4:1 aspect ratio and hides the conference name, date, location, and website link overlay. Use this when your image already includes event branding. Recommended upload size: 1920 × 480.

<img src="/docs/assets/chair/conference-website/banner-with-image-only-toggle.png" alt="Banner section with the Use Image As-Is toggle" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

### Navigation Bar

Control how the nav appears on your site:

- **Position** — "Above banner" or "Overlaid" on top of it (Full Screen forces overlaid)
- **Logo** — Upload your conference logo and choose Small, Medium, or Large size
- **Full width** — Stretch the nav bar edge-to-edge

## Page Editor

Five built-in pages — Home, Submission, Program, Registration, and Forum — come pre-connected to PaperFox. Rename any of them to fit your conference (including Chinese, Japanese, or any script); the URL stays the same.

Add unlimited custom pages for CFP, committee, venue, and more. Each gets a URL slug — type a non-English name and the ✨ button translates it to a clean slug automatically.

Drag pages to reorder or nest into submenus. Use the eye icon to hide a page from the menu without deleting it.

### Rich Text Editor

<img src="/blog/website-editor/tiptab-eidtor.png" alt="Rich text editor" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

The editor supports headers, bold/italic/underline, bullet and numbered lists, checklists, code blocks, image uploads, file attachments, and external links — no code required.

## Integrated Features

System pages sync with your conference data automatically:

| Page | What It Does |
|------|--------------|
| **Submission** | Authors see tracks with deadlines and submit directly |
| **Program** | Your published schedule with search and mobile support |
| **Registration** | Sign-up forms with registration types and Stripe payments |
| **Forum** | Discussion threads for attendees to connect |

Enable only the pages you need. Each updates in real time as you manage your conference.

## Custom Domain

Give your conference a professional address. Connect your own domain (e.g., icai2025.org) and visitors will find you there.

<img src="/blog/website-editor/custom-domain.png" alt="Custom domain setup" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

## Preview & Publish

Click **"View Public Page"** at any time to see exactly how your site looks to visitors. Changes publish instantly — no build step required.

<img src="/blog/website-editor/view-website.png" alt="Conference website preview" style={{width: "100%", borderRadius: "0.5rem", margin: "2rem 0"}} />

---

## Related Docs

- [Create Conference Website](/docs/chairs/create-conference-website) — Step-by-step setup guide
- [Create a Site Request](/docs/chairs/request-conference-site) — Request a new conference site
